advertisement
BCM50 Installation and Maintenance Guide
BCM 5.0
Business Communications Manager
Document Status: Standard
Document Number: NN40170-305
Document Version: 03.03
Date: August 2009
Copyright © 2009 Nortel Networks, All Rights Reserved
The information in this document is subject to change without notice. The statements, configurations, technical data, and recommendations in this document are believed to be accurate and reliable, but are presented without express or implied warranty. Users must take full responsibility for their applications of any products specified in this document. The information in this document is proprietary to Nortel Networks.
Trademarks
Nortel, the Nortel logo, and the Globemark are trademarks of Nortel Networks.
Microsoft, MS, MS-DOS, Windows, and Windows NT are trademarks of Microsoft Corporation.
All other trademarks and registered trademarks are the property of their respective owners.
3
SOFTWARE LICENSE
NORTEL NETWORKS INC. (“NORTEL NETWORKS”) TELECOMMUNICATION PRODUCTS
THIS LEGAL DOCUMENT IS A LICENSE AGREEMENT ("License") BETWEEN YOU, THE END-USER
("CUSTOMER") AND NORTEL NETWORKS. PLEASE READ THIS LICENSE CAREFULLY BEFORE USING
THE SOFTWARE. BY USING THIS SOFTWARE, YOU, THE CUSTOMER, ARE AGREEING TO BE BOUND BY
THE TERMS OF THIS LICENSE. IF YOU DO NOT AGREE TO THE TERMS OF THIS LICENSE, RETURN THE
UNUSED SOFTWARE AND THE ASSOCIATED DOCUMENTATION TO NORTEL NETWORKS THROUGH A
NORTEL NETWORKS AUTHORIZED DISTRIBUTOR WITHIN FIVE (5) DAYS OF YOUR ACQUISITION OF
THE SOFTWARE FOR A REFUND.
Subject to the terms hereinafter set forth, NORTEL NETWORKS grants to CUSTOMER and/or its representatives, with a "need to know," a personal, non-exclusive license (1) to use the licensed software, proprietary to NORTEL NETWORKS or its suppliers and (2) to use the associated documentation. CUSTOMER is granted no title or ownership rights, in or to the licensed software, in whole or in part, and CUSTOMER acknowledges that title to and all copyrights, patents, trade secrets and/or any other intellectual property rights to and in all such licensed software and associated documentation are and shall remain the property of
NORTEL NETWORKS and/or NORTEL NETWORKS’ suppliers. The right to use licensed software may be restricted by a measure of usage of applications based upon number of lines, number of ports, number of terminal numbers assigned, number of users, or some similar measure.
Expansion beyond the specified usage level may require payment of an incremental charge or another license fee.
NORTEL NETWORKS considers the licensed software to contain "trade secrets" of NORTEL NETWORKS and/or its suppliers. Such "trade secrets" include, without limitation thereto, the specific design, structure and logic of individual licensed software programs, their interactions with other portions of licensed software, both internal and external, and the programming techniques employed therein. In order to maintain the "trade secret" status of the information contained within the licensed software, the licensed software is being delivered to CUSTOMER in object code form only.
NORTEL NETWORKS or any of its suppliers holding any intellectual property rights in any licensed software, and/or any third party owning any intellectual property rights in software from which the licensed software was derived, are intended third party beneficiaries of the License.
All grants of rights to use intellectual property intended to be accomplished by this License are explicitly stated. No other grants of such rights shall be inferred or shall arise by implication.
CUSTOMER warrants to NORTEL NETWORKS that CUSTOMER is not purchasing the rights granted by this License in anticipation of reselling those rights.
CUSTOMER shall:
• Hold the licensed software in confidence for the benefit of NORTEL
NETWORKS and/or NORTEL NETWORKS’ suppliers using no less a degree of care than it uses to protect its own most confidential and valuable information; and
• Keep a current record of the location of each copy of licensed software made by it; and
• Install and use each copy of licensed software only on a single CPU at a time (for this purpose, single CPU shall include systems with redundant processing units); and
• Affix to each copy of licensed software made by it, in the same form and location, a reproduction of the copyright notices, trademarks, and all other proprietary legends and/or logos of NORTEL NETWORKS and/or NORTEL NETWORKS’ suppliers, appearing on the original copy of such licensed software delivered to CUSTOMER; and retain the same without alteration on all original copies; and
• Issue instructions to each of its authorized employees, agents and/or representatives to whom licensed software is disclosed, advising them of the confidential nature of such licensed software and to provide them with a summary of the requirements of this License; and
• Return the licensed software and all copies through an Authorized
Distributor to NORTEL NETWORKS at such time as the
CUSTOMER chooses to permanently cease using it.
CUSTOMER shall not:
• Use licensed software (i) for any purpose other than CUSTOMER’s own internal business purposes and (ii) other than as provided by this
License; or
• Allow anyone other than CUSTOMER’s employees, agents and/or representatives with a "need to know" to have physical access to licensed software; or
• Make any copies of licensed software except such limited number of object code copies in machine readable form only, as may be reasonably necessary for execution or archival purposes only; or
• Make any modifications, enhancements, adaptations, or translations to or of licensed software, except as may result from those
CUSTOMER interactions with the licensed software associated with normal use and explained in the associated documentation; or
• Attempt to reverse engineer, disassemble, reverse translate, decompile, or in any other manner decode licensed software, in order to derive the source code form or for any other reason; or
• Make full or partial copies of any documentation or other similar printed or machine-readable matter provided with licensed software unless the same has been supplied in a form by NORTEL
NETWORKS intended for periodic reproduction of partial copies; or
• Export or re-export licensed software and/or associated documentation by downloading or otherwise from the fifty states of the United States and the District of Columbia.
PLEASE REFER TO THE NEXT PAGE
Installation and Maintenance Guide
4
Except for Java Product (as defined herein below), CUSTOMER may assign collectively its rights under this License to any subsequent owner of the associated hardware, but not otherwise, subject to the payment of the then current license fee for new users, if any. No such assignment shall be valid until CUSOMTER (1) has delegated all of its obligations under this License to the assignee; and (2) has obtained from the assignee an unconditional written assumption of all such obligations; and (3) has provided NORTEL NETWORKS a copy of such assignment, delegation and assumption; and (4) has transferred physical possession of all licensed software and all associated documentation to the assignee and destroyed all archival copies. Except as provided, neither this License nor any rights acquired by CUSTOMER through this License are assignable. Any attempted assignment of rights and/or transfer of licensed software not specifically allowed shall be void and conclusively presumed a material breach of this License.
The rights and obligations arising under this License shall be construed in accordance with the laws of the State of Tennessee. If for any reason a court of competent jurisdiction finds any provision of this License or portion thereof to be unenforceable, that provision of the License shall be enforced to the maximum extent permissible so as to effect the intent of the parties and the remainder of this License shall continue in full force and effect.
This License constitutes the entire agreement between the parties with respect to the use of the licensed software and the associated documentation, and supersedes all prior or contemporaneous understandings or agreements, written or oral, regarding such subject matter. No amendment to or modification of this License will be binding unless in writing and signed by a duly authorized representative of
NORTEL NETWORKS.
If NORTEL NETWORKS (i) claims a material breach of this License, and
(ii) provides written notice of such claimed material breach to
CUSTOMER and (iii) observes that such claimed material breach remains uncorrected and/or unmitigated more than thirty (30) days following
CUSTOMER’s receipt of written notice specifying in reasonable detail the nature of the claimed material breach, then CUSTOMER acknowledges that this License may be immediately terminated by
NORTEL NETWORKS and CUSTOMER further acknowledges that any such termination shall be without prejudice to any other rights and remedies that NORTEL NETWORKS may have at law or in equity.
Open source copyright (ppp-2.4)
This product contains software that is distributed under open source agreements.
This product contains ppp-2.4, a package which implements the
Point-to-Point Protocol (PPP) to provide Internet connections over serial lines. This open source package is freely downloadable at: ftp:// ftp.samba.org/pub/ppp/.
The following copyright notices apply to this software:
EXPRESS LIMITED WARRANTIES FOR ANY ITEM OF LICENSED
SOFTWARE, IF ANY, WILL BE SOLELY THOSE GRANTED
DIRECTLY TO CUSTOMER BY DISTRIBUTOR. OTHER THAN AS
SET FORTH THEREIN, THIS LICENSE DOES NOT CONFER ANY
WARRANTY TO CUSTOMER FROM OR BY NORTEL NETWORKS.
THE LICENSED SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY NORTEL
NETWORKS "AS IS" AND WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND
OR NATURE, WRITTEN OR ORAL, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED,
INCLUDING (WITHOUT LIMITATION) THE IMPLIED
WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND OF FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE.
THIS LIMITATION OF WARRNATIES WAS A MATERIAL
FACTOR IN THE ESTABLISHMENT OF THE LICENSE FEE
CHARGED FOR EACH SPECIFIC ITEM OF SOFTWARE
LICENSED.
Copyright (C) 2002 Roaring Penguin Software Inc.
Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software for any purpose and without fee is hereby granted, provided that this copyright and permission notice appear on all copies and supporting documentation, the name of Roaring Penguin Software Inc. not be used in advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the program without specific prior permission, and notice be given in supporting documentation that copying and distribution is by permission of Roaring Penguin Software Inc..
Roaring Penguin Software Inc. makes no representations about the suitability of this software for any purpose. It is provided "as is" without express or implied warranty.
Copyright (C) 1995,1996,1997,1998 Lars Fenneberg
IN NO EVENT WILL NORTEL NETWORKS AND/OR NORTEL
NETWORKS’ SUPPLIERS AND THEIR DIRECTORS, OFFICERS,
EMPLOYEES OR AGENTS BE LIABLE TO OR THROUGH
CUSTOMER FOR INCIDENTAL, INDIRECT, SPECIAL,
CONSEQUENTIAL, PUNITIVE, OR EXEMPLARY DAMAGES OF
ANY KIND, INCLUDING LOST PROFITS, LOSS OF BUSINESS OR
BUSINESS INFORMATION, BUSINESS INTERRUPTION, OR
OTHER ECONOMIC DAMAGE, AND FURTHER INCLUDING
INJURY TO PROPERTY, AS A RESULT OF USE OR INABILITY TO
USE THE LICENSED SOFTWARE OR BREACH OF ANY
WARRANTY OR OTHER TERM OF THIS LICENSE, REGARDLESS
OF WHETHER NORTEL NETWORKS AND/OR NORTEL
NETWORKS’ SUPPLIERS WERE ADVISED, HAD OTHER REASON
TO KNOW, OR IN FACT KNEW OF THE POSSIBILITY THEREOF.
Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software for any purpose and without fee is hereby granted, provided that this copyright and permission notice appear on all copies and supporting documentation, the name of Lars Fenneberg not be used in advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the program without specific prior permission, and notice be given in supporting documentation that copying and distribution is by permission of Lars Fenneberg.
Lars Fenneberg makes no representations about the suitability of this software for any purpose. It is provided "as is" without express or implied warranty.
Restricted Rights. Use, duplication or disclosure by the United States government is subject to the restrictions as set forth in the Right in
Technical Data and Computer Software Clauses in DFARS
252.227-7013(c) (1) (ii) and FAR 52.227-19(c) (2) as applicable.
NN40170-305
Copyright 1992 Livingston Enterprises, Inc.
Livingston Enterprises, Inc. 6920 Koll Center Parkway Pleasanton,
CA 94566
Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software for any purpose and without fee is hereby granted, provided that this copyright and permission notice appear on all copies and supporting documentation, the name of Livingston Enterprises, Inc. not be used in advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the program without specific prior permission, and notice be given in supporting documentation that copying and distribution is by permission of Livingston Enterprises, Inc.
Livingston Enterprises, Inc. makes no representations about the suitability of this software for any purpose. It is provided "as is" without express or implied warranty.
[C] The Regents of the University of Michigan and Merit Network,
Inc. 1992, 1993, 1994, 1995 All Rights Reserved
Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby granted, provided that the above copyright notice and this permission notice appear in all copies of the software and derivative works or modified versions thereof, and that both the copyright notice and this permission and disclaimer notice appear in supporting documentation.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS" WITHOUT WARRANTY
OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING
WITHOUT LIMITATION WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY
AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. THE REGENTS OF
THE UNIVERSITY OF MICHIGAN AND MERIT NETWORK, INC.
DO NOT WARRANT THAT THE FUNCTIONS CONTAINED IN THE
SOFTWARE WILL MEET LICENSEE'S REQUIREMENTS OR THAT
OPERATION WILL BE UNINTERRUPTED OR ERROR FREE. The
Regents of the University of Michigan and Merit Network, Inc. shall not be liable for any special, indirect, incidental or consequential damages with respect to any claim by Licensee or any third party arising from use of the software.
5
Installation and Maintenance Guide
6
NN40170-305
Task List
Introducing the BCM50 hardware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Viewing the BCM50 system LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Determining DHCP server configuration and IP address . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Checking the installation prerequisites . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
To install a power supply using the power supply mounting enclosure .........................95
To install a power supply using the single power supply mounting bracket ..................95
Connecting the cables to the BCM50 system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
To connect telephone lines to DTM, BRIM, or 4x16 MBMs.........................................113
To connect analog telephone lines to the GATM4/GATM8 or G4x16/G8x16..............114
To connect extensions to DSM16, DSM32, ASM8, 4x16, G4x16, or G8x16 MBMs ...115
To connect the music source using the music source jack .........................................118
To connect the music source using the RJ-21 telephony connector ...........................118
Installation and Maintenance Guide
7
8 Task List
Installing telephones and peripherals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
Installing the analog terminal adapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
To measure the insertion loss from the CO to the analog device................................127
To measure the insertion loss from the analog device to the CO................................127
Configuring the BCM50 system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
Using Telset Administration to set the basic parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
Using Element Manager to set the basic parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
To connect to the BCM50 system using Element Manager ........................................140
Using the Startup Profile to configure parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
Completing the initial installation (optional) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
Connecting the BCM50 system to the LAN and WAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
To connect the BCM50e or BCM50be main units to the WAN ....................................164
To connect the BCM50a or BCM50ba main units to the WAN ....................................164
NN40170-305
Task List 9
Testing basic BCM50 functionality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
To determine why an MBM does not appear in Element Manager .............................170
Replacing the BCM50 system components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
Replacing a media bay module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
Replacing an internal component . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
RJ-21 telephony connector wiring chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
Installation and Maintenance Guide
10 Task List
G4x16 and G8x16 wiring charts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
DSM16 and DSM32 wiring charts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
ASM8, ASM8+, and GASM wiring chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243
NN40170-305
11
Contents
Federal Communications Commission (FCC) Notice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Introducing the BCM50 hardware. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Power supply mounting bracket and enclosure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
BCM50 Installation and Maintenance Guide
12 Contents
Viewing the BCM50 system LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
ADSL router LEDs (BCM50a and BCM50ba only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Ethernet router LEDs (BCM50e and BCM50be only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Determining DHCP server configuration and IP address. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
BCM50 and BCM50b main units (no integrated router) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
BCM50a, BCM50ba, BCM50e, and BCM50be main units
Checking the installation prerequisites . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
NN40170-305
Contents 13
Installing the BCM50 unit on the rack-mount shelf . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Connecting the cables to the BCM50 system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
Connecting lines and extensions to the RJ-21 telephony connector . . . . . . . . . 112
Connecting telephone lines to the expansion units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
Connecting extensions to the expansion units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
Installing telephones and peripherals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
BCM50 Installation and Maintenance Guide
14 Contents
Installing the analog terminal adapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
Configuring the BCM50 system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
Using Telset Administration to set the basic parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
Using Element Manager to set the basic parameters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
Using the Startup Profile to configure parameters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
Completing the initial installation (optional) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
NN40170-305
Contents 15
Connecting the BCM50 system to the LAN and WAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
Testing basic BCM50 functionality. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
Replacing the BCM50 system components. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
Replacing a media bay module. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
Replacing an internal component . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
BCM50 Installation and Maintenance Guide
16 Contents
RJ-21 telephony connector wiring chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
G4x16 and G8x16 wiring charts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
DSM16 and DSM32 wiring charts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
ASM8, ASM8+, and GASM wiring chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243
NN40170-305
Contents 17
BCM50 Installation and Maintenance Guide
18 Contents
NN40170-305
New in this release 19
New in this release
The following sections detail what’s new in Business Communications Manager 50 Installation
and Maintenance for release 5.0.
•
Features
This release contains no new features.
BCM50 Installation and Maintenance Guide
20 New in this release
NN40170-305
21
Regulatory information
For regulatory information about the BCM50 system:
•
“North American regulatory information”
•
“International regulatory information” on page 26
North American regulatory information
This Class A device complies with Part 68 and Part 15 of the FCC Rules and ICES-003 Class A
Canadian EMI requirements. Operation is subject to the following two conditions (1) This device may not cause harmful interference and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
Repairs to certified equipment should be coordinated by a representative designated by the supplier. Any repairs or alterations made by the user to this equipment, or equipment malfunctions, may give the telecommunications company cause to request the user to disconnect the equipment. Users should ensure for their own protection that the electrical ground connections of the power utility, telephone lines, and internal metallic water pipe system, if present, are connected together. This precaution may be particularly important in rural areas.
Caution: Users should not attempt to make such connections themselves, but should contact the appropriate electric inspection authority, or electrician, as appropriate.
Do not attempt to repair this equipment. If you experience trouble, write for warranty and repair information:
USA
Nortel
640 Massman Drive
Nashville, TN, USA
37210
Canada
Nortel Repair Service Centre 30
30 Norelco Drive
Weston Ontario, Canada
M9L 2X6
For warranty and repair service outside the USA or Canada, please contact your distributor.
Canadian Notice
The Industry Canada designation identifies certified equipment. This certification means that the equipment meets telecommunications network protective, operational and safety requirements as prescribed in the appropriate Terminal Equipment Technical Requirements document(s). The
Department does not guarantee the equipment will operate to the user's satisfaction.
BCM50 Installation and Maintenance Guide
22 Regulatory information
Federal Communications Commission (FCC) Notice
FCC registration number: This telephone equipment complies with Part 68, Rules and
Regulations, of the FCC for connection to the Public Switched Telephone Network.
Your connection to the Public Switched Telephone Network must comply with these FCC rules:
• Before installing this equipment, users should ensure that it is permissible to be connected to the facilities of the local telecommunications company. The equipment must also be installed using an acceptable method of connection. The customer should be aware that compliance with the preceding conditions may not prevent degradation of service in some situations. See installation instructions for details.
• Use only an FCC Part 68-compliant Universal Service Order Code (USOC) network interface jack, as specified in the installation instructions, to connect to the Public Switched Telephone
Network.
• If the equipment causes harm to the telephone network, the telephone company will notify you in advance that temporary discontinuance of the product may be required. But if advance notice isn’t practical, the telephone company will notify you as soon as possible. You will also be advised of your right to file a complaint with the FCC, if you believe it is necessary.
Ringer Equivalence Number (REN)
The REN provides an indication of the maximum number of terminals allowed to be connected to a telephone interface. The termination on an interface may consist of any combination of devices subject only to the requirement that the sum of the RENs of all the devices does not exceed 5.
EMI/EMC (FCC Part 15)
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:
• Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
• Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.
• Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected.
• Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.
NN40170-305
Regulatory information 23
Important safety instructions
The following safety instructions cover the installation and use of the Product. Read carefully and retain for future reference.
Installation
Warning:
To avoid electrical shock hazard to personnel or equipment damage observe the following precautions when installing telephone equipment:
• Never install telephone wiring during a lightning storm.
• Never install telephone jacks in wet locations unless the jack is specifically designed for wet locations.
• Never touch uninsulated telephone wires or terminals unless the telephone line has been disconnected at the network interface.
Use caution when installing or modifying telephone lines. The exclamation point within an equilateral triangle is intended to alert the user to the presence of important operating and maintenance (servicing) instructions in the literature accompanying the product.
Use
When using your telephone equipment, basic safety precautions should always be followed to reduce risk of fire, electric shock and injury to persons, including the following:
1 Read and understand all instructions.
2 Follow the instructions marked on the product.
3 Unplug this product (or host equipment) from the wall outlet before cleaning. Do not use liquid cleaners or aerosol cleaners. Use a damp cloth for cleaning.
4
Do not use this product near water, for example, near a bath tub, wash bowl, kitchen sink, or laundry tub, in a wet basement, or near a swimming pool.
5 Do not place this product on an unstable cart, stand or table. The product may fall, causing serious damage to the product.
6 This product should never be placed near or over a radiator or heat register. This product should not be placed in a built-in installation unless proper ventilation is provided.
7
Do not allow anything to rest on the power cord. Do not locate this product where the cord will be abused by persons walking on it.
8 Do not overload wall outlets and extension cords as this can result in the risk of fire or electric shock.
9 Never spill liquid of any kind on the product.
10 To reduce the risk of electric shock do not disassemble this product, but send it to a qualified service person when some service or repair work is required.
BCM50 Installation and Maintenance Guide
24 Regulatory information
11
Unplug this product (or host equipment) from the wall outlet and refer servicing to qualified service personnel under the following conditions: a
When the power supply cord or plug is damaged or frayed.
b If the product has been exposed to rain, water or liquid has been spilled on the product, disconnect and allow the product to dry out to see if it still operates; but do not open up the product.
c
If the product housing has been damaged.
d If the product exhibits a distinct change in performance.
Caution: To eliminate the possibility of accidental damage to cords, plugs, jacks, and the telephone, do not use sharp instruments during the assembly procedures.
Warning:
Do not insert the plug at the free end of the handset cord directly into a wall or baseboard jack. Such misuse can result in unsafe sound levels or possible damage to the handset.
12 Save these instructions.
Use of a music source
In accordance with U.S. Copyright Law, a license may be required from the American Society of
Composers, Authors and Publishers, or similar organization if Radio or TV broadcasts are transmitted through the Music On Hold or Background Music features of this telecommunication system.
Nortel hereby disclaims any liability arising out of the failure to obtain such a license.
Safety
Business Communications Manager 50 (BCM50) equipment meets all applicable requirements of both the CSA C22.2 No.60950 and UL 60950 Edition 3.
Danger: Risk of shock.
Read and follow installation instructions carefully.
Ensure the BCM50 is not powered and that all telephone/data cables are removed prior to opening the BCM50 unit in the field.
If installation of additional hardware and /or servicing is required, disconnect all telephone cable connections prior to unplugging the BCM50 modules.
Ensure the BCM50 is connected to a wall outlet with a third-wire protective earth connection prior to connecting any telecommunications cables to the BCM50 main unit or expansion units.
NN40170-305
Regulatory information 25
Caution: Only qualified persons should service the system.
The installation and service of this hardware is to be performed only by service personnel having appropriate training and experience necessary to be aware of hazards to which they are exposed in performing a task and of measures to minimize the danger to themselves or other persons.
Electrical shock hazards from the telecommunication network and AC mains are possible with this equipment. To minimize risk to service personnel and users, the BCM50 system must be connected to an outlet with a third-wire ground.
Service personnel must be alert to the possibility of high leakage currents becoming available on metal system surfaces during power line fault events near network lines.
These leakage currents normally safely flow to Protective Earth ground through the power cord. Therefore, it is mandatory that connection to an earthed outlet is performed first and removed last when cabling to the unit. Specifically, operations requiring the unit to be powered down must have the network connections (central office lines) removed first.
Enhanced 911 configuration
Warning:
Local, state and federal requirements for Emergency 911 services support by Customer
Premises Equipment vary. Consult your telecommunication service provider regarding compliance with applicable laws and regulations.
Radio-frequency interference
Warning: Equipment generates RF energy.
This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio-frequency energy. If not installed and used in accordance with the installation manual, it may cause interference to radio communications. It has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A computing device pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules and with ICES.003, CLASS A
Canadian EMI Requirements. Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause interference, in which case the user, at his or her own expense, will be required to take whatever measures may be required to correct the interference.
Telecommunication registration
BCM50 equipment meets all applicable requirements of both Industry Canada CS-03 and US
Federal Communications Commission (FCC) Part 68 and has been registered under files Industry
Canada 332D-5980A and FCC US: AB6KF15B20705 (key system), US: AB6MF15B20706
(hybrid system), and US: AB6PF15B23740 (PBX system). Connection of the BCM50 telephone system to the nationwide telecommunications network is made through a standard network interface jack that you can order from your local telecommunications company. This type of customer-provided equipment cannot be used on party lines or coin lines.
BCM50 Installation and Maintenance Guide
26 Regulatory information
Before installing this equipment, users should ensure that it is permissible to be connected to the facilities of the local telecommunications company. The equipment must also be installed using an acceptable method of connection. The customer should be aware that compliance with the preceding conditions may not prevent degradation of service in some situations.
Repairs to certified equipment should be made by an authorized maintenance facility designated by the supplier. Any repairs or alterations made by the user to this equipment, or equipment malfunctions, may give the telecommunications company cause to request the user to disconnect the equipment. Users should ensure for their own protection that the electrical ground connections of the power utility, telephone lines and internal metallic water pipe system, if present, are connected together. This precaution may be particularly important in rural areas.
Caution: Users should not attempt to make such connections themselves, but should contact the appropriate electric inspection authority, or electrician.
International regulatory information
The CE Marking on this equipment indicates compliance with the following:
This device conforms to Directive 1999/5/EC on Radio Equipment and
Telecommunications Terminal Equipment as adopted by the European
Parliament And Of The Council.
This is a class A product. In a domestic environment this product may cause radio interference in which case the user may be required to take adequate measures.
Hereby, Nortel declares that BCM50 units, with Model No. NT9T61XX, NT9T62XX,
NT9T64XX, and NT9T65XX, are in compliance with the essential requirements and other relevant provisions of Directive 1999/5/EC.
Information is subject to change without notice. Nortel reserves the right to make changes in design or components as progress in engineering and manufacturing may warrant. This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the European Safety requirements EN 60950 and EMC requirements EN 55022 (Class A) and EN 55024. These EMC limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial and light industrial environment.
Warning:
This is a class A product. In a domestic environment this product may cause radio interference in which case the user may be required to take adequate measures. The preceding warning is inserted for regulatory reasons. If any customer believes that they have an interference problem, either because their Nortel product seems to cause interference or suffers from interference, they should contact their distributor immediately. The distributor will assist with a remedy for any problems and, if necessary, will have full support from Nortel.
NN40170-305
Regulatory information 27
Safety
Warning:
Only qualified service personnel may install this equipment. The instructions in this manual are intended for use by qualified service personnel only.
Warning: Risk of shock.
Ensure the BCM50 is unplugged from the power socket and that any telephone or network cables are unplugged before opening the BCM50.
Read and follow installation instructions carefully
Warning: Only qualified persons should service the system.
The installation and service of this hardware is to be performed only by service personnel having appropriate training and experience necessary to be aware of hazards to which they are exposed in performing a task and of measures to minimize the danger to themselves or other persons.
Electrical shock hazards from the telecommunication network and AC mains are possible with this equipment. To minimize risk to service personnel and users, the
BCM50 system must be connected to an outlet with a third-wire Earth.
Service personnel must be alert to the possibility of high leakage currents becoming available on metal system surfaces during power line fault events near network lines.
These leakage currents normally safely flow to Protective Earth through the power cord.
Therefore, it is mandatory that connection to an earthed outlet is performed first and removed last when cabling to the unit. Specifically, operations requiring the unit to be powered down must have the network connections (exchange lines) removed first.
Additional safety information
The following interfaces (TNV) can be connected to the Public Switched Telephone Network in accordance with Nortel and the local carriers installation requirements:
• BCM50, CSC GATi Ports integrated (Loop Start)
• BCM50, CSC ADSL Port option
• Expansion Unit, Digital Trunk Module (T1/E1/ISDN)
• Expansion Unit, Global Analog Trunk Module 4 and 8 Port (Loop Start)
• Expansion Unit, CTM4/8 (Loop Start)
• Expansion Unit, 4x16 (Loop Start)
• Expansion Unit, G4x16, G8x16 (Loop Start)
BCM50 Installation and Maintenance Guide
28 Regulatory information
• Expansion Unit, BRIM (ST configuration)
• Expansion Unit, ADID4/ADID8 (Direct Inward Dial)
• Expansion Unit R2MFC
The following interfaces are designated as Safety Extra Low Voltage (SELV) and cannot be connected to unprotected plant wiring.
• BCM50, CSC Page Port
• BCM50, CSC Auxiliary Ringer Port
• BCM50, CSC Music On-Hold Port.
• BCM50, CSC Relay Port
• BCM50, CSC USB Port
• BCM50, CSC Ethernet Port including optional Ethernet Hub Ports
ITU standardization compliance
The following list provides voice/data applications and telephony support for BCM50 3.0:
• G.711 and G.729AB codecs
• V.27ter, V.29, and V.17 data modem modulation supported (T.38 fax control gateway)
• G3 fax
• T512.1 (Type 1 Receiver DTMF)
• G.168
• H.323
• Q.931
NN40170-305
29
Chapter 1
Getting started
About this guide
The BCM50 Installation and Maintenance Guide describes how to install, configure, and maintain the Business Communications Manager 50 Release 3.0 (BCM50 3.0) systems.
The concepts, operations, and tasks described in this guide relate to the hardware of the BCM50 system. This guide provides task-based information about installing the hardware components and performing basic configuration tasks.
Use Nortel Business Element Manager, Startup Profile, and Telset Administration to configure various BCM50 parameters.
In brief, the information in this guide explains:
• installing hardware components
• starting and initializing the system
• replacing components
• testing the system
Audience
The BCM50 Installation and Maintenance Guide is directed to installers who install, configure, and maintain BCM50 3.0 systems.
To use this guide, you must:
• be an authorized BCM50 3.0 installer or administrator within your organization
• know basic Nortel BCM50 terminology
• be knowledgeable about telephony and IP networking technology
Acronyms
The following is a list of acronyms used in this guide.
Table 1 Acronyms (Sheet 1 of 3)
Acronym
ACU
AIS
APC
Description
Audio conference unit
Alarm indication system
American Power Conversion
BCM50 Installation and Maintenance Guide
30 Chapter 1 Getting started
Table 1 Acronyms (Sheet 2 of 3)
Acronym
MBM
MSC
MWI
NIC
ONS
FRU
GASM
GATM
KEM
KIM
KRS
LAN
LIU
DIMM
DMC
DSM
DSP
DSU
DTE
DTM
FEM
CLID
CNIC
CO
CSU
CTM
DDIM
DECT
DHCP
ASM
ATA
BCM
BRI
BRI CNIC
BRIM
CAP
CFA
Description
Analog station module (analog station media bay module)
Analog terminal adapter
Business Communications Manager
Basic rate interface
Basic rate interface compact network interface card
Basic rate interface module (basic rate interface media bay module)
Central answering position
Carrier failure alarm
Calling line identification
Compact network interface card
Central office
Channel service unit
Caller ID trunk module (caller ID trunk media bay module)
Digital drop and insert MUX
Digital enhanced cordless telecommunications
Dynamic host configuration protocol
Dual in-line memory module
Digital mobility controller
Digital station module (digital station media bay module)
Digital signal processor
Data service unit
Data terminal equipment
Digital trunk module (digital trunk media bay module)
Fiber expansion module
Field replaceable unit
Global analog station module (global analog station media bay module)
Global analog trunk module (global analog trunk media bay module)
Key expansion module
Key indicator module
Keycode retrieval system (Nortel keycode retrieval system)
Local area network
Line isolation unit
Media bay module
Media services card
Message waiting indication
Network interface card on-premise station
NN40170-305
Chapter 1 Getting started 31
Table 1 Acronyms (Sheet 3 of 3)
Acronym
REN
RFO
RMS
RPS
SAPS
SELV
SSD
UPS
OSI
PCI
PEC
PSTN
PSU
QoS
RAI
RAID
USB
VMWI
VoIP
WAN
Description
Open switch interval
Peripheral component interface
Processor expansion card
Public switched telephone network
Power supply unit
Quality of service
Remote alarm indication
Redundant array of independent disks
Ringer equivalence number
Redundant feature option
Root mean square
Redundant power supply
Station auxiliary power supply
Safety extra low voltage
System status display
Uninterruptable power supply
Universal serial bus
Visual message waiting indicator
Voice over Internet protocol
Wide area network
Symbols and text conventions
These symbols highlight critical information for the BCM50 3.0
system.
Caution: Alerts you to conditions where you can damage the equipment.
Danger: Alerts you to conditions where you can get an electrical shock.
Warning:
Alerts you to conditions where you can cause the system to fail or work improperly.
BCM50 Installation and Maintenance Guide
32 Chapter 1 Getting started
Note: Alerts you to important information.
Tip: Alerts you to additional information that can help you perform a task.
!
Security Note: Indicates a point of system security where you can change a default, or where the administrator must decide on the level of security required for the system.
Warning: Alerts you to ground yourself with an antistatic grounding strap before performing the maintenance procedure.
italic text
Warning: Alerts you to remove the BCM50 main unit and expansion unit power cords from the AC outlet before performing any maintenance procedure.
These conventions and symbols represent the Business Series Terminal display and .
Convention Example Used for
Word in a special font (shown in the top line of the display)
Dialpad buttons
Pswd:
Underlined word in capital letters
(shown in the bottom line of a two-line display telephone)
PLAY
£
Command line prompts on display telephones.
Display options on two-line display telephones.
Press the button directly below the option on the display to proceed.
Buttons you press on the dialpad to select a particular option.
These text conventions are used in this guide to indicate the information described:
Convention bold Courier text
Description
Indicates command names, options, and text that you must enter.
Example: Use the info
command.
Example: Enter show ip {alerts|routes}
.
Indicates book titles.
NN40170-305
Chapter 1 Getting started 33
Convention plain Courier text
FEATURE
HOLD
RELEASE
Description
Indicates command syntax and system output (for example, prompts and system messages).
Example:
Set Trap Monitor Filters
Indicates that you press the button with the corresponding icon on the telephone you are using.
Related publications
This section provides a list of additional documents referred to in this guide. Two publication
types are available: Technical Documents
on page 33 and User Guides on page 34.
Technical Documents
System Installation
BCM 5.0 Upgrade Guide
Installation Checklist and Quick Start Guide
Keycode Installation Guide
R2MFC Media Bay Module Installation and Configuration Guide (NN40010-300)
System Programming
Administration Guide
Device Configuration Guide
Networking Configuration Guide
Telset Administration Guide
Telephones and Peripherals
Telephony Device Installation Guide
Digital Mobility
DECT Deployment and Demonstration Tool
Digital Mobility System Installation and Configuration Guide (NN40010-302)
T7406 Cordless Handset Installation Guide (NN40110-300)
BCM50 Installation and Maintenance Guide
34 Chapter 1 Getting started
IP Telephony
WLAN IP Telephony Installation and Configuration Guide (NN40050-301)
Call Pilot
CallPilot Manager Set Up and Operation Guide
CallPilot Telephone Administration Guide
User Guides
There are no references to specific user guides.
How to get help
This section explains how to get help for Nortel products and services.
Getting Help from the Nortel Web site
The best way to get technical support for Nortel products is from the Nortel Technical Support
Web site: http://www.nortel.com/support
This site provides quick access to software, documentation, bulletins, and tools to address issues with Nortel products. More specifically, the site enables you to:
• download software, documentation, and product bulletins
• search the Technical Support Web site and the Nortel Knowledge Base for answers to technical issues
• sign up for automatic notification of new software and documentation for Nortel equipment
• open and manage technical support cases
Getting Help over the phone from a Nortel Solutions Center
If you don’t find the information you require on the Nortel Technical Support Web site, and have a
Nortel support contract, you can also get help over the phone from a Nortel Solutions Center.
In North America, call 1-800-4NORTEL (1-800-466-7835).
Outside North America, go to the following Web site to obtain the phone number for your region: http://www.nortel.com/callus
NN40170-305
Chapter 1 Getting started 35
Getting Help from a specialist by using an Express Routing Code
To access some Nortel Technical Solutions Centers, you can use an Express Routing Code (ERC) to quickly route your call to a specialist in your Nortel product or service. To locate the ERC for your product or service, go to: http://www.nortel.com/erc
Getting Help through a Nortel distributor or reseller
If you purchased a service contract for your Nortel product from a distributor or authorized reseller, contact the technical support staff for that distributor or reseller.
BCM50 Installation and Maintenance Guide
36 Chapter 1 Getting started
NN40170-305
Chapter 2
Introducing the BCM50 hardware
The Business Communications Manager 50 Release 3.0 (BCM50 3.0) provides private network and telephony management capability to small- and medium-sized businesses.
The BCM50 system:
• integrates voice and data capabilities, IP Telephony gateway functions, and data-routing features into a single telephony system
• provides telephony applications for use in a business environment
• provides a DHCP enhancement feature for the main units with integrated router
For information about the BCM50 hardware components:
•
•
BCM50 Expansion unit and media bay modules on page 42
•
•
•
Field-replaceable units on page 59
37
Main units
The primary hardware component in the BCM50 system is the main unit. The six BCM50 main units are divided into two series: standard and basic rate interface (BRI). The BRI (or b) series main units include BRI ports that replace the four analog lines (on the RJ-21 telephony connector) on the standard series.
Note:
The generic term “main unit,” used throughout this document, refers to any of the six main units (BCM50, BCM50a, BCM50e, BCM50b, BCM50ba, and BCM50be) available for a BCM50 system.
To indicate features specific to a particular variation of main unit, that variation of main unit is clearly identified (for example, BCM50ba).
• Standard series
— BCM50 main unit (with Telephony only)
The BCM50 main unit provides call processing and simple data networking functions. It provides connections for 12 digital telephones, 4 (PSTN) lines, 4 analog station ports, and
4 connections for auxiliary equipment (auxiliary ringer, page relay, page output, and music source). The BCM50 main unit has no router, but it has 4 LAN ports: one is the
OAM port for technicians, and the other three are for basic LAN connectivity. See the
figure BCM50 main unit ports and connectors on page 39.
BCM50 Installation and Maintenance Guide
38 Chapter 2 Introducing the BCM50 hardware
— BCM50a main unit (with ADSL router)
The BCM50a main unit provides all the same core functionality as the BCM50 main unit, and it has an integrated ADSL router for advanced data applications. For detailed configuration information, see the BCM50a Integrated Router Configuration Guide. See the figure
BCM50a main unit ports and connectors on page 39.
— BCM50e main unit (with Ethernet router)
The BCM50e main unit provides all the same core functionality as the BCM50 main unit, and it has an integrated Ethernet router for advanced data applications. For detailed configuration information, see the BCM50e Integrated Router Configuration Guide. See the figure
BCM50e main unit ports and connectors on page 39.
• BRI series (b series)—available only in EMEA and APAC regions
— BCM50b main unit
The BCM50b main unit provides similar functionality to the BCM50 main unit. The difference is that the BCM50b main unit has two integrated BRI ports replacing the four analog lines on the RJ-21 telephony connector. See the figure
BCM50b main unit ports and connectors on page 40.
— BCM50ba main unit (with ADSL router)
The BCM50ba main unit provides similar functionality to the BCM50a main unit. The difference is that the BCM50ba main unit has two integrated BRI ports replacing the four analog lines on the RJ-21 telephony connector. For detailed configuration information, see
— BCM50be main unit (with Ethernet router)
The BCM50be main unit provides similar functionality to the BCM50e main unit. The difference is that the BCM50be main unit has two integrated BRI ports replacing the four analog lines on the RJ-21 telephony connector. For detailed configuration information, see
For descriptions of the main unit ports and connectors, see the table
Main unit ports/connectors and descriptions on page 41.
A main unit contains the following field-replaceable units:
• 1 programmed hard disk
• 1 cooling fan
• 1 router card (BCM50a and BCM50e only)
NN40170-305
Chapter 2 Introducing the BCM50 hardware 39
Figure 1 BCM50 main unit ports and connectors
OAM
(port 0)
LAN
(port 1)
Expansion/LAN
(port 2, port 3)
Music source
USB
Retention clip mounting hole
Power
Reset switch
Figure 2 BCM50a main unit ports and connectors
WAN Additional LAN
RJ-21 telephony connector
Retention clip mounting hole
Power
OAM
(port 0)
LAN
(port 1)
Expansion/ LAN
(port 2, port 3)
Reset switch
Music source
USB RJ-21 telephony connector
Figure 3 BCM50e main unit ports and connectors
WAN Additional LAN
Retention clip mounting hole
Power
OAM
(port 0)
LAN
(port 1)
Expansion/ LAN
(port 2, port 3)
Reset switch
Music source
USB
RJ-21 telephony connector
BCM50 Installation and Maintenance Guide
40 Chapter 2 Introducing the BCM50 hardware
Figure 4 BCM50b main unit ports and connectors
OAM
(port 0)
LAN
(port 1)
Expansion/LAN
(port 2, port 3)
Music source
USB BRI ports
Retention clip mounting hole
Power
Reset switch
Figure 5 BCM50ba main unit ports and connectors
WAN Additional LAN BRI ports
RJ-21 telephony connector
Retention clip mounting hole
Power
OAM
(port 0)
LAN
(port 1)
Expansion/ LAN
(port 2, port 3)
Reset switch
Music source
USB RJ-21 telephony connector
Figure 6 BCM50be main unit ports and connectors
WAN Additional LAN BRI ports
Retention clip mounting hole
Power
OAM
(port 0)
LAN
(port 1)
Expansion/ LAN
(port 2, port 3)
Reset switch
Music source
USB
RJ-21 telephony connector
NN40170-305
Chapter 2 Introducing the BCM50 hardware 41
Table 1 Main unit ports/connectors and descriptions
Port/connector Description
Power connector
OAM port (port 0)
A barrel connector jack used to connect the power supply to the main unit.
Retention clip mounting hole A small hole into which you insert the retention clip. The retention clip secures the power connector to the unit.
An RJ-45 jack used to connect a computer running administration software, such as
Element Manager, to the main unit.
LAN port (port 1) An RJ-45 jack used to connect the customer LAN to the main unit.
Expansion/LAN ports (ports 2 and 3)
Two RJ-45 jacks used to connect the expansion units to the main unit. The expansion ports can also provide connections to the Ethernet switch internal to the main unit. If the BCM50 system has no expansion units connected to these ports, you can use the expansion/LAN ports to connect additional devices to the LAN.
Note: Activate the feature for the expansion ports by selecting this feature when you generate your keycode. If you purchase only one expansion port feature, the expansion port on the left (port 2) is active.
WAN port
(BCM50a and BCM50e only).
For BCM50a: An RJ-11 jack used to connect the BCM50a main unit to the ADSL line provided by your Internet service provider (ISP).
For BCM50e: An RJ-45 jack used to connect the BCM50e to the Ethernet port of a
WAN edge device (for example, an external ADSL modem or cable modem).
Note: This port is not available on the BCM50 main unit.
Additional LAN ports
(BCM50a and BCM50e only).
Four RJ-45 jacks that provide connections to the Ethernet switch in the BCM50a and
BCM50e main units. You can use these ports to connect additional devices to the
LAN.
Note 1: These ports are not available on the BCM50 main unit.
Note 2: The BCM50 Release 1 hardware has three additional LAN (RJ-45) ports.
BRI ports
(BCM50b series only).
Two RJ-45 jacks that provide connections for BRI trunks from the Public Switched
Telephone Network (PSTN).
On the BCM50b series main units, the four analog lines on the RJ-21 telephony connector are not available.
Note: The BRI ports feature is activated by selecting this feature when you generate your keycode. If you do not purchase this feature, the BRI ports are unavailable.
Reset switch
Music source port
A button to activate the reset feature. Use a long thin tool to press the button.
Warning: The reset feature erases programming information; use the feature with care.
A phono jack used to connect a music source to the main unit. If you use this port, the music source connections on the RJ-21 telephony connector are disabled.
USB port A USB 1.1-compatible port used to connect a USB storage device or the data interface for an uninterruptable power supply (UPS) to the main unit. The main unit uses the data interface for the UPS to monitor and control the UPS functions. To connect both a USB storage device and a UPS data interface, an industry-standard
USB hub (USB 1.1-compatible) is required.
Note: You must format the USB storage device for the FAT32 file system. If necessary, reformat the USB storage device by plugging it into a USB port on your computer, right-clicking the USB device icon, and selecting FAT32 reformatting. This destroys any data on the USB.
RJ-21 telephony connector An RJ-21 port used to connect telephony devices to the main unit.
The four analog lines on the RJ-21 telephony connector are available only with the
Standard series main units. The BRI series main units include onboard BRI ports instead of the analog lines.
BCM50 Installation and Maintenance Guide
42 Chapter 2 Introducing the BCM50 hardware
Warning: External equipment connected to the auxiliary ringer, page relay, page output, and music-on-hold interfaces must use safety extra low voltage (SELV).
All four interfaces are SELV, and the external equipment connected to these interfaces must be SELV. If these interfaces are not SELV, you must use external line isolation units (LIU).
BCM50 Expansion unit and media bay modules
In addition to a main unit, the BCM50 system can have up to two BCM50 expansion units. An expansion unit connects to the main unit and provides additional functionality. For expansion unit port locations and descriptions, see the figure
The BCM50 expansion unit accommodates one media bay module (MBM) that connects additional telephony equipment to the BCM50 system. The MBMs connect with external devices to implement various types of voice trunks and stations. For a list of trunk and station MBMs that
can be used with your BCM50 system, see the table Trunk MBMs on page 45 and the table
MBMs on page 47. For a complete list of MBMs with links to additional information, see also the
table Media bay modules on page 59.
Ensure that the MBM dip switches are set correctly (see
Verifying the media bay module switch settings on page 98).
Figure 7 BCM50 expansion unit connections
MBM bay Ejector Expansion port
Power
LAN port
Retention clip mounting hole
Table 2 BCM50 expansion unit ports, connectors, and descriptions (Sheet 1 of 2)
Port/connector
LAN port (port 1)
Power connector
Description
An RJ-45 jack used to connect the customer LAN to the main unit.
The LAN port on the expansion unit connects to the internal Ethernet switch on the main unit. You can use the expansion unit LAN port to connect an additional device to the LAN.
A barrel connector jack used to connect the power supply to the expansion unit.
NN40170-305
Chapter 2 Introducing the BCM50 hardware 43
Table 2 BCM50 expansion unit ports, connectors, and descriptions (Sheet 2 of 2)
Port/connector Description
Retention clip mounting hole A small hole into which you insert the retention clip. The retention clip secures the power connector to the expansion unit.
Expansion port
Ejector
MBM bay
An RJ-45 jack used to connect the expansion unit to the main unit.
The ejector is used to remove the media bay module from the expansion unit.
A slot into which you install an MBM.
To connect an MBM to the BCM50 system, you must install the MBM in the expansion unit, and
then connect the expansion unit to the main unit. See Installing an expansion unit on page 97 for
more information about installing an expansion unit.
Warning: Make sure you disconnect the power supply to the expansion unit before inserting or removing an MBM.
The supplied Ethernet cable (shielded) connects the expansion port on the expansion unit to one of the two expansion ports on the main unit. See the figure
(port 3).
Figure 8 Expansion unit and expansion connectors
Expansion unit 1 Main unit Expansion unit 2
Buses 5/6 Buses 7/8
The LAN port on the expansion unit is connected to the internal Ethernet switch on the main unit.
You can use the expansion unit LAN port to connect an additional device to the LAN.
Note: When you plug an expansion unit into the correct port on the main unit, the
LEDs on the expansion unit port light, while the LEDs on the main unit port turn off.
BCM50 Installation and Maintenance Guide
44 Chapter 2 Introducing the BCM50 hardware
Note: When generating your keycode, you must select the feature for the expansion ports you require. If your keycode contains the feature for one expansion port only, the expansion port on the left (port 2) is active.
Media bay modules
The media bay modules (MBM) connect with external devices to implement various types of voice trunks and extensions. You can install one MBM in an expansion unit and you can connect up to two expansion units to the BCM50 system.
Note: To determine which media bay modules and which types of trunk lines are
available in your location, see Interface availability on page 245.
The back of the MBM has a single connector that provides signaling channels, media channels, and power to the MBM. This connector plugs into the MBM backplane in the expansion unit.
Some MBMs also have a cooling fan that operates using the MBM power source. The figure
Media bay module connectors (rear view) on page 44 shows the rear views of the two types of
MBMs.
Figure 9 Media bay module connectors (rear view)
Signaling, media, and power connector
Cooling fan
Signaling, media, and power connector
NN40170-305
Chapter 2 Introducing the BCM50 hardware 45
Trunk media bay modules
Trunk media bay modules connect telecommunications lines to the BCM50 system.
The table
Trunk MBMs on page 45 lists the types of trunk media bay modules that are available
for the BCM50 system.
Table 3 Trunk MBMs
Module type Function Special notes
DTM
(see Digital trunk media bay module on page 45)
BRIM
(see Basic rate interface media bay module on page 46)
Connects digital public switched telephone lines to the BCM50 3.0 system.
Connects a maximum of four ISDN BRI
S/T interfaces.
GATM4/GATM8
(see Global Analog Trunk Module on page 46)
Connects either four (GATM4) or eight
(GATM8) analog public switched telephone lines to the BCM50 3.0 system.
ADID4/ADID8
(see Analog direct inward dialing media bay module on page 47)
R2MFC
Connects either four (ADID4) or eight
(ADID8) analog DID interfaces.
Provides MFC-R2 connectivity over an
E1 trunk.
Can connect to T1 or PRI-E1/T1 interfaces.
—
—
—
For details about the R2MFC MBM, see the R2MFC Media Bay Module
Installation and Configuration Guide
(NN40010-300).
Note: See Market profile attributes on page 245 for supported regions.
Digital trunk media bay module
The digital trunk media bay module (DTM) connects to a standard digital PSTN T1 or E1 carrier:
• On North American BCM50 systems, the DTM connects a T1 (24 channel) or PRI (23 channel) circuit to the BCM50. This PRI interface supports the NI-2 and MCDN protocol variants.
• On International BCM50 systems, the DTM connects a 30 channel PRI, DASS2, or DPNSS circuit to the BCM50. This PRI interface supports the ETSI Euro, ETSI QSIG, and MCDN protocol variants.
The front bezel of the DTM has an RJ-48C connector that connects the DTM to the service provider connection point. The faceplate also has a set of monitor jacks you can use to monitor the span.
Six additional LEDs are on the front of the DTM. For information about these additional LEDs,
The figure DTM faceplate on page 46 shows the DTM module interfaces.
BCM50 Installation and Maintenance Guide
46 Chapter 2 Introducing the BCM50 hardware
Figure 10 DTM faceplate
Monitor jacks RJ-48C digital telephone line connector
Basic rate interface media bay module
The basic rate interface media bay module (BRIM) connects a maximum of four BRI ISDN loops to the BCM50 system. The BRIM recognizes only the T-interface used in European networks. To use the BRIM with the U-interface, typical in North American networks, you require an external
NT1 box to convert the U-interface to a T-interface.
Each BRI ISDN loop you connect adds two telephone lines to the BCM50 system. Therefore, each
BRIM adds a maximum of eight lines to the BCM50 system through the four RJ-48C jacks on the faceplate. The LEDs beside each RJ-48C jack are on when the ISDN line is active. The figure
BRIM faceplate on page 46 shows the BRIM faceplate LEDs and connections.
Figure 11 BRIM faceplate
Global Analog Trunk Module
The Global Analog Trunk Module (GATM) provides an interface for four or eight analog public switched telephone network lines. This module supports both pulse and tone dialing, as well as
Caller ID and Disconnect Supervision in selected markets throughout the world.
The GATM uses an RJ-21 connector as the trunk interface. The figure GATM faceplate on page
47 shows the GATM faceplate LEDs and RJ-21 connector. The module is available either in
four-port (GATM4) or eight-port (GATM8) configurations.
NN40170-305
Chapter 2 Introducing the BCM50 hardware 47
Figure 12 GATM faceplate
Analog direct inward dialing media bay module
The analog direct inward dialing (ADID) MBM provides an interface for four or eight analog public switched telephone network (PSTN) lines. The ADID MBM supports both pulse and tone dialing as well as disconnect supervision, and direct inward dialing call progress signaling as described in standard TIA-464C.
The ADID MBM uses an RJ-21 connector for trunk connections. The figure
shows the ADID faceplate LEDs and connectors. The ADID is available either in four-port (ADID4) or eight-port (ADID8) configurations.
Figure 13 ADID faceplate
Station media bay modules
Station MBMs connect telephones and analog telecommunication devices to the BCM50 system.
The table
Station MBMs on page 47 lists the available station media bay modules.
Table 4 Station MBMs (Sheet 1 of 2)
Module type What it does Special Notes
DSM16+/ DSM32+
(see Digital station media bay module on page 48)
Connects a maximum of 16 (DSM16+) or
32 (DSM32+) digital telephones to the
BCM50 system.
—
4x16
Combination of a CTM4 and a DSM16
(see 4x16 media bay module on page 48)
Connects a maximum of four analog public switched telephone lines to the
BCM50 system.
Also connects a maximum of 16 digital telephones to the BCM50 system.
—
BCM50 Installation and Maintenance Guide
48 Chapter 2 Introducing the BCM50 hardware
Table 4 Station MBMs (Sheet 2 of 2)
Module type What it does Special Notes
G4x16/G8x16
Combination of a GATM4/GATM8 and a
DSM16
(see G4x16 and G8x16 media bay module on page 49)
GASM (ASM8)
(see Analog station media bay modules on page 49 )
Connects a maximum of four (G4x16) or eight (G8x16) analog public switched telephone lines to the BCM50 system.
Also connects a maximum of 16 digital telephones to the BCM50 system.
—
Connects a maximum of eight analog devices to the BCM50 system.
This module provides the following additional services: caller ID, pass through, message waiting indication, and disconnect supervision at the telephone.
This module downloads new firmware.
—
Note: See Market profile attributes on page 245 for supported regions.
Digital station media bay module
The digital station media bay modules (DSM) support digital telephones on the BCM50 system.
The digital station media bay modules have the following characteristics:
• DSM16+—supports 16 digital telephones through one RJ-21 connector.
• DSM 32+—supports 32 digital telephones through two RJ-21 connectors.
Figure 14 DSM faceplate LEDs and connectors
DSM 16 DSM 32
4x16 media bay module
The 4x16 MBM provides both analog trunk connections and digital telephone connections. This
MBM provides connections for four analog trunk lines and 16 digital telephones. Each of the four analog trunk lines support Caller ID and disconnect supervision. You can use an analog telephony device, such as a modem, fax, or telephone to share the trunk through the Aux port beside Line 1.
The figure 4x16 faceplate LEDS and connectors on page 49 shows the 4x16 MBM. The 4x16
MBM has one RJ-21 connector and five RJ-11 connectors on the faceplate.
NN40170-305
Chapter 2 Introducing the BCM50 hardware 49
Figure 15 4x16 faceplate LEDS and connectors
G4x16 and G8x16 media bay module
The G4x16 MBM is a combination of GATM4 and DSM16 MBMs, while the G8x16 is a combination of GATM8 and DSM16 MBMs.
The figure G4x16/G8x16 faceplate LEDS and connectors on page 49 shows the G4x16/G8x16
MBM faceplate with two RJ-21 (amphenol) connectors. The upper RJ-21 (amphenol) connector connects 16 digital telephones to the system, while the lower RJ-21 (amphenol) connector connects 4 or 8 analog PSTN lines with pulse and tone dialing, caller ID, and disconnect supervision in selected markets.
Figure 16 G4x16/G8x16 faceplate LEDS and connectors
RJ-21 (amphenol) connector for 16 digital telephones
RJ-21 (amphenol) connector for 4 or 8 analog PSTN lines
Analog station media bay modules
The analog station media bay modules (ASM8, ASM8+, and GASM) can connect to a maximum of eight analog telecommunication devices. These devices are standard analog telephones, cordless telephones, fax machines, answering machines, or modems. The maximum speed for a modem connection is 28.8 Kb/s.
In addition to ASM8 features, the ASM8+ and GASM offer the following features:
• Visual Message Waiting Indicator (VMWI): LED indicates to the end user that a message is waiting.
• Caller ID: provides the name, phone number, and other information about the caller to the end user at the start of the call.
• Firmware downloading capability: The core can upgrade the ASM8+ and GASM firmware at customer sites.
BCM50 Installation and Maintenance Guide
50 Chapter 2 Introducing the BCM50 hardware
• Enhanced ringing capability: ASM8+ and GASM provide a ringing voltage of 2 REN/65 V rms per port.
• The GASM8 is designated as an on-premise station (ONS) port. This device provides telecommunications ringing voltages and can be configured to provide voltage message waiting indicator (VMWI) voltage levels. Installation of this device and all connections to this device must be performed by qualified telecommunications service personnel who are aware of the hazards associated with telecommunications wiring and are aware of the local regulations for treatment of telecommunications wiring for ONS deployment.
• Disconnect supervision (Open Switch Interval (OSI) as per EIA/TIA 464): indicates to the attached device, in an established communication, that the connected device releases the call.
Disconnect supervision note: When disconnect happens from the Central Office
(CO), the ASM8+ provides an open switch interval (OSI) to the off-hook station of
850 milliseconds (ms) (TIA/EIA 464 section 5.4.10.2.4, minimum is 600 ms) as a disconnect signal. If the station remains on-hook after the disconnect signal, the
ASM8+ disconnects the station equipment from the network without returning a tone (TIA/EIA 464 section 5.4.10.2.5[1]). After the station equipment goes on-hook, the ASM8+ station interface is restored to on-hook (idle).
You must ensure the device, application, or interface card connected to an ASM8+ station interface conforms to these on-hook and off-hook conditions.
The ASM8, ASM8+, and GASM each has one RJ-21 connector on the faceplate. The figure
GASM faceplate LEDs and connectors on page 50 shows the GASM.
Figure 17 GASM faceplate LEDs and connectors
The ringer equivalency number (REN) (per port) for ASM8 is 1; the REN for ASM8+ and GASM is 2.
Note: The termination of the analog interface can consist of any combination of devices, subject only to the requirement that the sum of the RENs of all the devices does not exceed the REN of the interface to which the device is connected.
NN40170-305
Chapter 2 Introducing the BCM50 hardware 51
The table
ATA2, ASM8, ASM8+, GASM, and GASI analog device specifications on page 51
shows the specifications for ATA2, ASM8, GASM, and GASI.
Table 5 ATA2, ASM8, ASM8+, GASM, and GASI analog device specifications (Sheet 1 of 2)
Specification
Ringing frequency
(North America)
ATA2
20 Hz
±
1 Hz
ASM8
20 Hz
±
1 Hz
ASM8+
20 Hz
±
1 Hz
GASM
20 Hz
±
1 Hz
GASI
20 Hz
±
1 Hz
Ringing frequency
(Europe)
Ringing voltage
(Europe)
25 Hz
±
1 Hz 25 Hz
±
1 Hz 25 Hz
±
1 Hz 25 Hz
±
1 Hz 25 Hz
±
1 Hz
Ringing voltage (North
America)
80 V rms
±
10% 55 V rms
±
10% 65 V rms
±
10% 65 V rms
±
10% 65 V rms
±
10%
75 V rms
±
10% N/A 65 V rms
±
10% 65 V rms
±
10% 65 V rms
±
10%
Loop current
Battery feed voltage
FIC code
Ringer equivalency number
20 mA minimum 20 mA minimum 20 mA minimum 20 mA minimum 20 mA minimum
–48 V dc
±
10% –48 V dc
±
10% –29 V dc
±
10% –48 V dc
±
10% –48 V dc
±
10%
OL13ABC
3
ATA2 to BCM50 loop resistance (cable only)
135 ohms
(800 m of
0.5-mm wire or
2600 ft of
24-AWG wire)
N/A
1
N/A
N/A
2
N/A
N/A
2
N/A
N/A
2
N/A
Analog loop resistance on terminal side for voice applications
(cable only)
1300 ohms
(7200 m of
0.5-mm wire or
26000 ft of
24-AWG wire)
Analog loop resistance on terminal side for data applications
(cable only)
200 ohms
(1231 m of
0.5-mm wire or
4000 ft of
24-AWG wire)
Input impedance at tip and ring
600 ohms
Return loss > 20 dB for 200 to 3400 Hz
(when terminated with
600 ohms)
Insertion loss on an internal call
ATA2 to BCM50 loss 3.0 dB dB
±
0.5
250 ohms
(1538 m of
0.5-mm wire or
5000 ft of
24-AWG wire)
250 ohms
(1538 m of
0.5-mm wire or
5000 ft of
24-AWG wire)
600 ohms
> 20 dB for 200 to 3400 Hz
(when terminated with
600 ohms)
ATA2 to BCM50 loss 3.0 dB
±
0.5 dB
200 ohms
(1231 m of
0.5-mm wire or
4000 ft of
24-AWG wire)
200 ohms
(1231 m of
0.5-mm wire or
4000 ft of
24-AWG wire)
600 ohms
> 20 dB for 200 to 3400 Hz
(when terminated with
600 ohms)
200 ohms
(1231 m of
0.5-mm wire or
4000 ft of
24-AWG wire)
200 ohms
(1231 m of
0.5-mm wire or
4000 ft of
24-AWG wire)
600 ohms
> 20 dB for 200 to 3400 Hz
(when terminated with
600 ohms)
200 ohms
(1231 m of
0.5-mm wire or
4000 ft of
24-AWG wire)
200 ohms
(1231 m of
0.5-mm wire or
4000 ft of
24-AWG wire)
600 ohms
> 20 dB for 200 to 3400 Hz
(when terminated with
600 ohms)
ATA2 to BCM50 loss 3.0 dB
±
0.5 dB
ATA2 to BCM50 loss 3.0 dB
±
0.5 dB
ATA2 to BCM50 loss 3.0 dB
±
0.5 dB
Insertion loss on an external call
ATA2 to BCM50 loss 2.2 dB
±
1.0 dB; BCM50 to
ATA2 loss 0.5 dB
±
1.0 dB
ASM to BCM50 loss 3.0 dB
±
1.0 dB; BCM50 to
ASM loss 0.5 dB
±
1.0 dB
ASM to BCM50 loss 3.0 dB
±
1.0 dB; BCM50 to
ASM loss 0.5 dB
±
1.0 dB
ASM to BCM50 loss 3.0 dB
±
1.0 dB; BCM50 to
ASM loss 0.5 dB
±
1.0 dB
ASM to BCM50 loss 3.0 dB
±
1.0 dB; BCM50 to
ASM loss 0.5 dB
±
1.0 dB
BCM50 Installation and Maintenance Guide
52 Chapter 2 Introducing the BCM50 hardware
Table 5 ATA2, ASM8, ASM8+, GASM, and GASI analog device specifications (Sheet 2 of 2)
Specification ATA2
MWI type (see Note) Stutter tone
ASM8
Stutter tone
ASM8+
Stutter tone/
Voltage MWI
(CO: 120 V)
GASM GASI
Stutter tone/
Reverse polarity/
Voltage MWI
(CO: 120 V)
Stutter Tone/
Reverse polarity/
Voltage MWI
(PBX: 90 V)
Disconnect supervision types
N/A N/A OSI EIA/TIA 464 section
4.5.10.2.4/
4.5.10.2.5.1
OSI EIA/TIA 464 section
4.5.10.2.4/
4.5.10.2.5.1
N/A
Note: The MWI type depends on the country profile, and the MWI voltage shown is a maximum value.
BCM50 hardware
The following BCM50 hardware items simplify the setup and connection of the system:
•
•
•
Power supply mounting bracket and enclosure on page 54
•
•
Rack-mount shelf
To rack-mount a BCM50 unit (main unit or expansion unit), you need a rack-mount shelf. The rack-mount shelf mounts in a standard 19-inch equipment rack. The BCM50 unit then clips into the tabs on the rack-mount shelf. These tabs prevent the unit from sliding or falling off the shelf.
If the BCM50 system includes additional units, you can clip another unit to a second set of tabs on the rack-mount shelf. You can clip additional units to tabs on the top of the other units. See the
figure Rack-mount shelf installed in equipment rack on page 52.
Figure 18 Rack-mount shelf installed in equipment rack
NN40170-305
Chapter 2 Introducing the BCM50 hardware 53
Patch panel
The BCM50 patch panel simplifies the connections of lines and extensions to the main unit. The
BCM50 patch panel installs into the rack-mount shelf in a standard equipment rack and connects
Note: The four analog lines on the patch panel are only available with the standard main units. The four analog lines are not available with the BRI series (b-series) main units.
Figure 19 Patch panel connectors
01 02 03 04
01 02 03 04 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12
Wall-mount bracket
To wall-mount a BCM50 unit (main unit or expansion unit), you need a wall-mount bracket. The wall-mount bracket is attached to the wall, and the unit is connected to the wall-mount bracket. If the BCM50 system includes additional units, you need a wall-mount bracket for each unit.
Each wall-mount bracket includes a cable-management tray that you use to store and organize the cables connected to the BCM50 units. See the figure
Wall-mount bracket on page 53.
Figure 20 Wall-mount bracket
BCM50 Installation and Maintenance Guide
54 Chapter 2 Introducing the BCM50 hardware
Power supply mounting bracket and enclosure
There are two BCM50 power supply mounting options that enable you to install your power supply units next to your BCM50 system and keep the power cables neatly organized:
• Power supply mounting enclosure — accommodates up to three power supplies in a case that is similar in size and shape to a BCM50 unit. You can install the power supply mounting enclosure in the same way as BCM50 unit (in a rack, on a wall, or on a desktop).
• Single power supply mounting bracket — accommodates a single power supply for wall-mount applications.
Wiring field card
The wiring field card (WFC) simplifies the connections of lines and extensions to the main unit.
The WFC installs into the cable-management tray of the wall-mount bracket and connects to the
RJ-21 telephony connector through a 50-pin header.
The WFC contains 12 eight-pin modular jacks for digital stations, 4 eight-pin modular jacks for analog trunks, and 4 eight-pin modular jacks for analog stations. The eight-pin modular jacks accept RJ-45 or RJ-11 modular plugs.
A terminal block is available to connect auxiliary equipment. A 50-pin header connects to the
BCM50. See the figure Wiring field card on page 54.
Note: The four analog lines on the WFC are only available with the standard main units.
The four analog lines are not available with the BRI series (b-series) main units.
Figure 21 Wiring field card
50-pin header
Terminal block
Connectors for digital stations
Connectors for analog trunks
Connectors for analog stations
BCM50 components
For descriptions of the BCM50 components:
•
•
Power supply adapter cord (international users) on page 55
•
Uninterruptable power supply on page 55
NN40170-305
Chapter 2 Introducing the BCM50 hardware 55
•
•
•
•
RJ-21 telephony connector on page 58
Power supply
Figure 22 BCM50 power supply
To BCM50 unit
Power supply cord
Power supply cable (NA shown)
To wall outlet
A BCM50 power supply is included with each main unit and expansion unit.
In addition, international (non-North American) users require a power supply adapter cord for each main unit and expansion unit.
Power supply adapter cord (international users)
The power supply adapter cord is for international (non-North American) BCM50 users. The cord connects to the power supply on one end and to the (C-14) BCM50 power bar on the other end.
You require one power supply adapter cord for each power supply you want to connect to the power bar.
Uninterruptable power supply
An uninterruptable power supply (UPS) is an optional device that maintains continuous operation during a power interruption or failure. The UPS provides power source monitoring and battery backup activation so that critical BCM50 functionality is maintained.
During a power failure, the UPS provides sufficient time to either correct the problem or activate a contingency plan to sustain services. The UPS performs a graceful shutdown of the BCM50 two minutes before the UPS battery power is drained.
BCM50 Installation and Maintenance Guide
56 Chapter 2 Introducing the BCM50 hardware
The BCM50 supports American Power Conversion (APC) UPS devices that use a USB control interface. The APC UPSs include the APC UPS-Smart family (for example, UPS-Smart 750 and
UPS-Smart 1000) and UPS-Back family (for example, UPS-Back 500 ES and UPS-Back 350 ES).
You can use the UPS control software to configure various operational settings.
Note: For the UPS to function correctly, you must connect it before you power up the BCM50 system. If you connect a UPS to a running system, the UPS does not function.
The USB port on the UPS uses a different communication speed than the USB port on the BCM50 system. Due to this difference, you must use an industry-standard USB hub (USB 1.1-compatible) to connect the UPS data connection to the BCM50 system. The USB hub not only provides additional USB ports, it converts the data communication speed so the UPS and BCM50 system can communicate properly.
On BCM50 systems with more than one unit, you must connect the power supplies for all the units must to a single UPS.
The interaction between the UPS and the BCM50 occurs in three stages:
1 Configuration—This stage sends configuration information to the UPS device and requires minimal user interaction.
2
Monitoring—This stage is a steady-state, periodic monitoring cycle where the BCM50 reads the status of the UPS. This stage requires minimal user interaction.
3 Failure condition—This stage initiates an action when a threshold value is surpassed.
The BCM50 system requires user interaction in the case of a planned system shutdown. You must manually power down the UPS and the BCM50 main unit when performing a system shutdown.
The UPS feature is supported in all markets (110~120V and 220~240V power standards).
Hard disk
Each main unit contains a single hard disk and a hard disk bracket to install it in the main unit. See the figure
Hard disk and bracket on page 57.
For installation and replacement instructions, see Replacing an internal component on page 195.
NN40170-305
Figure 23 Hard disk and bracket
Chapter 2 Introducing the BCM50 hardware 57
Hard disk
Hard disk bracket
Cooling fan
The main units have one cooling fan. The expansion unit has two cooling fans. See the figure
Figure 24 Cooling fan fan connector
The cooling fan mounts in the back of the BCM50 enclosure.
BCM50 Installation and Maintenance Guide
58 Chapter 2 Introducing the BCM50 hardware
RJ-21 telephony connector
Use the RJ-21 telephony connector to connect a 25-pair (RJ-21) cable to the main unit. Then use
• Four analog lines (standard main units only)
Use these connections for analog trunks from the Public Switched Telephone Network
(PSTN). The four analog lines on the RJ-21 telephony connector are not available on the BRI series (b-series) main units.
• Four analog telephones
Use these connections for analog telephony devices such as single-line telephones, fax machines, and modems.
• Auxiliary ringer
Use this connection for an auxiliary ringer (customer supplied). The BCM50 system uses the auxiliary ringer to control the cadence of an auxiliary ringer. You must use this output in a low-current, low-voltage application only. Do not use this output for switching the auxiliary ringer directly.
• Page output
Use this connection to connect an internally generated voice-paging signal to an external paging amplifier (customer supplied).
• Page relay
When you use the page output to connect an external paging amplifier, you also use the page relay. The page relay connects to a floating relay contact pair. The BCM50 system uses the page relay to control the external paging amplifier.
• Music input
Use the Music input to connect an external music source that supplies a signal to held lines
(music on hold) or telephone speakers (background music). The input source can be any available radio or music source approved for connection to the network. If you use this connection, do not use the Music input jack on the main unit faceplate.
• Twelve digital telephones
Use these connections for digital telephones. For a list of digital telephones that are compatible with the BCM50 system, see the Telephony Device Installation Guide.
Warning: External equipment connected to the auxiliary ringer, page relay, page output, and music-on-hold interfaces must use safety extra low voltage (SELV).
All four interfaces are SELV and the external equipment connected to these interfaces must be SELV. If these interfaces are not SELV, you must use external line isolation units
(LIU).
Note: The analog trunk interfaces and analog telephony device interfaces on the RJ-21 telephony connector are compatible with the North American telephony interface standards only.
If your BCM50 system is in a country that uses a different telephony standard, you must use media bay modules for your analog trunks and media bay modules or ATAs for your analog telephony devices.
NN40170-305
Chapter 2 Introducing the BCM50 hardware 59
Router card
The BCM50e main unit has a router card that uses an Ethernet interface to connect to a WAN edge device (for example, an external ADSL modem or a cable modem).
The BCM50a main unit has a router card that uses an ADSL interface to connect the BCM50 system to the Internet Service Provider (ISP).
For information about replacing the router card, see Replacing an internal component on page 195.
Field-replaceable units
The table
Field-replaceable units on page 59 and the table Media bay modules on page 59 provide
a list of field-replaceable units (FRU) and media bay modules (MBM) for the BCM50 system. Use these tables as references when you need to order, replace, or install hardware components. The tables provide references to the component descriptions and installation procedures.
Note: The product engineering code (PEC) can change over time; consult the catalog for the latest information.
Table 6 Field-replaceable units
Component description FRU Description
Router card with Ethernet connector
Router card with ADSL interface
Hard disk, programmed
Power supply
Cooling fan
Replacement procedure
“Replacing an internal component”
“Replacing an internal component”
“Replacing an internal component”
“Replacing an internal component”
Table 7 Media bay modules (Sheet 1 of 2)
Component description
4x16 MBM
Analog DID
ASM8 MBM
BRIM MBM
DSM16+ MBM
DSM32+ MBM
DTM MBM
FRU Description Installation procedure
“Analog direct inward dialing media bay module”
“Analog station media bay modules”
“Basic rate interface media bay module”
“Digital station media bay module”
“Digital station media bay module”
“Digital trunk media bay module”
BCM50 Installation and Maintenance Guide
60 Chapter 2 Introducing the BCM50 hardware
Table 7 Media bay modules (Sheet 2 of 2)
Component description
G4x16/G8x16 MBM
GASM MBM
GATM4/GATM8 MBM
FRU Description Installation procedure
“G4x16 and G8x16 media bay module”
“Analog station media bay modules”
Accessories
You can use the following accessories with the BCM50 system:
Station auxiliary power supply (SAPS)—provides power for the central answering position
(CAP) when you connect the 7316E to five or more KIMs. You can also extend the loop length between a telephone or terminal and the BCM50 system from 1000 to 2600 feet. You must use a dedicated cable to connect the two locations.
Analog Terminal Adapter 2 (ATA2)—converts digital signals to analog signals to allow communication with analog devices such as fax machines, modems, and answering machines. The
ATA2 supports a maximum transmission rate of 28.8 Kb/s. With a single-line telephone, the
ATA2 supports a long-loop configuration.
NN40170-305
Chapter 3 Viewing the BCM50 system LEDs 61
Chapter 3
Viewing the BCM50 system LEDs
This section describes the BCM50 system LEDs including BCM50 main unit, expansion unit, and media bay module (MBM) LEDs.
For information about the BCM50 system LEDs:
•
•
•
ADSL router LEDs (BCM50a and BCM50ba only) on page 64
•
Ethernet router LEDs (BCM50e and BCM50be only) on page 65
•
BRI port LEDs on main unit (BRI series only) on page 67
•
Media bay module LEDs (expansion units only) on page 67
•
•
System status LEDs
The two system status LEDs on the BCM50 main units (BCM50, BCM50a, BCM50e, BCM50b,
BCM50ba, and BCM50be) show the current state of the BCM50 system.
You can view the system status LEDs on the faceplate and on the top of the main unit. See the
figure Location of system status LEDs on a main unit on page 62. The bottom LED is the power
LED, and the top LED is the status LED. Under normal operating conditions, both LEDs are solid green.
BCM50 Installation and Maintenance Guide
62 Chapter 3 Viewing the BCM50 system LEDs
Figure 25 Location of system status LEDs on a main unit
Status LED
Power LED
The table
System status LED states and descriptions on page 62 describes the meaning of the
system status LEDs after the system boots up and is in service.
Table 8 System status LED states and descriptions
Power Status Description
LED states seen during Start up sequence
Solid yellow
Solid yellow
Solid yellow
Solid green
Solid yellow
Off
Solid yellow
Solid yellow
Power applied to system
Power on self test (POST). Lasts for 9 seconds.
System initializing (lasts 14 seconds).
Kernel initialization (lasts 8 seconds) or
Safe OS.
Solid green
Solid green
Blink green
Solid green
Solid green Solid red Services initialization failed.
LED states seen during Safe Mode start up sequence
Solid red Solid green
Services initializing (lasts 1 minute).
Normal operation.
Solid red Solid red
System running with factory default settings enabled.
System running in Software Reset mode.
Solid red Blink yellow System running in Configuration Reset mode.
LED states seen during shut down sequence or failure
Solid green
Off
Solid red
Blink yellow
Solid yellow
Blink yellow
Graceful shutdown in progress.
Graceful shutdown completed.
Overheat detected. Thermal shutdown completed.
NN40170-305
Chapter 3 Viewing the BCM50 system LEDs 63
Table 8 System status LED states and descriptions
Power Status Description
Solid red
Blink red
Solid yellow
Off
Solid red
Solid red
Solid red
Off
Power spike or Rail power fluctuation detected.
Rail power fluctuation. Power Monitor
Shutdown completed.
Power spike shutdown completed
(temperature and Rail power ok).
No power, system is shut down (power cable is disconnected).
Start-up Profile LED states (seen only during initial system install or staging)
Blink Yellow Blink Yellow Start-up Profile executing.
Solid Green
Blink Yellow
Solid Green
Blink Red
Start-up Profile successfully applied.
Start-up Profile failure.
LAN port LEDs
Each LAN port on the main unit and expansion unit has two LEDs. These LEDs indicate the status of the connection for that LAN port. The figure
LAN port LED locations on page 64 shows the
location of these LEDs on the main units and expansion unit.
Note: The expansion ports on the main unit also function as LAN ports. The expansion port LEDs indicate LAN activity only. The LEDs do not indicate expansion unit presence. The LEDs do not light.
BCM50 Installation and Maintenance Guide
64 Chapter 3 Viewing the BCM50 system LEDs
Figure 26 LAN port LED locations
LAN port
Router card LAN ports
Expansion port
LAN port LEDs
LAN ports Expansion/
LAN ports
The table
LAN port and expansion port LED indicators on page 64 describes the possible LED
states for the LAN ports LEDs.
Table 9 LAN port and expansion port LED indicators
LED Status
Yellow
Green
On
On
Both LEDs Off
Any LED Flashing
Description
The LAN port is operating at 10 Mb/s.
The LAN port is operating at 100 Mb/s.
No connection.
The LAN port is sending or receiving network data. The frequency of the flashes increases with increased traffic.
ADSL router LEDs (BCM50a and BCM50ba only)
The three ADSL router LEDs on the faceplate of the BCM50a and BCM50ba main units monitor
NN40170-305
Chapter 3 Viewing the BCM50 system LEDs 65
Figure 27 ADSL router LEDs on the BCM50a and BCM50ba main units (BCM50a shown)
Router status Data DSL
The table
ADSL router LED descriptions on page 65 describes the possible ADSL router LED
states.
Table 10 ADSL router LED descriptions
LED
Router status
Data
DSL
Status
On
Off
Flashing
Flashing
Off
On
Off
Flashing
Description
The router card is functioning properly.
The router card is not ready or malfunctioned.
The router card is rebooting.
The router card is sending or receiving data through the WAN port.
The router card is not sending or receiving data through the WAN port.
The router card is linked successfully to a digital subscriber line access multiplexer (DSLAM).
The DSL link is not functioning.
The router card is initializing the DSL line.
Ethernet router LEDs (BCM50e and BCM50be only)
The three Ethernet router LEDs on the BCM50e and BCM50be main units monitor the router
BCM50 Installation and Maintenance Guide
66 Chapter 3 Viewing the BCM50 system LEDs
Figure 28 Ethernet router LEDs on the BCM50e and BCM50be main units (BCM50e shown)
Router status
WAN port
LEDs
WAN port LEDs
The table
LAN port LED indicators on page 66 describes the possible Ethernet router LED states.
Table 11 LAN port LED indicators
LED Status
Router status
On
Off
Flashing
WAN port yellow On
WAN port green On
Any WAN port
LED
Flashing
Both WAN port
LEDs
Off
Description
The router card is functioning properly.
The router card is not ready or malfunctioned.
The router card is rebooting.
The WAN port is operating at 10 Mb/s.
The WAN port is operating at 100 Mb/s.
The WAN port is sending or receiving network data. The frequency of the flashes increases with increased traffic.
No connection.
NN40170-305
Chapter 3 Viewing the BCM50 system LEDs 67
BRI port LEDs on main unit (BRI series only)
The three BRI port LEDs on the BCM50b, BCM50ba, and BCM50be main units monitor the BRI
Figure 29 BRI port LEDs on the BCM50b, BCM50ba, and BCM50be main units (BCM50b shown)
BRI ports
D channel
B channel 1
B channel 2
The table
BRI port LED indicators on page 67 describes the possible BRI port LED states.
Table 12 BRI port LED indicators
LED (channel)
D
B1
B2
Status Description
On (green) D channel is functioning through this BRI port.
On (green) B channel 1 is functioning through this BRI port.
On (green) B channel 2 is functioning through this BRI port.
Media bay module LEDs (expansion units only)
The two media bay module (MBM) LEDs on an expansion unit show the power and status of the
MBM. The figure
MBM LEDs on page 67 shows the location of the
(Power)
and
(Status)
LEDs on an MBM. The power and status LEDs are in the same location on all MBMs.
Figure 30 MBM LEDs
Power Status
BCM50 Installation and Maintenance Guide
68 Chapter 3 Viewing the BCM50 system LEDs
The table
MBM LED descriptions on page 68 describes the possible MBM LED states.
Table 13 MBM LED descriptions
Power Status
Off
On
On
Off
Off
Blinking
Blinking
On
Blinking
On
Description
The MBM has no power, or a failure occurred on the MBM power converter.
BCM50 to expansion unit failure or system initialization.
Hardware is working, but an operational problem exists such as:
• no link to the main unit is detected
• frame alignment is lost on messages from the main unit
• bandwidth not allocated
• MBM is in maintenance state
• MBM is in download state (GASM, GATM4/GATM8)
The MBM has power, but a hardware problem exists such as:
• partial failure of power converter
• thermal overload
• fan failure
The MBM is ready to operate.
DTM LEDs
The DTM has additional LEDs that are not on most other MBMs. The figure DTM LEDs on page
68 shows the location of the DTM LEDs.
Figure 31 DTM LEDs
Power LED
Status LED
In service LED
Loopback test LED
Receive LEDs
Transmit LEDs
The table
DTM LED functions on page 68 describes the functions of the DTM LEDs.
Table 14 DTM LED functions (Sheet 1 of 2)
LED Status
Power
Status
–
–
Descriptions
See “Media bay module LEDs (expansion units only)”
for details.
See “Media bay module LEDs (expansion units only)”
for details.
NN40170-305
Chapter 3 Viewing the BCM50 system LEDs 69
Table 14 DTM LED functions (Sheet 2 of 2)
LED Status Descriptions
In service
Loopback test
Flashing The T1, ETSI, or PRI trunks are out of service because a loopback test is running or the DTM is initializing.
On
Receive alarm On
A continuity loopback test is running.
A problem with the received digital transmission. This half-duplex link does not work.
Receive error On
Transmit alarm On
A small error as a result of degraded digital transmission. Possible causes are an ohmic connection, water ingress, or too long a loop.
The DTM cannot transmit. The DTM sends an alarm indication signal (AIS) to the terminating switch. This half-duplex link does not work.
Transmit error
All LEDS
On The DTM is sending a remote alarm indication (RAI) carrier failure alarm
(CFA) to the terminating switch. If the transmit alarm is not on, this error indicates a far-end or cable problem.
Flashing The DTM is initializing.
BRIM LEDs
The BRIM has one additional LED beside each RJ-48C jack. These LEDs are on when the ISDN line is active. The figure
BRIM LEDs on page 69 shows the location of the LEDs on a BRIM.
Figure 32 BRIM LEDs
Power LED
Status LED
For more information on the power and status LED functions, see
(expansion units only) on page 67.
BCM50 Installation and Maintenance Guide
70 Chapter 3 Viewing the BCM50 system LEDs
NN40170-305
Chapter 4 Determining DHCP server configuration and IP address 71
Chapter 4
Determining DHCP server configuration and
IP address
Each main unit has a
dynamic host configuration protocol (
DHCP) server. This DHCP server supplies Nortel IP Phones and client computers with IP addresses and connection information.
If the main unit has no integrated router, then you can configure the DHCP server using Element
Manager.
If the main unit has an integrated router, then you can activate either the DHCP server on the main unit or the DHCP server on the integrated router. If you want to use the DHCP server on the main unit, you must first disable the DHCP server on the integrated router.
The BCM50 system can have a main unit with or without an integrated router:
•
BCM50 and BCM50b main units (no integrated router) on page 71
•
BCM50a, BCM50ba, BCM50e, and BCM50be main units (with integrated router) on page 72
BCM50 and BCM50b main units (no integrated router)
By default, the main unit is configured with a dynamic IP address, which means the IP configuration is received from a DHCP server.
The BCM50 and BCM50b main units can have two DHCP server configurations:
•
If an external DHCP server is not present on page 71
•
If an external DHCP server is present on page 72
If an external DHCP server is not present
If an external DHCP server is not present, then the main unit uses the following default IP configuration:
IP address:
Subnet mask:
Gateway:
192.168.1.2
255.255.255.0
192.168.1.1
The DHCP server on the main unit supplies IP configuration information for all IP devices (PCs and IP Phones). The DHCP server also supplies specific connection information to the IP Phones.
BCM50 Installation and Maintenance Guide
72 Chapter 4 Determining DHCP server configuration and IP address
If an external DHCP server is present
Warning:
The DHCP server on the main unit is enabled (IP Phones only) by default. If your network already contains a DHCP server, then disable the DHCP server on the main unit. For more information about disabling the DHCP server
on the main unit, see the procedure To configure DHCP server settings on page
If an external DHCP is present, then the BCM50 system uses the IP configuration supplied by the external DHCP server. In this case, the DHCP server on the main unit supplies only IP Phones with IP configuration information. The DHCP server on the main unit does not supply any other devices with IP settings. This means that the administrator need not set up the external DHCP server to supply configuration settings to the IP Phones.
The DHCP server on the main unit must configure a range of IP addresses to supply to the
IP Phones. The DHCP server uses the top 20 percent of a subnet.
For example, if the external DHCP server supplies the IP address 177.218.21.45 (subnet mask is
255.255.255.0) to the BCM50, then the BCM50 DHCP server reserves the range 177.218.21.200 to 177.218.21.254.
You can verify and change this default range using Element Manager.
The administrator must ensure that this range agrees with the network configuration—the external
DHCP server does not use the range.
BCM50a, BCM50ba, BCM50e, and BCM50be main units
(with integrated router)
You can select the DHCP server option to use with the BCM50 integrated router main units. You can select to use the integrated router or you can disable the integrated router and use the DHCP server that is on the main unit. Select the DHCP server option through Element Manager
(Configuration > Data Services > DHCP Server > General Settings tab).
If you select the standard DHCP server on the main unit, you must first disable the DHCP server on the integrated router. You can then configure the DHCP server functionality in the same way as a non-router version.
If you select the DHCP server on the integrated router you can configure the router using the router
WebGUI tool.
By default, the integrated router is selected and you configure the BCM50a, BCM50ba, BCM50e, and BCM50be main units with a dynamic IP address, meaning that these units request an IP configuration from a DHCP server. Because the integrated router has a DHCP server, this DHCP server responds to the request.
NN40170-305
Chapter 4 Determining DHCP server configuration and IP address 73
By default, the router LAN IP address is 192.168.1.1, and the IP address assigned to the BCM50 system is the first IP address in the DHCP pool. If the DHCP pool starts at 192.168.1.190, then the
BCM50 is 192.168.1.190 even though the router is 192.168.1.1. Therefore, the BCM50 system receives the IP address 192.168.1.2 (subnet mask is 255.255.255.0) from the DHCP server on the integrated router.
The DHCP server on the integrated router supplies the information (primary and secondary TPS server information, VLAN IDs) to the IP Phones enabling the phones to connect to the BCM50. If the IP address of the integrated router changes, then the IP address reserved for the BCM50 automatically changes. The DHCP server on the integrated router automatically updates the S1 and S2 IP address.
For more information about configuring a DHCP server for your BCM50 main unit, see the
procedure To configure DHCP server settings on page 144.
BCM50 Installation and Maintenance Guide
74 Chapter 4 Determining DHCP server configuration and IP address
NN40170-305
Chapter 5 Installing the BCM50 system 75
Chapter 5
Installing the BCM50 system
To install a BCM50 system, you must install a BCM50 main unit, any expansion units required, and the telephony components.
The figure BCM50 installation overview
Figure 33 BCM50 installation overview
BCM50 Installation and Maintenance Guide
76 Chapter 5 Installing the BCM50 system
Table 15 BCM50 installation overview (Sheet 1 of 2)
Tasks Description Refer to
Prepare for installation
Get required equipment and tools
Verify these requirements:
• environmental
• electrical
• site telephony wiring
Ensure you have these items:
• basic hardware
• optional equipment
• other hardware and tools
Inspect the components Verify that the main unit box contains all the required components in good condition.
Install the main unit Mount the main unit using these options:
• in an equipment rack with a rack-mount shelf (optional patch panel)
• on a wall with a wall-mount bracket (optional wiring field card)
• on a desktop
Inspect the components Verify that the expansion unit box contains all the required components in good condition.
Install a media bay module (MBM)
Follow these steps to install an MBM:
• set the MBM dip switches to factory default
• insert the MBM into the expansion unit
Checking the installation prerequisites
Unpacking the expansion unit on page 98
Verifying the media bay module switch settings on page 98
System equipment, supplies, and tools on
Unpacking the main unit on page 84
Installing the main unit page 83
Install an expansion unit Mount the expansion unit using the same option as the main unit:
• in an equipment rack with a rack-mount shelf (optional patch panel)
• on a wall with a wall-mount bracket (optional wiring field card)
• on a desktop
• on top of another unit (not for wall-mount option)
Installing the expansion unit on page 103
Connect the cables Connect the cables between these items:
• main unit to expansion unit (if required)
• power supply to units (with and without a UPS)
• lines and extensions to the RJ-21 telephony connector
(optional patch panel or WFC)
• lines and extensions to the MBMs
• auxiliary equipment to the RJ-21 telephony connector
(optional patch panel or WFC)
Connecting the cables to the BCM50 system on page 105
NN40170-305
Table 15 BCM50 installation overview (Sheet 2 of 2)
Tasks
Install telephones and peripherals
Install an ATA2
Description
You can install these telephones:
• System telephones
• Emergency telephone
• IP Phones
• T7406 cordless system
Perform these steps to install an ATA2:
• connect the ATA2
• mount the ATA2
• test insertion loss measurement
• configure the ATA2
Chapter 5 Installing the BCM50 system 77
Refer to
Installing telephones and peripherals on page 121
Installing the analog terminal adapter on page
BCM50 Installation and Maintenance Guide
78 Chapter 5 Installing the BCM50 system
NN40170-305
Chapter 6 Checking the installation prerequisites 79
Chapter 6
Checking the installation prerequisites
Before you install a main unit or expansion unit, perform the following tasks:
• Determine the location for the BCM50 units, telephones, and other equipment based on space and electrical requirements.
• Order the required trunks from the central office.
• Ensure that you have all the equipment and supplies you need to install the system.
For information about BCM50 installation prerequisites:
•
Environmental requirements on page 79
•
Electrical requirements on page 79
•
Site telephony wiring requirements on page 80
•
System equipment, supplies, and tools on page 81
Environmental requirements
Ensure you meet the installation environmental requirements. The installation area must be:
• a minimum of 4 m (13 ft.) from equipment such as photocopiers, electrical motors, and other equipment that produces electromagnetic, radio frequency, and electrostatic interference
• within 1.5 m (5 ft.) of a three-wire grounded electrical outlet
• clean, dry, well ventilated, and free of traffic and excess dust
• within the temperature range of 5°C and 50°C (40°F and 120°F)
• from 20% to 80% non condensing relative humidity
• structurally strong and with enough space to support the BCM50 units
• a minimum of 46 cm (18 in.) from the floor
Note:
The installation area must be of sufficient height from the floor to prevent water damage.
Electrical requirements
Ensure you meet the following electrical requirements:
• Power must be supplied from a non switched, unobstructed outlet within 1.5 m (5 ft.) of the
BCM50 units.
• The supplied power must be a dedicated 110 V to 120 V AC nominal (or 220 V to 240 V AC nominal), 50 to 60 Hz, 15 A minimum service with a third-wire safety ground. The third-wire safety ground provides shock protection and prevents electromagnetic interference.
BCM50 Installation and Maintenance Guide
80 Chapter 6 Checking the installation prerequisites
Danger: Risk of electric shock
The safety of this product requires connection to an outlet with a third-wire ground. Use only with the supplied BCM50 power supply and a three-wire power outlet.
Caution:
Check ground connections
Ensure that the electrical ground connections of the power utility, telephone lines, and internal metal water pipe system, if present, are connected. If these ground connections are not connected, contact the appropriate electrical inspection authority. Do not try to make the connections yourself.
You can connect the power supply to a power bar. The total length of the power cables from the power supply to the electrical outlet (including power bar) must not exceed 2 m (6.5 ft.). You must use a power bar approved by an appropriate National Test Body, with a third-wire ground. Nortel recommends that you do not use an extension cord between the power supply and the power bar or between the power bar and the electrical outlet.
Site telephony wiring requirements
The following sections describe the requirements for wiring digital telephony devices (digital loop) and analog telephony devices (analog loop) to the BCM50 system:
•
•
Digital loop
You must meet the following parameters for a digital loop:
• one, two, or three twisted-pair cables per telephone
• DC loop resistance of less than 64 Ω
• cable length (0.5 mm or 24-AWG) less than 300 m (975 ft.)
• use of a station auxiliary power supply (SAPS) for loops 300 m (975 ft.) to 1200 m (3900 ft.).
In North America, the SAPS must be a CSA- or UL-approved Class 2 power source.
In Europe, the SAPS must be a Class II power source and CE marked.
• no bridge taps
Analog loop
You must meet the following parameters for an analog loop:
• maximum DC loop resistance of 208 Ω
• maximum cable length (0.5 mm or 24-AWG) of 1220 m (4000 ft.)
NN40170-305
Chapter 6 Checking the installation prerequisites 81
System equipment, supplies, and tools
For the equipment required to install the BCM50 system:
•
•
•
Other hardware and tools on page 81
Basic hardware
The BCM50 system comprises a combination of the following hardware:
• main unit: BCM50, BCM50a, BCM50e, BCM50b, BCM50ba, or BCM50be
• expansion unit
• media bay module (MBM)
• telephones
• cabling for connections between hardware units
You can connect a maximum of two expansion units to a BCM50 system. Each expansion unit can contain one MBM.
Note: You require keycodes for some hardware to function.
Optional equipment
You can add the following equipment to the BCM50 system to support specific requirements beyond the basic hardware:
• station auxiliary power supply (SAPS)
• analog terminal adapter 2 (ATA2) if you connect analog equipment to a digital extension line
• uninterruptable power supply (UPS)
• USB hub (required if the system uses a UPS)
Other hardware and tools
You need the following equipment to install a BCM50 unit:
• mounting hardware
(either a rack-mount shelf, a wall-mount bracket per unit, or four rubber feet per unit)
• Phillips #2 screwdriver
• flat blade screwdriver
• pliers
• antistatic grounding strap
• punch-down tool
BCM50 Installation and Maintenance Guide
82 Chapter 6 Checking the installation prerequisites
• surge protector (recommended)
• cables, 25-pair cable with right-feeding female RJ-21 connectors
• 3.5-mm mono audio jack (for external music source)
NN40170-305
83
Chapter 7
Installing the main unit
This section describes how to install the main unit. You can install the main unit in an equipment rack, on a wall, or on a desktop.
The figure Overview of installing the main unit on page 83 shows the steps required to install the
main unit.
Figure 34 Overview of installing the main unit
BCM50 Installation and Maintenance Guide
84 Chapter 7 Installing the main unit
For information about installing the main unit:
•
Unpacking the main unit on page 84
•
Installing the BCM50 unit in an equipment rack on page 84
•
Installing the BCM50 unit on the wall on page 88
•
Installing the BCM50 unit on a desktop or shelf on page 93
Unpacking the main unit
Open the main unit box and check that you have all of the following components:
• one main unit (either BCM50, BCM50a, BCM50e, BCM50b, BCM50ba, or BCM50be)
• one power supply
• one power supply cable
• one power supply retention clip
• four rubber feet
• one screw to secure the RJ-21 telephony connector
• one cable tie
• a documentation CD
• the BCM50 Installation Checklist and Quick Start Guide
Visually inspect the components for damage during shipping.
If you find damage, contact your Nortel sales representative.
Installing the BCM50 unit in an equipment rack
You can install a BCM50 main unit in a standard 19-inch equipment rack along with your other networking and telecommunications equipment.
To rack-mount a BCM50 unit, you need the optional rack-mount kit (NT9T6325). This kit provides the parts to mount up to four BCM50 units into a standard 19-inch equipment rack. The
BCM50 unit mounts into the tabs on the rack-mount shelf. These tabs prevent the unit from sliding around or falling off the shelf. If the BCM50 system includes additional units, you can mount another unit onto a second set of tabs on the rack-mount shelf. You can mount any additional units to tabs on the top of the other units.
If you need to better secure a BCM50 unit, use the screws provided (four per unit) to screw the
BCM50 to the rack. This is a “hardened” installation. For a hardened installation, install only two units per rack—do not stack the units.
You can also use the optional patch panel to simplify the connections to the BCM50 RJ-21 telephony connector.
Caution: For acceptable environmental conditions before selecting a location for the
BCM50 system, see Checking the installation prerequisites on page 79.
NN40170-305
Chapter 7 Installing the main unit 85
Caution: To keep the BCM50 system operating at the optimal internal temperature, keep the top, sides, and rear clear of obstructions and away from the exhaust of other equipment.
Place no objects, except another BCM50 unit or a power supply mounting enclosure, on top of the main unit.
Use the following procedures to install a BCM50 unit in a rack:
•
To install the rack-mount shelf in an equipment rack on page 85
•
To install the BCM50 unit on the rack-mount shelf on page 86
•
To install the power supply on the rack-mount shelf on page 94
To install the rack-mount shelf in an equipment rack
1 Determine the location in the rack where you want to install the BCM50 unit.
2 Position the rack-mount shelf in the rack.
3 Align the holes in the rack-mount shelf with the holes in the equipment rack rails.
4
Fasten the rack-mount shelf to the rack using the four rack screws (supplied with the rack-mount kit). See the figure
Fasten the rack-mount shelf to an equipment rack on page 85.
5
Proceed to Installing the BCM50 unit on the rack-mount shelf on page 85.
Figure 35 Fasten the rack-mount shelf to an equipment rack
Installing the BCM50 unit on the rack-mount shelf
The rack-mount shelf has slots molded into its surface to which you attach the BCM50 units. By attaching the BCM50 units to these slots, you can prevent someone from accidently knocking them off the rack-mount shelf.
BCM50 Installation and Maintenance Guide
86 Chapter 7 Installing the main unit
If you install additional units, you can install a second unit on the shelf beside the first unit. You can install another unit on top of each of the first two units. Nortel recommends a maximum of four units per rack-mount shelf.
Select your installation option:
•
To install the BCM50 unit on the rack-mount shelf on page 86
•
To install a BCM50 unit on top of another unit on page 87
To install the BCM50 unit on the rack-mount shelf
1 Place the BCM50 unit on the rack so that the feet of the unit are in the depressions in the shelf.
2 Move the unit forward until the feet touch the front side of the depressions.
3 Slide the unit back until the feet click in place on the slots in the depressions. See the figure
Attach the units to the rack-mount shelf on page 86.
4 To further secure the unit, use the four self-tapping screws (for plastic) supplied with the rack-mount kit to attach the unit to the rack-mount shelf. Make sure the screw holes in the unit are aligned with the holes in the rack-mount shelf. Then insert the four screws through the holes in the bottom of the shelf and into the screw holes in the bottom of the unit.
Caution: Use only the screws supplied with the rack-mount kit (NT9T6325). Do not replace the screws. Other screws can damage the unit.
5 Install the power supply using a method appropriate for your installation. For details about
installation options, see Installing the BCM50 power supply on page 94.
Figure 36 Attach the units to the rack-mount shelf
NN40170-305
Chapter 7 Installing the main unit 87
To install a BCM50 unit on top of another unit
1 Insert the power supply retention clip into the BCM50 unit.
2
Place the BCM50 unit on top of the other unit. Make sure the feet of the unit are in the slots on the top of the unit and in front of the slots. See the figure
BCM50 unit slots and feet on page
3 Slide the unit back until it clicks in place on the slots.
4
Install the power supply using a method appropriate for your installation. For details about
installation options, see Installing the BCM50 power supply on page 94.
Figure 37 BCM50 unit slots and feet
Slots Feet
Installing the patch panel (optional)
Install the optional patch panel in the equipment rack.
To install the patch panel
1 Determine the location in the rack where you want to install the patch panel.
2 Position the patch panel in the rack.
3 Align the holes in the patch panel with the holes in the equipment rack rails.
4 Fasten the patch panel to the rack using the four rack screws (supplied with the patch panel).
5
Continue with the procedure To connect the cables to the patch panel (optional) on page 119
.
BCM50 Installation and Maintenance Guide
88 Chapter 7 Installing the main unit
Installing the BCM50 unit on the wall
To wall-mount a BCM50 unit, you need a wall-mount bracket. The wall-mount bracket attaches to the wall, and the BCM50 unit connects to the wall-mount bracket. If the BCM50 system includes additional units, you need a wall-mount bracket for each unit. Each wall-mount bracket includes a cable-management tray that you use to store and organize the cables connected to the BCM50 units. An optional wiring field card simplifies the cable connections for the lines and extensions.
If desired you can install an optional plywood backboard 2 cm (3/4 in.) thick.
Caution: For acceptable environmental conditions before selecting a location for the
BCM50, see Checking the installation prerequisites on page 79.
Caution: You must mount BCM50 units side-by-side on the wall. DO NOT attempt to mount units on top of each other when using the wall-mount option.
Caution:
To keep the BCM50 operating at the optimal internal temperature, keep the top, sides, and rear clear of obstructions and away from the exhaust of other equipment.
Use the following procedures to install the BCM50 unit on a wall:
•
To install the BCM50 wall-mount bracket on page 88
•
To install the BCM50 unit on the wall-mount bracket on page 90
To install the BCM50 wall-mount bracket
1 Use a pencil to mark the location of the plywood backboard on the wall. Use a ruler and a level to make sure that the plywood backboard is level.
Note: Nortel recommends the use of a plywood backboard to simplify installing multiple BCM50 units. However, due to the compact size and light weight of the
BCM50 units, a backboard is not required.
If you do not use a backboard, use the appropriate wall anchors or ensure the screws are in a stud.
2 Mount the plywood backboard securely to the wall.
3 Place the wall-mount bracket on the backboard and mark the location of the center keyhole-shaped screw hole on the plywood backboard. See the figure
Wall-mount bracket on page 89.
NN40170-305
Chapter 7 Installing the main unit 89
Figure 38 Wall-mount bracket
1
2
1
2
1
2
Attach the wall-mount bracket with 5 screws:
• Two screws mount through the cable trough
(open the cable-management door).
• Three screws mount as shown in the figure.
Note : When you use three screws, Nortel recommends installing the screws in the three holes labeled “1” or the three holes labeled “2”.
4 Prepare the wall-mount bracket by removing the alignment tabs:
• If this is the only unit in the BCM50 system, remove the alignment tabs on the right side of the wall-mount bracket.
• If this is the last unit on a BCM50 system with multiple units, remove the alignment tabs on the left side of the wall-mount bracket.
Place the additional wall-mount bracket on the backboard on the right side of the existing wall-mount bracket. Use the alignment tabs to ensure the two wall-mount brackets are properly aligned.
If these options do not meet your requirements, other options are available. For example, you can route the Amphenol connector cable to the left of the unit, or you can route the cable straight down the wall.
5 Attach the wall-mount bracket with five #8 x 2 cm (#8 x 0.75 in.) round-head wood screws: a Install one screw in the backboard. Do not tighten the screw head against the backboard.
Leave approximately 0.5 cm (0.25 in.) of the screw exposed from the backboard.
b Hang the wall-mount bracket on the mounting screw.
c Use a level to make sure the wall-mount bracket is level.
d Install two screws into the screw holes in the wall-mount bracket. See the figure
Wall-mount bracket on page 89.
e Tighten the wood screws against the wall-mount bracket.
f Open the cable-management door.
BCM50 Installation and Maintenance Guide
90 Chapter 7 Installing the main unit g
Install two screws into the screw holes in the cable trough.
6 If the BCM50 system has only one unit, go to the procedure
To install the BCM50 unit on the wall-mount bracket on page 90.
If the BCM50 system has more than one unit, repeat steps 3 to 6 for each wall-mount bracket.
7
Go to the procedure To install the BCM50 unit on the wall-mount bracket on page 90.
To install the BCM50 unit on the wall-mount bracket
1 Insert the power supply retention clip into the BCM50 unit.
2
Slide the wall-mount lock fully to the right (unlock position). See the figure
Wall-mount lock in unlock position on page 90.
Figure 39 Wall-mount lock in unlock position
3 Align the feet on the BCM50 unit with the four holes in the wall-mount bracket. See the figure
Attach the BCM50 unit to the wall-mount bracket on page 91.
NN40170-305
Chapter 7 Installing the main unit 91
Figure 40 Attach the BCM50 unit to the wall-mount bracket
4
Press the unit against the wall-mount bracket and slide the unit down until it clicks in place.
5 Slide the wall-mount lock to the left (lock position). See the figure
Wall-mount lock in lock position on page 91.
Figure 41 Wall-mount lock in lock position
6 Use the supplied screw to secure the wall-mount lock in position.
7
Repeat steps 1 to 6 for each additional BCM50 unit you install.
8 Install the power supply using a method appropriate for your installation. For details about
installation options, see Installing the BCM50 power supply on page 94.
BCM50 Installation and Maintenance Guide
92 Chapter 7 Installing the main unit
Installing the wiring field card (optional)
Install the optional wiring field card (WFC) in the cable-management tray of the main unit.
To install the WFC
1
Clear the WFC installation area of all cables.
2 Place the WFC in the installation area with the 50-pin header at the top.
3
Slide the WFC down until it is at the bottom of the installation area and held in place by the
three clips. See the figure Slide in the WFC on page 92.
Figure 42 Slide in the WFC
4 Press the WFC firmly at the top left corner, center, and right tabs.
The WFC snaps into place. See the figure
Snap the WFC into place on page 92.
Figure 43 Snap the WFC into place
5 Optional—Install the three screws to secure the WFC in place.
6
Continue with the procedure To connect the cables to the wiring field card (optional) on page
NN40170-305
Chapter 7 Installing the main unit 93
Installing the BCM50 unit on a desktop or shelf
To mount a BCM50 unit on a desktop or shelf, attach the supplied rubber feet to the bottom of the unit. If the BCM50 system includes additional units, you can set the additional units beside, or stack them on top of, the first unit. If you are mounting the additional units beside the first unit, attach the supplied rubber feet to the bottom of each unit. If you are stacking the additional units on top of the first unit, mount each unit into the tabs on top of another unit.
Caution: For acceptable environmental conditions before selecting a location for the
BCM50 system, see Checking the installation prerequisites on page 79.
Note:
To keep the BCM50 unit operating at the optimal internal temperature, keep the top, sides, and rear clear of obstructions and away from the exhaust of other equipment.
Place no objects, except another BCM50 unit or a power supply mounting enclosure, on top of the main unit.
To install the BCM50 unit on a desktop or shelf
To install the BCM50 unit on a desktop or shelf:
1 Insert the power supply retention clip into the BCM50 unit.
2 Attach the four self-adhesive rubber feet to the bottom of the BCM50 unit by peeling off the
Figure 44 Location for feet on the bottom of the BCM50 unit
Attach feet here
3 Position the BCM50 unit on a table or shelf. Make sure you leave enough space around the unit for ventilation and access to the cables.
BCM50 Installation and Maintenance Guide
94 Chapter 7 Installing the main unit
4
If the BCM50 system has additional units, you can install the other units on top of, or beside, the existing BCM50 unit.
• To install the additional units beside the existing unit, repeat steps 1 to 3 for each unit.
• To install the additional units on top of the existing unit, see the procedure
BCM50 unit on top of another unit on page 87.
5
Install the power supply using a method appropriate for your installation. For details about
installation options, see Installing the BCM50 power supply on page 94.
Installing the BCM50 power supply
There are several different ways to install a power supply. Select the method that works best for your type of installation. The power supply must be within 1.5 m (5 feet) of the BCM50 unit and within 1.5 m (5 feet) of the AC power outlet (wall outlet or UPS).
Note: Do not stack more than one BCM50 unit or power supply mounting enclosure on top of a first unit.
• For a rackmount installation you can install the power supply directly onto the rackmount shelf or you can use the power supply mounting enclosure.
• For a wallmount installation, you can use the power supply mounting enclosure (for up to three power supplies) or a single power supply mounting bracket (for a single power supply).
• For a desktop installation, you can mount them directly to the desk or you can use the power supply mounting enclosure (for up to three power supplies).
To install the power supply on the rack-mount shelf
1 Place the power supply behind the BCM50 units on the back of the rack-mount shelf.
Make sure the power supply is on its side with the label facing the back of the shelf.
2 Use two cable ties to secure the power supply to the rack-mount shelf.
3 Repeat steps 1 and 2 for each power supply you mount.
NN40170-305
Chapter 7 Installing the main unit 95
To install the power supply on the desktop
1 Place the power supply next to the BCM50 unit on the desktop. The power supply must be within 1.5 m (5 feet) of the BCM50 unit and within 1.5 m (5 feet) of the AC power outlet (wall outlet or UPS).
To install a power supply using the power supply mounting enclosure
1 Slide the BCM50 power supplies into the power supply mounting enclosure.
2 Mount the power supply mounting enclosure in the same manner as your other BCM50 units
(in a rack, on a wall, or on a destop).
For more detailed installation instructions for the power supply mounting enclosure, see the Nortel
BCM50 Power Supply Mounting Enclosure (N0118043).
To install a power supply using the single power supply mounting bracket
1 If you want to install one power supply only, use the single power supply mounting bracket.
2 Attach the single power supply mounting bracket on the wall next to your BCM50 system.
3 Snap the power supply into the power supply mounting bracket.
For more detailed installation instructions for the power supply mounting bracket, see the Nortel
BCM50 Single Power Supply Mounting Bracket (N0130867).
Next step
If you install an expansion unit, proceed to Installing an expansion unit on page 97.
Otherwise, proceed to Connecting the cables to the BCM50 system on page 105.
BCM50 Installation and Maintenance Guide
96 Chapter 7 Installing the main unit
NN40170-305
Chapter 8 Installing an expansion unit 97
Chapter 8
Installing an expansion unit
Adding an expansion unit increases the capacity of your BCM50 system by providing a method of adding a media bay module (MBM). Each MBM you add increases the number of public switched telephone network (PSTN) trunks or extensions that you can connect to the BCM50 system.
The figure Overview of installing a expansion unit on page 97 shows the steps required to install
the expansion unit.
Figure 45 Overview of installing a expansion unit
BCM50 Installation and Maintenance Guide
98 Chapter 8 Installing an expansion unit
For information about installing an expansion unit:
•
Unpacking the expansion unit on page 98
•
Verifying the media bay module switch settings on page 98
•
Installing a media bay module in an expansion unit on page 102
•
Installing the expansion unit on page 103
Unpacking the expansion unit
Open the expansion unit box and remove all the components. Check that the box contains the following components:
• one expansion unit
• one expansion unit power supply
• one power supply cable
• one expansion cable (shielded Ethernet cable)
• one power supply retention clip
• four rubber feet
Visually inspect the components for damage during shipping. If you find damage, contact your
Nortel representative.
Warning: Make sure the power supply to the expansion unit is disconnected before inserting or removing an MBM.
Verifying the media bay module switch settings
NN40170-305
Chapter 8 Installing an expansion unit 99
Figure 46 Switches on the media bay module (not applicable for GASM or GATM)
Underside of MBM
6 5 4 3 2 1 Off
On
Back of MBM dip switches
On
1 2 3 4 5 6 Top of MBM
Off
Rear view of MBM
Note: The GASM and GATM MBMs have a dip switch configuration different from that shown in the figure
Switches on the media bay module (not applicable for GASM or GATM)
on page 99. For more information, see the procedure To set
on page 100 and the procedure To set GATM dip switches on page 101.
Verify that the dip switches for your MBMs are in the default factory positions.
If you install a DTM, ADID4, ADID8, BRIM, 4x16, DSM16, DSM32, or ASM8, ensure that all the switches are on, which is the default setting for the MBM switches. After you set the switches,
proceed to Installing a media bay module in an expansion unit on page 102.
BCM50 Installation and Maintenance Guide
100 Chapter 8 Installing an expansion unit
To set G4x16 or G8x16 dip switches
1
2 Set the Mode/Country Select dip switches to off (down); this setting allows the MBM to automatically download the country profile settings.
Figure 47 G4x16/G8x16 dip switch location
Rear of MBM
2
ON
OFF
1 2 3 4 5 6
Module Select
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 ON
OFF
Mode/Country Select
Table 16 G4x16/G8x16 lines and DNs settings
Expansion unit
1
Module
05
Card
01
07 01
Lines
065-068 (G4X16)
065-072 (G8x16)
095-098 (G4X16)
095-102 (G8X16)
DNs
253-268
285-300
To set GASM dip switches
1 For the dip switches on the left side at the rear of the module, set all switches to on.
2 For the dip switches on the right side at the rear of the module, set the switches according to
the table GASM dip switch settings (switch 1–3)
on page 100 and the table GASM dip switch settings (switch 4–8) on page 101.
Table 17 GASM dip switch settings (switch 1–3)
Switch
Switch 1
Switch 2
Switch 3
Description Setting
Firmware download capability OFF—Standard mode (firmware downloading not supported)
ON—Enhanced mode (firmware downloading supported)
Set when the firmware is downloaded from the BCM50
(for enhanced mode only)
OFF—if you want the GASM to download the firmware when the firmware version in the BCM50 is different from the version in the GASM (default)
ON—if you want the GASM to download the firmware whenever a cold start is performed for the BCM50
Enable or disable echo cancellation
OFF—Enables echo cancellation (default)
ON—Disables echo cancellation
NN40170-305
Chapter 8 Installing an expansion unit 101
Table 18 GASM dip switch settings (switch 4–8)
Switches 4 to 8 select the region for the GASM as follows:
Switch 4 Switch 5 Switch 6
North America
United Kingdom
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
Australia
Poland
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
Switch 7
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
Switch 8
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
3
After you set the switches, proceed to
Installing a media bay module in an expansion unit on page 102.
To set GATM dip switches
1
For the dip switches on the left side at the rear of the module, set all switches to on.
2 For the dip switches on the right side at the rear of the module (country profile switches), set all switches to off. The GATM downloads the country profiles automatically.
3 After you set the switches, proceed to
Installing a media bay module in an expansion unit on page 102.
BCM50 Installation and Maintenance Guide
102 Chapter 8 Installing an expansion unit
Installing a media bay module in an expansion unit
Warning: Risk of shock.
Only qualified telecommunications service personnel are permitted to service this equipment.
Ensure the BCM system is unplugged from the power socket and that any telephone or network cables are unplugged before opening.
The MBMs have been safety-approved for installation into the BCM system. It is the responsibility of the installer and user to ensure that installation of the hardware does not compromise existing safety approvals or local electrical code regulations for telecommunications equipment and wiring installation.
Do not connect the digital station ports of the DSM16+, DSM32+, or
Combination MBMs to the PSTN. Only approved digital phone sets or peripheral devices can connect to the DSM16+, DSM32+, and Combination MBMs.
Warning:
Digital Station ports DSM16+, DSM32+, and Analog Station ports GASM8 must not be connected to exposed plant. This includes Digital Station ports residing on the Combination MBMs G4x16 and G8x16. Use only proprietary Nortel Digital
Station Sets for connection to digital ports and agency approved Analog devices for connection to the Analog Station ports.
The digital station ports of the Combination MBMs must not be connected to exposed plant
Follow this procedure to install a media bay module (MBM).
To install an MBM
1 Attach one end of a grounding strap to your wrist and the other end to a grounded metal surface.
2 With the face of the MBM toward you, insert the MBM into the expansion unit.
3
Push the MBM completely into the expansion unit. You hear a click when the MBM is firmly seated in the expansion unit.
The MBM must be configured for it to function. For information about configuring an MBM,
see the procedure To configure the MBM(s) on page 158.
4 Proceed with
Installing the expansion unit on page 103.
NN40170-305
Chapter 8 Installing an expansion unit 103
Installing the expansion unit
Make sure that the expansion unit is installed close enough to the main unit so that the supplied expansion cable can be connected between the expansion unit and main unit.
The expansion unit can be mounted in a rack, on a wall, or on a desktop. Typically, the expansion unit is mounted in the same way as the main unit.
Use one of the following procedures to mount the expansion unit:
•
Installing the BCM50 unit in an equipment rack on page 84
•
Installing the BCM50 unit on the wall on page 88
•
Installing the BCM50 unit on a desktop or shelf on page 93
Next step
If you install a second expansion unit on the system, repeat the procedures in this section for the second expansion unit.
BCM50 Installation and Maintenance Guide
104 Chapter 8 Installing an expansion unit
NN40170-305
Chapter 9 Connecting the cables to the BCM50 system 105
Chapter 9
Connecting the cables to the BCM50 system
This section describes how to connect the telephone lines, telephony devices, and power to the
BCM50 system.
The figure Overview of connecting cables to the BCM50 system on page 105 shows the steps
required to connect the cables to the BCM50 system.
Figure 48 Overview of connecting cables to the BCM50 system
BCM50 Installation and Maintenance Guide
106 Chapter 9 Connecting the cables to the BCM50 system
For information about connecting the cables to the BCM50 system:
•
Connecting the expansion unit on page 106
•
Connecting the power supply on page 108
•
Connecting the lines and extensions on page 110
•
Connecting the auxiliary equipment on page 115
Connecting the expansion unit
The expansion unit connects to the main unit through the expansion ports on the front of the units.
The figure Expansion ports on page 106 shows the location of the expansion ports on the BCM50
main unit and the expansion unit.
Figure 49 Expansion ports
Main unit
Expansion/LAN
(port 2)
Expansion/LAN
(port 3)
Expansion unit
Expansion port
Note: The expansion unit connected to expansion/LAN port 2 on the main unit is designated as Expansion 1 in Element Manager, while the expansion unit connected to expansion/LAN port 3 is designated as Expansion 2.
Use this information to configure the correct media bay module (MBM) in
Element Manager (see Configuring the media bay module on page 158).
NN40170-305
Chapter 9 Connecting the cables to the BCM50 system 107
To connect an expansion unit
Note:
Keycodes are required for the expansion ports to function. If you purchase a keycode for one expansion port only, expansion/LAN port 2 (on the left) is active.
1 Locate the expansion cable supplied with the expansion unit.
If have no expansion cable, you can use a shielded category 5e-compliant Ethernet cable
(maximum length of 10 m).
2
Plug one end of the expansion cable into the expansion port on the expansion unit.
3 Perform one of the following tasks (see the figure
Connecting the expansion unit to the
• To connect the first expansion unit: Plug the other end of the expansion cable into expansion/LAN port 2 on the main unit. This expansion unit is now designated as
Expansion 1 in Element Manager.
• To connect the second expansion unit: Plug the other end of the expansion cable into expansion/LAN port 3 on the main unit. This expansion unit is now designated as
Expansion 2 in Element Manager.
Note:
When you plug an expansion unit into the correct port on the main unit, the
LEDs on the expansion unit port light, while the LEDs on the main unit port turn off.
Figure 50 Connecting the expansion unit to the BCM50 main unit
Expansion unit 1 Main unit Expansion unit 2
Buses 5/6 Buses 7/8
BCM50 Installation and Maintenance Guide
108 Chapter 9 Connecting the cables to the BCM50 system
The expansion port you select determines the line and extension numbers of the devices connected to the expansion unit. For the default line and extension numbers, see the table
Default line and extension numbers on page 108. If you have a second expansion unit, repeat
steps 1 to 3 for the second unit.
Table 19 Default line and extension numbers
Main unit
Default extension numbers*
Digital: 221–232
Analog: 233–236
237–268
Default line numbers*
061–064
Expansion port 1
065–094
Expansion port 2
269–300 095–124
* The number and type of lines and extensions that are available on the expansion ports are determined by the MBM you install in the expansion unit.
Connecting the power supply
An uninterruptible power supply (UPS) is an optional device that you connect to your BCM50 system. The UPS provides battery backup for the BCM50 system to maintain continuous operation
When connecting a UPS, you must use a USB hub between the UPS and the BCM50 system.
Note: For the UPS to function correctly, you must first connect it before you power up the BCM50 system. If you connect a UPS to a running system, the UPS does not function.
Note: International (non-North American) users require the power supply adapter cord to connect the power supply to the special power bar. For more information,
see Power supply adapter cord (international users) on page 55.
The figure Connect a UPS on page 109 shows how to connect the UPS.
NN40170-305
Figure 51 Connect a UPS
Main unit
Chapter 9 Connecting the cables to the BCM50 system 109
UPS
USB hub
USB cable
Power supply
If your BCM50 system does not have a UPS, continue with the procedure
To connect a power supply without a UPS on page 109.
To connect a power supply using a UPS
1 Mount the UPS within 1.5 meters (5 ft.) of the BCM50 units.
The UPS must be close enough to the BCM50 units that you can connect the power supply to both the UPS and the BCM50 units.
2 Plug one end of the USB cable into the USB port on the UPS.
For information about the location of the ports on the UPS, see the UPS documentation.
3 Plug the other end of the USB cable into the USB hub.
4 Plug one end of the second USB cable into the USB hub.
5 Plug the other end of the second USB cable into the USB port on the main unit.
6 Plug the UPS power cord into the AC power source (wall outlet).
7
Proceed to Connecting the lines and extensions on page 110.
To connect a power supply without a UPS
1 Unpack the new power supply.
2 Check the power supply for damage. If you find damage, contact your Nortel representative.
Warning: Do not use the power supply if the power supply cord or power supply cable is damaged.
3 Rotate the retention clip so the power outlet is open.
4 Plug the power supply cord into the BCM50 unit.
Note: Use only the power supply that is approved by Nortel for use with the BCM50 units.
BCM50 Installation and Maintenance Guide
110 Chapter 9 Connecting the cables to the BCM50 system
5
Rotate the retention clip so that it locks the power supply cord in place.
6 Plug one end of the power supply cable into the power supply.
7
Plug the other end of the power supply cable into the AC power source (wall outlet).
8 Repeat steps 1 to 6 for each BCM50 unit.
Warning: Leakage currents
You must reconnect the power cords to a grounded outlet before reconnecting the telephony and data networking cables.
9
Proceed to Connecting the lines and extensions on page 110.
Connecting the lines and extensions
The telephone lines and extensions connect to the BCM50 system through an RJ-21 telephony connector on the front of the main unit and to the connectors on the MBM installed in the expansion units.
You can also use the optional wiring field card (WFC) to simplify the connection of the lines and extensions to the RJ-21 telephony connector in a wall-mount or desktop-mount installation. For rack-mount installations you can use the optional rack-mount patch panel.
For information about connecting lines and extensions:
•
•
Connecting lines and extensions to the RJ-21 telephony connector on page 112
•
Connecting telephone lines to the expansion units on page 113
•
Connecting extensions to the expansion units on page 114
•
To connect the cables to the wiring field card (optional) on page 119
NN40170-305
Chapter 9 Connecting the cables to the BCM50 system 111
Wiring warnings
Read the following warnings before you connect any telephone lines or extensions to the BCM50 system.
Warning: Electrical shock warning
The MBMs are safety approved for installation into the expansion unit. The installer and user must ensure that installation of the hardware does not compromise existing safety approvals.
BEFORE YOU OPEN the main unit or expansion unit, ensure that the network telecommunication cables are unplugged and the unit is disconnected from the AC power source.
Station modules: Connect the ports on these modules only to approved digital telephones and peripherals with the proper cables on a protected internal wiring system.
Do not connect telephones to wiring that extends to the outside of the building.
Read and follow the installation instructions carefully.
Warning:
Use only qualified persons to service the system.
Service personnel with the appropriate training and experience must perform the installation and service of this unit. Service personnel must be aware of the hazards of working with telephony equipment and wiring. They must have experience in techniques that minimize any danger of shock or equipment damage.
Warning:
Leakage currents
Service personnel must be alert to the possibility of high leakage currents becoming available on metal system surfaces during power-line fault events on network lines. These leakage currents normally flow safely to protective earth ground through the power cord.
However, if the AC power is unplugged prior to disconnecting the cables from the BCM50 units, this hazard can occur.
System shutdown: You must disconnect the telephony and data networking cables from the system before disconnecting the power cord from a grounded outlet.
System startup: You must reconnect the power cords to a grounded outlet before reconnecting the telephony and data networking cables.
BCM50 Installation and Maintenance Guide
112 Chapter 9 Connecting the cables to the BCM50 system
Danger: Electrical shock hazards
Electrical shock hazards from the telecommunications network and AC mains are possible with this equipment. To minimize risk to service personnel and users, you must connect the BCM50 system to an outlet with a third-wire ground. In addition, all unused slots must have blank faceplates installed. The covers on all units must be in place after servicing.
Connecting lines and extensions to the RJ-21 telephony connector
You can connect 4 analog lines, 4 analog extensions, and 12 digital extensions to the RJ-21 telephony connector.
If you use the WFC to connect the lines and extensions to the RJ-21 telephony connector, see
Installing the wiring field card (optional)
on page 92 and the procedure To connect the cables to the wiring field card (optional) on page 119.
Warning:
If you use the same phone line for both an analog trunk and a DSL line, you must install a DSL filter on the analog trunk to avoid interference with the DSL modem.
To connect the lines and extensions
1 Read the warnings in
2 Obtain a 25-pair cable with an RJ-21 connector on one end.
3 Remove the appropriate side breakout from the cable-management door:
• If this is the first unit on a BCM50 system with multiple units, remove the side breakout from the right side of the cable-management door.
• If this is the center unit on a BCM50 system with more than two units, remove the side breakout from both sides of the cable-management door.
4 Plug the RJ-21 connector into the RJ-21 telephony connector on the main unit.
5
Select the appropriate option to secure the RJ-21 connector to the main unit:
• If you use a straight RJ-21 connector, use the two supplied screws on the sides of the connector to secure it.
• If you use a right-angle RJ-21 connector, use the supplied screw on the left side of the connector to secure the left side of the connector. To secure the right side of the connector, use the supplied cable tie to fasten the 25-pair cable to the anchor on the main unit.
6 Connect the four pairs of wires for the analog lines to the telephone company demarcation blocks of the building.
7 Connect the four pairs of wires for the analog telephones to the local connecting blocks.
8
Connect the 12 pairs of wires for the digital telephones to the local connecting blocks.
NN40170-305
Chapter 9 Connecting the cables to the BCM50 system 113
9
Select the appropriate option for your system:
•
Connecting extensions to the expansion units on page
•
Connecting telephone lines to the expansion units
Telephone lines connect to the expansion unit through the connectors on the MBM installed in the expansion unit.
To connect telephone lines to DTM, BRIM, or 4x16 MBMs
1 Read the warnings in
2 Obtain a telephone cable that has a modular plug that matches the MBM to which you are connecting:
• RJ-48C—for DTM
• RJ-45—for BRIM
• RJ-11—for 4x16
3 Plug the modular cable into the jack in the front of the MBM.
4 Connect the other end of the cable to the telephone company demarcation blocks of the building.
5 If you connect telephone lines to a 4x16 or BRIM, repeat steps 2 to 4 for each line.
Warning: If the network ISDN is a U-loop, you must connect the BRIM only to an
NT1 provided by the service provider. The NT1 must provide a Telecommunication
Network Voltage (TNV) to Safety Extra Low Voltage (SELV) barrier.
Note: Do not attempt to plug digital equipment into the auxiliary (AUX) jacks on the front of 4x16 MBM.
6
Select the appropriate option for your system:
• If you connect a 4x16 MBM, go to
Connecting extensions to the expansion units on page
114 for instruction about wiring the extensions for this MBM.
• If your BCM50 system has another expansion unit, repeat this procedure if you add more telephone lines, or proceed to
Connecting extensions to the expansion units on page 114 if
you add extensions.
BCM50 Installation and Maintenance Guide
114 Chapter 9 Connecting the cables to the BCM50 system
•
To connect analog telephone lines to the GATM4/GATM8 or
G4x16/G8x16
1 Read the warnings in
2
Obtain a 25-pair cable with an RJ-21 connector on one end.
3 Plug the RJ-21 connector of the cable into the RJ-21 connector on the front of the MBM.
Use the lower RJ-21 connector on the G4x16/G8x16 MBMs to connect analog lines.
4 Select the appropriate option to secure the RJ-21 connector to the MBM:
• If you use a straight RJ-21 connector, use the two supplied screws on the sides of the connector to secure it.
• If you use a right-angle RJ-21 connector, use the supplied screw on the left side of the connector to secure the left side of the connector. To secure the right side of the connector, use the supplied cable tie to fasten the 25-pair cable to the anchor on the MBM.
5 Connect the other end of the cable to the telephone company demarcation blocks of the building.
6 Select the appropriate option for your system:
• If your BCM50 system has another expansion unit, repeat this procedure if you add more telephone lines, or proceed to
Connecting extensions to the expansion units on page 114 if
you add extensions.
•
For information about wiring the trunk MBMs:
•
•
•
•
4x16 wiring charts on page 231
•
G4x16 and G8x16 wiring charts on page 235
Connecting extensions to the expansion units
Extensions connect to the expansion unit through the connectors on the MBM installed in the expansion unit.
NN40170-305
Chapter 9 Connecting the cables to the BCM50 system 115
To connect extensions to DSM16, DSM32, ASM8, 4x16, G4x16, or
G8x16 MBMs
1
Read the warnings in the
Wiring warnings on page 111 section.
2 Obtain a 25-pair cable with an RJ-21 connector on one end.
3
Plug the RJ-21 connector of the cable into the RJ-21 connector on the front of the MBM.
Use the upper RJ-21 connector on the G4x16/G8x16 MBMs to connect digital extensions.
4 Select the appropriate option to secure the RJ-21 connector to the MBM:
• If you use a straight RJ-21 connector, use the two supplied screws on the sides of the connector to secure it.
• If you use a right-angle RJ-21 connector, use the supplied screw on the left side of the connector to secure the left side of the connector. To secure the right side of the connector, use the supplied cable tie to fasten the 25-pair cable to the anchor on the MBM.
5 Connect the other end of the cable to the local connecting blocks.
6
If you connect extensions to a DSM32, repeat steps 2 to 5 for the second RJ-21 connector.
7 Select the appropriate option for your system:
• If your BCM50 system has another expansion unit, repeat this procedure if you add more
extensions, or proceed to Connecting telephone lines to the expansion units on page 113 if
you add telephone lines.
•
For information about wiring the station MBMs:
•
4x16 wiring charts on page 231
•
G4x16 and G8x16 wiring charts on page 235
•
DSM16 and DSM32 wiring charts on page 239
•
ASM8, ASM8+, and GASM wiring chart on page 243
Connecting the auxiliary equipment
The main unit has connections for an auxiliary ringer, an external paging system, and a music source.
You can connect this auxiliary equipment through the auxiliary terminal block on the wiring field
card (WFC) or the patch panel. See the procedure To connect the cables to the wiring field card
(optional) on page 119 or the procedure To connect the cables to the patch panel (optional) on page
For information about connecting auxiliary equipment:
•
Connecting an auxiliary ringer on page 116
•
Connecting an external paging system on page 116
•
Connecting an external music source on page 117
BCM50 Installation and Maintenance Guide
116 Chapter 9 Connecting the cables to the BCM50 system
Connecting an auxiliary ringer
An auxiliary ringer is a customer-supplied piece of hardware that provides external ringing capability to telephones on the BCM50 system.
To install an auxiliary ringer
1 Use the installation instructions supplied with the ringer hardware to install the auxiliary ringer.
2 Connect the ringer generator to the auxiliary ringer output pair on the RJ-21 telephony connector. To determine which pair of wires to use for the auxiliary ringer, see
RJ-21 telephony connector wiring chart on page 209.
Warning: You must not connect auxiliary ringer to unprotected plant wiring.
The ringer must not draw more than 50 mA from a 40 V DC source.
3 Select the appropriate option for your system:
•
If you add more auxiliary equipment, proceed to Connecting an external paging system on page 116 or
Connecting an external music source on page 117.
• When you finish adding auxiliary equipment, proceed to
Connecting an external paging system
You can connect a customer-supplied external paging system to provide paging over external loudspeakers.
Ensure the paging system follows these guidelines:
• The paging output from the main unit is 100 mV rms across an input impedance of 600 Ω.
• The output level is 0 dBm0 with reference to 600 ohms for a PCM encoded signal at 0 dBm.
There is no DC voltage across the page output terminals.
When you use the page signal output to connect an external paging amplifier, you also use the page relay output that contains a floating relay contact pair. The system uses this output to control the external paging amplifier.
• The contact pair for the page relay output has a switch capacity of 50 mA (non inductive) at
40 V (maximum).
To install an external paging system
1 Use the installation instructions supplied with the external paging hardware to install the external paging system.
2 Connect the paging system audio input to the page output on the RJ-21 telephony connector.
To determine which pair of wires to use for the page output, see
RJ-21 telephony connector wiring chart on page 209.
NN40170-305
Chapter 9 Connecting the cables to the BCM50 system 117
3
Connect the paging system relay to the page relay output on the RJ-21 telephony connector.
To determine which pair of wires to use for the page relay output, see
RJ-21 telephony connector wiring chart on page 209.
Warning:
You must connect the paging connections to unprotected telephony plant wiring.
Tip: Paging tips
External paging does not support talk back paging equipment unless you use an external line port.
The BCM50 system provides paging over the telephone speakers when no external paging equipment is available.
4
Select the appropriate option for your system:
• If you add more auxiliary equipment, proceed to
Connecting an external music source on page 117 or
Connecting an auxiliary ringer on page 116.
• When you finish adding auxiliary equipment, proceed to
Connecting an external music source
Use this procedure to connect an external music source to the BCM50 system. You can use any customer-supplied, approved, low-power device as a music source. A music source includes equipment such as a radio with a high-impedance earphone jack.
For information about connecting an external music source:
•
Music source specifications on page 117
•
To connect the music source using the music source jack on page 118
•
To connect the music source using the RJ-21 telephony connector on page 118
Music source specifications
Ensure that the music source follows these guidelines:
• Nominal input impedance is 3.3 kilohms.
• Nominal sensitivity of this interface returned to digital encoded PCM is –22 dBm0 for a 0.25
V rms input signal.
• The input is limited so that the encoded analog content at the digital interface to the network does not exceed –12 dBm when averaged over any three-second interval.
• The maximum non clipped input level is 1 V rms.
• The interface is protected against ringing cross.
BCM50 Installation and Maintenance Guide
118 Chapter 9 Connecting the cables to the BCM50 system
The music source jack is on the front of the main unit. If you use the music source jack to connect the music source, do not connect a music source to the music source pair on the RJ-21 telephony connector.
To connect the music source using the music source jack
1 Connect the miniature jack of the music source output (3.5 mm mono audio jack) to the music source input on the BCM50 main unit. See the figure
Music source jack on page 118.
Figure 52 Music source jack
Music jack
(3.5 mm mono audio jack)
BCM50
Music source input
Tip
Sleeve
Tip: Music signal
Ring: No connection
Sleeve: Ground
2 Adjust the volume of the music source to an appropriate level by placing a call and putting it on hold, and then adjust the volume at the music source.
Tip:
You can adjust the background music volume at every telephone.
3 Select the appropriate option for your system:
•
If you add more auxiliary equipment, see Connecting an external paging system on page
116 or Connecting an auxiliary ringer on page 116.
• When you finish adding auxiliary equipment, proceed to
To connect the music source using the RJ-21 telephony connector
Note: If you use the RJ-21 telephony connector to connect the music source, do not connect a music source to the music source jack on the front of the main unit.
1
Connect the music source output to the music source input on the RJ-21 telephony connector.
To determine which pair of wires to use for the music source input, see
RJ-21 telephony connector wiring chart on page 209.
2 Adjust the volume of the music source to an appropriate level by placing a call and putting it on hold, and then adjust the volume at the music source.
NN40170-305
Chapter 9 Connecting the cables to the BCM50 system 119
Tip: You can adjust the background music volume at every telephone.
3 Select the appropriate option for your system:
•
• When you finish adding auxiliary equipment, proceed to
To connect the cables to the wiring field card (optional)
1
Plug the RJ-21 end of the cable assembly into the RJ-21 telephony connector.
The cable is now permanently connected to the RJ-21 telephony connector.
2 Remove the terminal block from the WFC: a Slide a small flat screwdriver into the rectangular opening at the back of the terminal block.
b Pry the terminal block so the top rotates forward and the block comes free.
Make the connections to the terminal block while it is removed from the header.
3 Use a small slotted screwdriver to unscrew the wire hole screws on top of the terminal block.
4 Insert the bare wire ends (6 mm or 0.25 in.) in the appropriate holes on the sides of the terminal block.
5 Tighten the screws to hold the wires in place.
6 Reinstall the terminal block on the header of the WFC.
7
Connect the remaining wires (digital telephones, analog telephones, and analog trunks) to the
WFC.
The eight-pin modular jacks on the WFC accept RJ-45 or RJ-11 modular plugs.
8 Connect cables to the main unit as required.
To connect the cables to the patch panel (optional)
1
Plug the RJ-21 end of the cable assembly into the RJ-21 telephony connector.
2 Plug the other end of the cable assembly into the patch panel header.
The cable locks in place.
3 Remove the terminal block from the patch panel: a Slide a small flat screwdriver into the rectangular opening at the back of the terminal block.
b
Pry the terminal block so the top rotates forward and the block comes free.
Make the connections to the terminal block while it is removed from the header.
BCM50 Installation and Maintenance Guide
120 Chapter 9 Connecting the cables to the BCM50 system
4
Use a small slotted screwdriver to unscrew the wire hole screws on top of the terminal block.
5 Insert the bare wire ends (6 mm or 0.25 in.) in the appropriate holes on the sides of the terminal block.
6 Tighten the screws to hold the wires in place.
7 Reinstall the terminal block on the patch panel.
8 Connect the wires (digital telephones, analog telephones, and analog trunks) to the patch panel.
9 Connect cables to the main unit as required.
Next step
After you connect the cables to the BCM50 system, you can configure the initial parameters. For information about configuring these parameters, see
Installing telephones and peripherals on page
NN40170-305
121
Chapter 10
Installing telephones and peripherals
This section describes how to install telephones and peripherals.
You can add telephones and peripherals before or after you initialize your system. Which station media bay module (MBM) you use determines your telephone configuration.
When you initialize the BCM50, it creates default settings for telephone DN records. The settings are based on which telephony profile you chose. To change these settings, use the Element
Manager application. Specific instructions for configuring telephone operation through Element
Manager are in the Nortel Business Communications Manager 5.0 Configuration—Devices.
Note: For detailed information about installing various telephones and peripherals, see the documentation for your particular telephone or peripheral.
Note:
Programming occurs on the telephone when the BCM50 system recognizes the telephone on the system.
For information about installing telephones and peripherals:
•
•
Installing an emergency telephone on page 122
•
Installing IP phones on page 122
System telephones
The BCM50 system supports a number of analog, digital, IP telephony, and cordless telephones.
For more information on supported telephones, see the Nortel Business Communications Manager
5.0 Configuration—Telephony.
Analog telephones are supported either through the analog station ports on the main unit, analog station MBMs (ASM), or by connecting to a digital module through an analog terminal adapter 2
(ATA2).
Each piece of equipment has documentation describing installation and telephone features.
Analog terminal adapter 2
The analog terminal adapter 2 (ATA2) connects a standard analog voice device or data communication device to a digital station connector on the BCM50 system.
BCM50 Installation and Maintenance Guide
122 Chapter 10 Installing telephones and peripherals
For the requirements and procedure to install the device, see
Installing the analog terminal adapter on page 123.
Installing an emergency telephone
You can use the emergency telephone to make calls when no power is available to the BCM50 system.
Emergency telephone will work if it is connected to CSC 1.0 hardware, however it will not work with later hardware versions.
Emergency telephone will work only if it is connected to expansion unit with a caller ID trunk module (CTM) or a global analog trunk module (GATM) on the CSC 1.0 (Indicated by telegraph pole label) and providing first line and first analog set.
To install an emergency telephone on the BCM50 system, connect a single-line analog telephone to the auxiliary port on the CTM/GATM. When you make a call from the emergency telephone, the auxiliary port uses the telephone line connected to the line 1 port of the CTM or GATM.
You can connect an emergency telephone to every CTM installed on your BCM50 system.
To install the emergency telephone
1
Connect a single-line analog telephone to the auxiliary port on the CTM or GATM.
2 Connect an analog PSTN line cable to the line 1 port of the CTM or GATM.
3 On the main unit (if CSC 1.0):
— Connect a single-line analog telephone to the first analog station port on the main unit
(pins 30 + 5 / i.e. White-Slate & Slate-White)
— Connect an analog PSTN line cable to the first line port on the main unit (pins 26 + 1 / i.e. white-blue & blue-white).
Installing IP phones
You can set the system to automatically assign DNs to the IP Phones. The autoassign feature assigns DNs in the configured IP DN range.
If you choose to manually assign DNs, choose DNs in the assigned DN range. Ensure that the DN type in each DN record is set to IP telephony.
For details about configuring DN records for the IP telephones, see the Nortel Business
Communications Manager 5.0 Configuration—Telephony.
NN40170-305
123
Chapter 11
Installing the analog terminal adapter
This section provides installation instructions for the analog terminal adapter 2 (ATA2) or ATA.
The ATA2 connects a standard analog voice device or data communication device to the BCM50 system through a digital station module. Examples of analog voice devices are analog telephones and answering machines. Examples of analog data communication devices are modems and fax machines.
The ATA2 is designated as either an ONS (on-premise station) or an OPS (off-premise station) port.
For information about installing an ATA2:
•
Configuration overview on page 123
•
Installing the ATA2 on page 124
•
Configuring the ATA2 on page 127
For ATA2 specifications, see the table
ATA2, ASM8, ASM8+, GASM, and GASI analog device specifications on page 51.
Configuration overview
This section describes environment configurations for connecting analog and data devices to the main unit using an ATA2:
•
•
Analog data device on page 124
Analog telephone
The figure
Analog telephone installation overview on page 123 shows an installation overview for
connecting an analog device through an ATA2 to the main unit.
Figure 53 Analog telephone installation overview
ATA2 power cord
BCM50 Analog telephone
ATA2
Line loop resistance:
135 ohms maximum
Terminal loop resistance:
1300 ohms maximum
BCM50 Installation and Maintenance Guide
124 Chapter 11 Installing the analog terminal adapter
Analog data device
The ATA2 connects a standard analog data device, such as a fax or modem, to the BCM50 system.
The figure Data communication device installation overview on page 124 shows an installation
overview for connecting a data communication device through an ATA2 to the BCM50 system.
Figure 54 Data communication device installation overview
ATA2 power cord
BCM50
Data communication device
ATA2
Line loop resistance:
135 ohms maximum
Terminal loop resistance:
200 ohms maximum
Installing the ATA2
This section provides information about installing the ATA2:
•
Connecting the ATA2 on page 124
•
•
Test insertion loss measurement on page 126
Connecting the ATA2
After you set up the correct environment, connect the BCM50 system and the analog device to the
ATA2, and then connect the power. See the figure ATA2 top view on page 124.
Figure 55 ATA2 top view
24 V
~
0.006 A
Terminal jack Power supply connector receptacle
The figure ATA2 pin outs on page 125 shows the pinouts for the connection cables.
NN40170-305
Figure 56 ATA2 pin outs
Line jack
TCM*
TCM*
Chapter 11 Installing the analog terminal adapter 125
Terminal jack
Ring (B-Lead)
Tip (A-Lead)
* The TCM input is not polarity sensitive.
To connect the ATA2
1 Connect one end of a line cord to the ATA2 terminal jack.
2
Connect the other end to your telephone, modem, or fax.
3 Connect one end of a line cord to the ATA2 line jack.
4 Connect the other end to an available station port on the BCM50 system.
5 For a 120 V or 230 V system, plug the DIN connector of the power supply cord into the power supply connector receptacle. Plug the adapter into a standard AC outlet.
Caution: In North America, the ATA2 must be powered from a Class 2 power source that is UL- and CSA-approved.
In Europe, the ATA2 must be powered from a Class II power source that is CE marked.
Mounting the ATA2
After the ATA2 is correctly connected, you can mount the unit on a wall as described in this section.
To mount the ATA2 on a wall
1 When using 0.5 mm wire (24-AWG), select a location within 800 m (2600 ft.) of the BCM50.
2 Allow 12.5 cm (5 in.) clearance for the line jack, terminal jack, and power supply connector.
3
Screw two 4-mm (#8) screws into the wall 130 mm (5.25 in.) apart. Leave 6 mm (0.25 in.) of the two screws showing.
4
Align the slots at the back of the ATA2 unit over the screws. Push the unit against the wall.
The line jack, terminal jack, and power supply connector must be at the top of the ATA2. See the figure
BCM50 Installation and Maintenance Guide
126 Chapter 11 Installing the analog terminal adapter
Figure 57 ATA2 back view
Mounting keyhole slots
Test insertion loss measurement
The maximum loss for ATA2 to Central Office (CO) configuration must not exceed 10 dB. See the
figure Insertion loss from the CO to the analog telephone on page 126.
Figure 58 Insertion loss from the CO to the analog telephone
BCM50
ATA2
Analog telephone
Central
Office
Cable loss
BCM50 to ATA2
ATA2 to BCM50
Longitudinal balance to ground
Overload level
10 dB Max
50 dB
60 to 4000 Hz
With IEEE 455–1976 test
3 dB
Measure the total insertion loss between the CO and analog device by using standard dial-up test lines with a transmission test set (for example, Hewlett-Packard 4935A Transmission Test Set).
NN40170-305
Chapter 11 Installing the analog terminal adapter 127
To measure the insertion loss from the CO to the analog device
1 Establish a connection to the 1 mW, 1 kHz, CO service line with an analog telephone attached to the ATA2.
2 Ensure that the analog port terminates correctly in 600 ohms:
• Replace the analog telephone with the test set.
• Use RECEIVE/600 OHM/HOLD mode on the test set.
3 Ensure that the test set connects in parallel to the service line before removing the analog telephone or the line drops.
4 Remove the single-line telephone.
5
Measure the 1 kHz tone at the far end of the analog port, where the analog loop ends and where the analog device connects.
Note: The tone must be greater than –10 dB (for example: –9 dB is acceptable).
To measure the insertion loss from the analog device to the CO
1
Establish a connection to a silent termination on the CO service line with an analog telephone attached to the ATA2.
2 Make sure the analog port terminates correctly in 600 ohms by:
• Replace the analog telephone with the test set.
• Use TRANSMIT/600 OHM/HOLD mode on the test set.
3 Make sure the test set connects in parallel to the service line before removing the analog telephone or the line drops.
4
Remove the analog telephone.
5 Introduce a 1 kHz tone into the analog line at –10 dBm, and measure the level at the CO exchange.
Note: The difference in levels is the transmit loss and must be less than 10 dB
(for example, 9 dB is acceptable).
Configuring the ATA2
Configure the ATA2 using Element Manager or Telset Administration. For detailed configuration information, see the Nortel Business Communications Manager 5.0 Configuration—Devices.
BCM50 Installation and Maintenance Guide
128 Chapter 11 Installing the analog terminal adapter
NN40170-305
Chapter 12 Configuring the BCM50 system 129
Chapter 12
Configuring the BCM50 system
This section provides information about configuring the basic BCM50 parameters. You can configure advanced parameters using Element Manager or Telset Administration after the BCM50 system is operational.
The figure
Overview of configuring the basic BCM50 parameters on page 129 shows an overview
of configuring the basic BCM50 parameters.
Figure 59 Overview of configuring the basic BCM50 parameters
For simplicity, you can configure the basic BCM50 parameters in two stages:
•
Initial parameters overview on page 130
•
Startup parameters overview on page 131
BCM50 Installation and Maintenance Guide
130 Chapter 12 Configuring the BCM50 system
Initial parameters overview
The initial parameters are the required parameters that you can configure using Telset
Administration, Element Manager, or the Startup Profile. See the table Initial parameters on page
130 for a list of the initial parameters.
Table 20 Initial parameters
Parameters Telset Administration Element Manager Startup Profile
Keycode
IP address:
• Obtain dynamically
• IP address
• IP subnet mask
• Default gateway
Modem:
• Enable/disable modem
System:
• Region
Feature 9*8 > Feature codes Configuration > System >
Keycodes
Feature 9*8 > IP Address
Feature 9*8 > Modem
Configuration > System >
IP Subsystem
Configuration > Resources
> Dial Up interfaces
Telephony startup:
• Template
• Start DN
Voice mail:
• Attendant DN
• UI style
• Language
• From Line
• To Line
• Number of rings
Feature **PROFILE
Feature **STARTUP
Feature 983
Administration > Utilities >
Reset > Cold Reset
Telephony Services
Administration > Utilities >
Reset > Cold Reset
Telephony Services
Configuration >
Applications > Voice
Messaging/Contact Center
User account:
• Telset user ID (numeric)
• Telset password
(numeric)
Feature 9*8 > User Accounts Configuration >
Administrator Access >
Accounts and Privileges >
View by Accounts tab
Keycode
IP Address
Modem
System
Telephony Startup
Voice Mail Startup
User Account
NN40170-305
Chapter 12 Configuring the BCM50 system 131
Startup parameters overview
The startup parameters are the remaining required parameters that you cannot configure using
Telset Administration. You must configure these parameters using Element Manager or the
Startup Profile. See the table Startup parameters on page 131 for a list of the startup parameters.
Table 21 Startup parameters (Sheet 1 of 2)
Parameters
System:
• System name
System:
• System ID
Telset Administration
N/A
N/A
Element Manager
Configuration > System >
Identification
Configuration > System >
Keycodes
(View ID is set automatically and cannot be changed)
Configuration > System >
Date and Time
Startup Profile
System
System
Time Time:
• Date and Time source
• NTP server address
• Date and time
• Time zone
DHCP server:
• Use DHCP Server on
Integrated Router
• Enable/disable server
• IP domain name
• Primary DNS
• Secondary DNS
• Default gateway
IP Phones:
• Enable registration
• Enable global pwd
• Global pwd
• Auto-assign DNs
• Advertisement/Logo
SNMP Agent:
• Enable/disable SNMP agent
• Minimum security
• SNMP version support
SNMP community:
• Community string
• Type of access
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
SNMP manager:
• Manager IP address
N/A
Configuration > Data
Services > DHCP Server >
General Settings tab
DHCP Server
Configuration > Resources
> Telephony Resources >
IP & Application Sets
IP Telephones
Configuration >
Administrator Access >
SNMP > General tab
Configuration >
Administrator Access >
SNMP > Community
Strings tab
Configuration >
Administrator Access >
SNMP > General tab
SNMP Agent
SNMP Community
SNMP Manager
BCM50 Installation and Maintenance Guide
132 Chapter 12 Configuring the BCM50 system
Table 21 Startup parameters (Sheet 2 of 2)
Parameters Telset Administration
User account:
• User ID
• Group
• Description
• Callback number
N/A
SRG Main Office:
• VoIP Trunk Access
Code
• Test Local Mode
Timeout
• Primary Network
Connect Server
Address
• Alternate Network
Connect Server
Address
• Network Connect
Server Port
• Heartbeat Protocol Port
• H.323 ID
• Numbering Plan ID
• Type of Number
• Node ID
• MO Access Code
Length
N/A
Element Manager
Configuration >
Administrator Access >
View by Accounts tab
Startup Profile
User Account
Configuration > Resources
> Survivable Remote
Gateway > S1000 Main
Office Settings tab
SRG Main Office
NN40170-305
Chapter 13 Using Telset Administration to set the basic parameters 133
Chapter 13
Using Telset Administration to set the basic parameters
You can use Telset Administration through a digital telephone with a two-line display to set the
BCM50 configuration parameters.
You cannot set all the basic parameters using Telset Administration. Therefore, after configuring the initial parameters, you must use Element Manager to set the startup parameters. See
Configuring the startup parameters on page 143.
For more information about Telset Administration, see the Telset Administration Guide.
The figure Overview of using Telset Administration on page 133 shows an overview of using
Telset Administration to set the basic parameters.
Figure 60 Overview of using Telset Administration
BCM50 Installation and Maintenance Guide
134 Chapter 13 Using Telset Administration to set the basic parameters
Configuring the initial parameters
Use the following procedures to configure the initial parameters for the BCM50 using Telset
Administration:
•
To enter the keycodes on page 134
•
To configure the IP address on page 135
•
To configure the modem on page 135
•
To select the region on page 136
•
To select the telephony startup template and start DN on page 136
•
To initialize voice mail on page 136
•
To create Telset user accounts on page 136
To enter the keycodes
1 Select Feature 9*8 from a two-line display telephone.
2 Enter the following user ID and password:
User ID: SETNNA
Password: CONFIG
The numerical values of the user ID and password are 738662 and 266344, respectively.
3 Press NEXT to scroll through the menu and select Feature Codes.
4 Press OK.
The system ID (SID) displays.
5
Press NEXT.
6 Enter your sequence ID.
7 Press NEXT to scroll through the list and perform one or both of the following tasks: a To activate features, select Feature List.
• Press SHOW to view the available features.
• Use the soft keys to activate features for your system.
b To enter a new keycode, select Entitlement Code.
• Press SHOW to view the current keycode.
• Use the soft keys to modify the keycode for your system.
For more detailed information about retrieving and entering the keycode for your system, see the Keycode Installation Guide.
NN40170-305
Chapter 13 Using Telset Administration to set the basic parameters 135
To configure the IP address
1 Select Feature 9*8 from a two-line display telephone.
2
Enter the following user ID and password:
User ID: SETNNA
Password: CONFIG
The numerical values of the user ID and password are 738662 and 266344, respectively.
3
Press NEXT to scroll through the menu and select IP Address.
4 Press OK.
5
Press CHNGE to modify the IP settings. The display screen shows whether DHCP is enabled or disabled.
6 Perform one of the following tasks: a If DHCP is currently enabled:
• Press DIS to disable DHCP. You can modify the IP Address, Subnet Mask, and Default
Gateway. However, these settings have no effect if the system is disabled.
• Press IP to modify the following IP settings:
— IP Address
— Subnet Mask
— Default Gateway b
If DHCP is currently disabled:
• Press ENL to enable DHCP. The system must reboot to enable DHCP.
• Press IP to modify the IP settings. You can modify the IP Address, Subnet Mask, and
Default Gateway. However, these settings have no effect if the system is disabled.
7 Press Back to reboot the system.
To configure the modem
1 Select Feature 9*8 from a two-line display telephone.
2 Enter the following user ID and password:
User ID: SETNNA
Password: CONFIG
The numerical values of the user ID and password are 738662 and 266344, respectively.
3 Press NEXT to scroll through the menu and select Modem.
4 Press OK. The display screen shows whether the modem is enabled or disabled.
5 Perform one of the following tasks: a If the modem is disabled, press ENL to enable the modem.
b If the modem is enabled, press DIS to disable the modem.
For more information about modem configuration, see the Networking Configuration Guide.
BCM50 Installation and Maintenance Guide
136 Chapter 13 Using Telset Administration to set the basic parameters
To select the region
Set the Region using Feature **PROFILE from a two-line display telephone.
For information about using Telset Administration to set this parameter, see the Telset
Administration Guide.
To select the telephony startup template and start DN
Set the Template and Start DN using Feature **STARTUP from a two-line display telephone.
Note:
This is available for only 15 minutes after the system starts.
For information about using Telset Administration to set this parameter, see the Telset
Administration Guide.
Configure other telephony startup parameters using Feature **CONFIG. For more information, see the Telset Administration Guide.
To initialize voice mail
Initialize your voice-mail system using Feature 983 from a two-line display telephone.
For information about using Telset Administration to initialize your voice mail system, see the
CallPilot Telephone Administration Guide.
To create Telset user accounts
Note: You can create Telset accounts using only Telset Administration. To create Element Manager accounts, you must use Element Manager.
1
Select Feature 9*8 from a two-line display telephone.
2 Enter the following user ID and password:
User ID: SETNNA
Password: CONFIG
The numerical values of the user ID and password are 738662 and 266344, respectively.
3 Press NEXT to scroll through the menu and select User Accounts.
4
Press OK. The Accounts screen appears.
5 Press CHNGE to create an account.
6 Press NEXT to scroll through the list of available accounts to create.
7 Press CRT to create the account.
If you see the DEL command instead of the CRT command, then the account already exists.
NN40170-305
Chapter 13 Using Telset Administration to set the basic parameters 137
8
Press BACK. The Accounts screen appears.
9 Press NEXT. The password screen appears.
10
Press CHNGE to change the password.
11 Press NEXT to scroll through the list of available accounts.
12 Press CHNGE to change the password for the selected account.
13 Enter the new password for the account.
14
Enter the new password again to confirm it.
Next step
After you configure the initial parameters using Telset Administration, you must configure the
BCM50 Installation and Maintenance Guide
138 Chapter 13 Using Telset Administration to set the basic parameters
NN40170-305
Chapter 14 Using Element Manager to set the basic parameters 139
Chapter 14
Using Element Manager to set the basic parameters
The Element Manager application provides a computer-based client interface that can connect to devices over an IP network and display the programming interface for that device.
You can use the latest Element Manager version to manage all previous BCM systems that require
Element Manager. You need only one instance of Element Manager on your computer.
Through Element Manager, you can configure all of the basic parameters:
•
Configuring the initial parameters on page 141
•
Configuring the startup parameters on page 143
For more information about using Element Manager, see the Nortel Business Communications
Manager 5.0 Administration and Security.
The figure
Overview of using Element Manager on page 139 shows an overview of using Element
Manager to set the basic parameters.
Figure 61 Overview of using Element Manager
BCM50 Installation and Maintenance Guide
140 Chapter 14 Using Element Manager to set the basic parameters
Prerequisites
Business Element Manager has the following system requirements:
• Operating System: Windows XP, Windows Server 2003, Windows Server 2008, or Windows
Vista. Business Element Manager also supports Citrix Presentation Server 4.0.
• RAM: minimum 256 MB, recommended 512 MB
• free space: 75 MB
Accessing the BCM50 system
After you connect your computer to the BCM50 system, either through the OAM port or through a
LAN connection, you can download BCM Element Manager from the Administrator Applications area of the BCM Web page.
You can use the latest Element Manager version to manage all previous BCM systems that require
Element Manager. You need only one instance of Element Manager on your computer.
To access the BCM50 Web page
1 Open a Web browser and enter the BCM50 system IP address (default is 10.10.10.1).
The Enter Network Password dialog box appears.
2
Enter the user name and password (defaults are shown below):
User name: nnadmin
Password: PlsChgMe!
3 Click OK.
The Welcome to BCM Web page appears.
To download and install Element Manager
1 From the Welcome to BCM Web page, click BCM under Application Selection.
2
From the Application Launcher panel, double-click BCM Element Manager.
The BCM Element Manager pane appears.
3 Click Download Element Manager on the right side of the screen.
4 When BCM50 Element Manager finishes downloading, double-click the application and follow the installation instructions.
To connect to the BCM50 system using Element Manager
1 Open Element Manager.
2
From the Network menu, select New Network Element, and then select Business
Communications Manager.
NN40170-305
Chapter 14 Using Element Manager to set the basic parameters 141
3
Enter the BCM50 system IP address in the dialog box (default is 10.10.10.1).
4 Click OK.
5
From the Network Elements folder, select the BCM50 system IP address.
6 Enter the following user name and password:
User name: nnadmin
Password: PlsChgMe!
7
Click Connect.
You are now connected to the BCM50 system.
Configuring the initial parameters
Use the following procedures to configure the initial parameters for the BCM50 system using
BCM50 Element Manager:
•
To enter a keycode on page 141
•
To configure the LAN IP address on page 141
•
To configure the modem on page 142
•
To configure the startup template for telephony services on page 142
•
To initialize voice mail on page 143
To enter a keycode
1 From the Configuration tab, click the System folder to expand it.
2 Select Keycodes.
The Keycodes panel appears.
3 Click Load File.
The Open dialog box appears.
4 Select the keycode file for your system, and then click Open.
For details about generating and entering the keycodes for your system, see the Keycode
Installation Guide.
To configure the LAN IP address
1 From the Configuration tab, click the System folder to expand it.
2 Select IP Subsystem.
3
Select the General Settings tab. It is normally selected by default.
BCM50 Installation and Maintenance Guide
142 Chapter 14 Using Element Manager to set the basic parameters
4
Configure the IP Settings attributes. See the table Modify IP Settings attributes on page 142.
Table 22 Modify IP Settings attributes
Attribute Description
Published IP address
Published IP Interface
The IP address of the BCM50 system.
The IP interface being used by the BCM50 system.
Default gateway The gateway used by the BCM50 system.
Note: If you modify any of the attributes, then the Element Manager session disconnects.
To configure the modem
1 From the Configuration tab, click the Resources folder to expand it.
2
Select Dial Up Interfaces.
3 Select the Modem Dial-In Parameters tab.
4
Select the Enable modem dial-in check box to enable the modem.
For more information about modem configuration, see the Networking Configuration Guide.
To configure the startup template for telephony services
Note: This procedure erases all the telephony programming that is currently on the BCM50 system.
1 From the Administration tab, click the Utilities folder to expand it.
2 Select Reset.
3 Click Cold Reset Telephony Services.
The Cold Reset Telephony dialog box appears.
4
Table 23 Cold Reset Telephony attributes
Attribute
Region
Template
Start DN
Description
Specify the startup region.
Specify the startup template.
Specify the startup DN. The default is 221.
5 Click OK.
NN40170-305
Chapter 14 Using Element Manager to set the basic parameters 143
To initialize voice mail
1 From the Configuration tab, click Applications folder to expand it.
2
Select Voice Messaging/Contact Center.
3 Click Launch CallPilot Manager.
The Quick Install Wizard form appears.
If your voice mail system is already initialized, you do not see the Quick Install Wizard.
Instead you see the CallPilot Manager: Main Menu Web page.
4 Configure the attributes on the Quick Install Wizard form.
For more information, see the CallPilot Manager Set Up and Operation Guide.
Configuring the startup parameters
Use the following procedures to configure the startup parameters for the BCM50 system using
Element Manager:
•
To enter a name for your system on page 143
•
To configure the date and time settings on page 143
•
To configure DHCP server settings on page 144
•
To configure IP Phones on page 145
•
To configure SNMP settings on page 146
•
To configure SNMP community strings on page 147
•
To configure the SNMP manager list on page 147
•
To create user accounts on page 148
To enter a name for your system
1 From the Configuration tab, click the System folder to expand it.
2 From the System folder, select Identification.
3 Enter a name for your system in the System name field.
To configure the date and time settings
1
From the Configuration tab, click the System folder to expand it.
2 Select Date and Time.
The Date and Time panel appears.
BCM50 Installation and Maintenance Guide
144 Chapter 14 Using Element Manager to set the basic parameters
3
Configure the Date and Time attributes. See the table Date and Time attributes on page 144.
Table 24 Date and Time attributes
Attribute
Date and Time source
NTP server address
Synch every (s)
NTP security mode
Raise alarm if clock differs by at least (s)
NTP key ID
NTP key string
Date and time
Time zone
Description
Set to NTP if the system uses a network server to determine the correct time and date.
Set to Trunk to receive time and date settings from PSTN (if available).
Set to Manual to manually configure the time and date for your system.
If Date and Time source is set to NTP, then enter an address for the server.
The number of seconds specified to elapse between contacts with the
NTP server.
1-XXXX: Number of seconds between contacts with the NTP server.
Select whether the NTP security mode is secured or unsecured.
The number of discrepancy seconds specified that must occur before the system notifies you of a time difference from the NTP server, if the system automatically checks with the NTP server.
ID for accessing the NTP.
Control key corresponding to ID for accessing the NTP.
Use the calendar to select the correct date and time.
Select the time zone for this system.
To configure DHCP server settings
Warning: If you have a main unit with an integrated router, you must first disable the DHCP server on the integrated router to use the DHCP server on the main unit.
1 From the Configuration tab, click the Data Services folder to expand it.
2 Select DHCP Server.
3
Select the General Settings tab.
4 If you have a main unit with an integrated router (BCM50a, BCM50e, BCM50ba, BCM50be), do one of the following:
• Select the Use DHCP Server on Integrated Router check box to use the DHCP server on the integrated router. The DHCP server on the main unit will be disabled.
Click Launch Router WebGUI tool to launch the router configuration tool.
For information about using the router WebGUI tool, see the Integrated Router
Configuration Guide for your product.
• Clear the Use DHCP Server on Integrated Router check box to use the DHCP server on the main unit. You must first disable the DHCP server on the integrated router using the router WebGUI tool.
NN40170-305
Chapter 14 Using Element Manager to set the basic parameters 145
For information about using the router WebGUI tool, see the Integrated Router
Configuration Guide for your product.
5
Table 25 DHCP Server: General Settings attributes
Attribute Description
Use DHCP Server on
Integrated Router
Lease time
Note: This attribute is available only on main units with an integrated router
(BCM50a, BCM50e, BCM50ba, BCM50be).
Specify whether or not to use the DHCP server on the integrated router.
If selected, the DHCP server on the integrated router is used, and the DHCP server on the main unit is disabled.
If cleared, the DHCP server on the main unit is active. You must first disable the DHCP server on the integrated router to avoid networking conflicts.
Select either enable or disable from the list.
The domain name of the network.
DHCP server is
IP domain name
Primary DNS IP address
Secondary DNS IP address Specify the IP addresses of the secondary DNS server in a valid dot format.
BCM50 automatically assigns the value for this parameter. If the IP address or subnet mask for the corresponding LAN interface changes, this value is overwritten. Use caution when changing this value.
WINS server address
Specify the IP addresses of the primary DNS server in a valid dot format.
BCM50 automatically assigns the value for this parameter. If the IP address or subnet mask for the corresponding LAN interface changes, this value is overwritten. Use caution when changing this value.
Specify the IP address of the WINS server.
BCM50 automatically assigns the value for this parameter. If the IP address or subnet mask for the corresponding LAN interface changes, this value is overwritten. Use caution when changing this value.
WINS node type Specify a client WINS node type.
The BCM50 system automatically sets this value to H-node on all DHCP clients. This setting configures the DHCP client PCs to use P-node name resolution before resorting to B-node name resolution.
Note: Use caution if you change this attribute.
Specify the time, in seconds, for an address assignment until the client lease expires.
The default is 259 200 seconds (72 hours).
To configure IP Phones
Author’s Note: This procedure has not been verified as the functionality is not yet present in the interface. It will be updated when the functionality becomes available.
1 From the Configuration tab, click the Resources folder to expand it.
2
Select Telephony Resources.
3 From the Configured Devices column, select IP Sets.
The Details for Module area appears in the lower pane with the IP Terminal Global Settings tab as the default.
BCM50 Installation and Maintenance Guide
146 Chapter 14 Using Element Manager to set the basic parameters
4
Configure the IP Terminal Global Settings attributes. See the table
Settings attributes on page 146.
Table 26 IP Terminal Global Settings attributes
Attribute
Enable registration
Enable global registration password
Global password
Auto-assign DNs
Advertisement/Logo
Description
Select this check box to allow new IP clients to register with the system.
WARNING: Remember to clear this check box when you finish registering the new telephones.
To require the installer to enter a password when IP telephones are configured and registered to the system, select this box.
If this box is not selected (disabled), a valid Telset user ID and password is required to register IP phones.
If you select the Enable Global Registration Password check box, enter the password the installer enters on the IP telephone to connect to the system.
If this check box is empty, no password prompt occurs during registration.
If you select this check box, the system assigns an available DN as an IP terminal requests registration. It does not prompt the installer to enter a set
DN.
If this check box is empty, the installer receives a prompt to enter the assigned
DN during the programming session.
Any information in this field appears on the display of all IP telephones. For example, your company name or slogan (24 characters in length).
Tip:
To automatically configure IP Phones with DNs assigned:
1) Select the Enable registration check box.
2) Select the Enable global registration password check box.
3) Leave the Global password field blank.
4) Select the Auto-assign DNs check box.
After the IP Phones are operational, clear the Enable registration check box.
You can configure other attributes on the IP Terminal Global Settings tab depending on the requirements for your system.
To configure SNMP settings
1
From the Configuration tab, click the Administrator Access folder to expand it.
2 From the Administrator Access folder, select SNMP.
3 Select the General tab. It is normally selected by default.
4 From the SNMP Settings area, click Modify.
The Modify SNMP Settings dialog box appears.
NN40170-305
Chapter 14 Using Element Manager to set the basic parameters 147
5
Table 27 Modify SNMP Settings attributes
Attribute Description
Enable SNMP Agent Choose whether to enable or disable the SNMP agent by selecting (or not selecting) the check box.
Minimum required security Select the minimum required security for SNMP from the list.
SNMP Version Support Select the SMNP version support from the list.
6 Click OK.
To configure SNMP community strings
1
From the Configuration tab, click the Administrator Access folder to expand it.
2 From the Administrator Access folder, select SNMP.
3 Select the Community Strings tab.
4 Click Add.
The Add Community String dialog box appears.
5 Configure the Add Community String attributes. See the table
Add Community String attributes on page 147.
Table 28 Add Community String attributes
Attribute
Community string
Type of access
Description
Enter the name used as a key to uniquely identify an individual community entry on the SNMP agent.
Specify the read and write access for this community. Available options are
Read-Only and Read/Write.
6 Click OK.
7 Repeat steps 4 to 6 to add more community strings.
To configure the SNMP manager list
Use the SNMP manager list to specify IP addresses that can connect to the SNMP agent.
1 From the Configuration tab, click the Administrator Access folder to expand it.
2 From the Administrator Access folder, select SNMP.
3 Select the General tab. It is normally selected by default.
4 In the SNMP Manager List area, click Add.
BCM50 Installation and Maintenance Guide
148 Chapter 14 Using Element Manager to set the basic parameters
The Add Manager dialog box appears.
5 Enter the IP address in the Manager IP Address field.
6
Click OK.
7 Repeat steps 4 to 6 to add another manager IP address.
To create user accounts
1 From the Configuration tab, click the Administrator Access folder to expand it.
2 From the Administrator Access folder, select Accounts and Privileges.
3
Select the View by Accounts tab.
4 Click Add to add a user account.
The Add Account dialog box appears.
5 Configure the Add Account attributes. See the table
Add Account attributes on page 148.
Table 29 Add Account attributes
Attribute Description
Description
User ID
Enter a description for this account.
Enter a descriptive name for the user or the user function.
Password
Telset user ID (numeric)
Enter a password for this account.
If the user performs administration through the Telset interface, enter a number for the user ID.
Telset password (numeric) Enter a password for the Telset User ID.
Modem Callback Number If Callback is required, enter the number to which the system calls back to verify the dial-up user access.
Modem Callback Passcode This is the code the system uses to confirm the callback is legitimate.
ISDN Callback Number If ISDN Callback is required, enter the number to which the system calls back to verify the dial-up user access.
ISDN Callback Passcode This is the code the system uses to confirm that the ISDN callback is legitimate.
Change Password On Login Select this check box to force the user to change the password upon first login.
Change Password On Login
Telset
Select this check box to force the user to change the Telset password upon first login.
6 Click OK.
7
Repeat steps 4 to 6 to create more user accounts.
NN40170-305
Chapter 14 Using Element Manager to set the basic parameters 149
To configure SRG
1 From the Configuration tab, click the Resources folder to expand it.
2
Select Survivable Remote Gateway from the Resources folder.
3 Select the S1000 Main Office Settings tab.
4 Configure the S1000 Main Office Settings attributes. For more information about configuring an SRG system, see the SRG50 Configuration Guide.
Next step
BCM50 Installation and Maintenance Guide
150 Chapter 14 Using Element Manager to set the basic parameters
NN40170-305
Chapter 15 Using the Startup Profile to configure parameters 151
Chapter 15
Using the Startup Profile to configure parameters
An experienced administrator uses the Startup Profile tool to customize a template with common
BCM50 parameters. The administrator uses this template to configure a single system or multiple systems.
You create the Startup Profile using the Startup Profile template (a Microsoft Excel template). You then use a USB storage device to transfer the Startup Profile data to the BCM50 main unit.
Loading the Startup Profile adds approximately 5 minutes to the time for the BCM50 system to boot. After you successfully apply the Startup Profile, the BCM50 system automatically reboots to complete the BCM50 system configuration. After the BCM50 system reboots, the Startup Profile is fully loaded.
The figure Overview of using the Startup Profile on page 151 shows an overview of using the
Startup Profile.
Figure 62 Overview of using the Startup Profile
BCM50 Installation and Maintenance Guide
152 Chapter 15 Using the Startup Profile to configure parameters
Note: You must format the USB storage device for the FAT32 file system. If necessary, reformat the USB storage device by plugging it into the USB port of your computer, right-clicking the USB device icon, and selecting FAT32 reformatting. This destroys any data on the USB.
Note:
The Startup Profile works only on a BCM50 system with no keycodes loaded.
After the keycodes are loaded, the Startup Profile does not work. This condition prevents unintentional overwriting of the parameters of a configured system.
For information about setting the initial parameters on the BCM50 system:
•
Startup Profile requirements on page 152
•
Configuring basic parameters on page 153
Startup Profile requirements
To use the Startup Profile template, you need the following:
• a computer with a USB port
• Microsoft Excel 2000 or newer
• the Nortel BCM50 Startup Profile template (Microsoft Excel template)
If you do not have the Startup Profile template on your computer, you can get a copy from the the Nortel support Web site (www.nortel.com/support) or the Administrator Applications page on the main unit. For details about getting the Startup Profile template from the main unit, see
the procedure To download the Startup Profile template on page 153.
• a portable USB storage device compatible with USB 1.1 (formatted for FAT32)
Note: The Startup Profile template uses macros to perform certain functions. You must set your Excel macro security level to medium or low to enable the macros:
1 From the Tools menu, select Macros.
2 Select Security.
3 Select Medium or Low.
4
Exit from Excel.
5 Open the Startup Profile template (in Excel).
6 Enable macros if you are prompted.
NN40170-305
Chapter 15 Using the Startup Profile to configure parameters 153
To download the Startup Profile template
1 Access the BCM50 Web page (see the procedure
To access the BCM50 Web page on page
2 From the Welcome to BCM Web page, click Administrator Applications.
The Administrator Applications page appears.
3 From the Administrator Applications page, click Startup Profile Template.
The Startup Profile Template panel appears.
4 Read the information on this panel.
5
Click Download Startup Profile Template on the right side of the screen, and follow the instructions to download the template.
Configuring basic parameters
To customize a Startup Profile for your system
Note: You cannot copy and paste data between cells in the Startup Profile. If you attempt this, the data validation within the spreadsheet becomes corrupt. If corruption occurs, download another copy of the Startup Profile template from the
BCM50 main unit.
1 On a computer with a USB port and Microsoft Excel, open the Startup Profile template
(Microsoft Excel template).
If you do not have a copy of the Startup Profile template, see the procedure
Startup Profile template on page 153.
2 For instructions about using the Startup Profile template, see the Usage Instructions tab.
3 Click the StartupProfileTemplate tab to begin entering information in the Startup Profile template.
4 Enter your BCM50 system ID in the System ID field in the Startup Profile template.
The system ID is on the box of the main unit and on the main unit itself. If you enter the wrong system ID, the Startup Profile does not work with your system.
5 Click the large button at the top of the Startup Profile template to save a version of the Startup
Profile (.sps file) and a version of the Startup Profile editor (Excel spreadsheet) on your computer.
The file names for the Startup Profile editor and the Startup Profile consist of the system ID followed by the appropriate extension.
BCM50 Installation and Maintenance Guide
154 Chapter 15 Using the Startup Profile to configure parameters
Note: Never edit the Startup Profile (.sps file) directly; always use the Startup
Profile editor to make changes.
6 Enter the remaining information into the Startup Profile editor that you want loaded onto the
BCM50 main unit.
The Startup Profile editor contains explanations of the various parameters. Click the cell where you want to enter information, and the Help text appears.
You can specify which parameters to load onto your system by selecting Apply. If you do not want to load certain parameters, select Ignore.
7 After you enter all the information, click the large button at the top of the Startup Profile template to save a version of the Startup Profile (.sps file) and a version of the Startup Profile editor (Excel spreadsheet) on your computer.
8
Exit from Microsoft Excel.
9 Insert the USB storage device into the USB port of the computer.
10 Copy the Startup Profile (.sps file) to the root directory of the USB storage device.
11 To load your keycodes using the Startup Profile, copy the keycode file to the root directory of the USB storage device.
The name of the keycode file on the USB storage device must exactly match the file name you entered in the Startup Profile editor.
12 Remove the USB storage device from the USB port of the computer.
The Startup Profile is now stored on the USB storage device.
To load the Startup Profile data onto the BCM50 system
1 Disconnect the power supply from the main unit.
2
Insert the USB storage device into the USB port on the main unit.
If the BCM50 system has a UPS, insert the USB storage device into the Linux-compatible
USB hub.
3 Connect the power supply to the BCM50 system.
The BCM50 automatically detects the Startup Profile file and loads the information during the bootup sequence. Loading the Startup Profile adds approximately 5 minutes to the time for the
BCM50 system to boot. After you successfully apply the Startup Profile, the BCM50 system automatically reboots to complete the BCM50 system configuration. After the BCM50 system reboots, the Startup Profile is fully loaded.
NN40170-305
Chapter 15 Using the Startup Profile to configure parameters 155
If an error occurs, the status LED flashes red. View the log file (written to the USB storage device) for a description of the Startup Profile errors. If no errors exist, the BCM50 system automatically reboots to complete the system configuration. After the reboot finishes, the power and status LEDs are solid green.
Note: The Startup Profile works only on a BCM50 system with no keycode loaded. After a keycode is loaded, the Startup Profile does not work. This condition prevents unintentional overwriting of the parameters of a configured system.
4 Remove the USB storage device from the USB port on the BCM50 or the USB hub.
Note: Make sure the bootup sequence is complete before removing the USB storage device from the BCM50 system.
5 Connect the 25-pair cable to the RJ-21 telephony connector on the BCM50 main unit.
The Startup Profile is now loaded on your BCM50 system.
Next step
After you load the Startup Profile, you can connect the data networking cables. For information about connecting these cables, see
Completing the initial installation (optional) on page 157.
BCM50 Installation and Maintenance Guide
156 Chapter 15 Using the Startup Profile to configure parameters
NN40170-305
Chapter 16 Completing the initial installation (optional) 157
Chapter 16
Completing the initial installation (optional)
This section provides information about completing the initial installation of your BCM50 system.
These options are described for informative purposes only.
The figure Overview of completing the initial installation on page 157 shows an overview of
completing the initial installation.
Figure 63 Overview of completing the initial installation
BCM50 Installation and Maintenance Guide
158 Chapter 16 Completing the initial installation (optional)
After the basic configuration finishes, you can further customize your system by using the following configuration options:
•
Configuring the media bay module on page 158
•
Configuring modem settings on page 159
•
Checking for software updates on page 159
•
Configuring voice mail on page 159
•
Customizing security policies on page 160
•
Performing a backup on page 160
Configuring the media bay module
For information about installing a media bay module (MBM) and setting the dip switches, see
Installing a media bay module in an expansion unit on page 102.
For details about connecting the cables between the main unit and expansion units, you can also
see Connecting the expansion unit on page 106.
To configure the MBM(s)
1 Open Element Manager and connect to your BCM50 system.
2 From the Configuration tab, click the Resources folder to expand it.
3
Figure 64 Telephony Resources page
4 In the Modules section, select the expansion unit to configure.
NN40170-305
Chapter 16 Completing the initial installation (optional) 159
You must include the expansion port feature in your purchased keycode. If you activate one expansion port only, the expansion port on the left (expansion/LAN port 2) is active.
Therefore, Expansion 1 must be connected to the active port (expansion/LAN port 2). For
location of the LAN ports, see the figure Expansion ports on page 106 and the figure
Connecting the expansion unit to the BCM50 main unit on page 107.
5 Double-click the Module type field to display the list.
6
Select the type of MBM that you installed in the expansion unit.
7 Click Enable.
8
If you installed a second expansion unit, repeat steps 4 to 7 to enable the second MBM.
You can set other parameters for the MBMs depending on the type of MBM you installed.
Configuring modem settings
.
Your system modem is either enabled or disabled depending on the configuration you chose during your basic configuration. If you use the modem for management tasks, you can customize settings, including dial-in and dial-out settings depending on your specific needs.
For information about configuring the modem, see the Nortel Business Communications Manager
5.0 Configuration—System
Checking for software updates
Nortel frequently updates the BCM50 software. Therefore, a standard part of any installation is to ensure your system has the latest version of the software.
For information about checking for and installing software updates, see the Nortel Business
Communications Manager 5.0 Administration and Security.
Configuring voice mail
Your voice mail system was initialized during the basic configuration of your BCM50 system.
You must still configure your voice mail to take advantage of the many feature available.
If you need to perform further configuration tasks, see the documentation for your voice mail system.
For information about using the Web-based interface to configure your voice mail system, see the
CallPilot Manager Set Up and Operation Guide, and for information about using Telset
Administration to configure your voice mail system, see the CallPilot Telephone Administration
Guide.
BCM50 Installation and Maintenance Guide
160 Chapter 16 Completing the initial installation (optional)
Customizing security policies
You configured a system password and security settings during the basic configuration of your
BCM50 system. Depending on your needs, you can perform further configuration of the security policies.
For information about customizing the security policies, see the Nortel Business Communications
Manager 5.0 Administration and Security.
Performing a backup
You can backup your BCM50 system at regular intervals, including after initial installation.
Performing a backup ensures that you have a copy of your system data available to restore the system, if needed.
For information about backing up and restoring your system, see the Nortel Business
Communications Manager 5.0 Administration and Security.
NN40170-305
Chapter 17 Connecting the BCM50 system to the LAN and WAN 161
Chapter 17
Connecting the BCM50 system to the LAN and WAN
This section describes how to connect the LAN and WAN cables to the BCM50 system.
The figure Overview of connecting data networking cables to the BCM50 system on page 161
shows the steps required to connect the data networking cables to the BCM50 system.
Figure 65 Overview of connecting data networking cables to the BCM50 system
For information about connecting the cables to the BCM50 system:
•
Connecting the BCM50 system to the LAN on page 162
•
Connecting the BCM50 system to the WAN on page 163
BCM50 Installation and Maintenance Guide
162 Chapter 17 Connecting the BCM50 system to the LAN and WAN
Connecting the BCM50 system to the LAN
On BCM50 and BCM50b main units, three RJ-45 connectors support LAN connections and one
OAM port. On the BCM50a, BCM50e, BCM50ba, and BCM50be main units, six RJ-45
Figure 66 Ports on a BCM50e main unit
Router card
LAN ports
OAM port
(port 0)
LAN por
(port 1)t
Expansion/
LAN ports
(ports 2, 3)
Note: On units with an integrated ADSL modem, the
WAN port is an RJ-11 port with additional LEDs.
The table
LAN ports on the main unit on page 162 describes the function of each port.
Table 30 LAN ports on the main unit (Sheet 1 of 2)
Port name Function
OAM port
LAN port
Expansion/LAN ports
The OAM port connects an on-site management computer to the main unit. Using this connection, you can access management tools, such as Element Manager, without affecting the main LAN.
This port is not connected to the network switch built into the main unit and cannot be connected to other network devices.
The LAN port connects the main unit to the LAN.
This port connects to the network switch built into the main unit.
The expansion ports have two purposes: connecting the expansion units and providing
LAN access to other network devices.
If an expansion unit is connected to the port, the expansion port provides signaling channels, media channels, and LAN datagrams to the expansion unit. The expansion unit connects the signaling and media channels to the media bay module (MBM) and connects the LAN datagrams to the LAN port on the expansion unit. You can then use the
LAN port on the expansion unit to connect network devices, such as IP telephones.
If an expansion unit is not connected to the port, you can use the expansion port to connect network devices, such as IP telephones.
The expansion ports connect to the network switch built into the main unit. Any devices connected to these ports are on the same subnet as the device connected to the LAN port.
NN40170-305
Chapter 17 Connecting the BCM50 system to the LAN and WAN 163
Table 30 LAN ports on the main unit (Sheet 2 of 2)
Port name
Router card
LAN ports
Expansion unit
LAN port
Function
The router card LAN ports connect network devices, such as IP telephones to the LAN.
These ports connect to the network switch built into the main unit. Any devices connected to these ports are on the same subnet as the device connected to the LAN port.
The expansion unit LAN port connects network devices, such as IP telephones to the
LAN.
These ports are connected to the network switch built into the main unit. Any devices connected to these ports are on the same subnet as the device connected to the LAN port.
To connect the BCM50 system to the LAN
1 Connect one end of a standard Ethernet cable to your LAN.
2
Plug the other end of the Ethernet cable into the LAN port on the main unit.
3 To use the internal BCM50 network switch to connect another IP device to the LAN, connect an Ethernet cable between the IP device and one of the additional LAN ports on the BCM50 system (Router card LAN ports, Expansion port, or expansion unit LAN port).
4 Repeat step 3 for each IP device you want to connect to the LAN using the BCM50 switch.
5
If you install a BCM50a or BCM50e, proceed to Connecting the BCM50 system to the WAN on page 163.
If you install a BCM50, proceed to Next step on page 165.
Connecting the BCM50 system to the WAN
Four types of main units contain a router card, the BCM50a, BCM50e, BCM50ba, and BCM50be.
On the BCM50e and BCM50be, the WAN port is an RJ-45 port. On the BCM50a and BCM50ba, the WAN port is an RJ-11 port. The figure
WAN port on a BCM50 main unit on page 164 shows
the location of the WAN port on both types of router cards.
BCM50 Installation and Maintenance Guide
164 Chapter 17 Connecting the BCM50 system to the LAN and WAN
Figure 67 WAN port on a BCM50 main unit
BCM50a main unit
WAN port
BCM50e main unit
WAN port
For information about connecting the BCM50 to the WAN:
•
To connect the BCM50e or BCM50be main units to the WAN on page 164
•
To connect the BCM50a or BCM50ba main units to the WAN on page 164
To connect the BCM50e or BCM50be main units to the WAN
1
Use the Integrated Router Web GUI to configure the router card on the BCM50e and
BCM50be main units. For information about how to configure the router, see the BCM50e
Integrated Router Configuration Guide.
2 Connect one end of a standard Ethernet cable to your WAN edge device (for example, an external ADSL modem or cable modem).
For proper setup and configuration of the device, see the documentation for your WAN edge device.
3 Plug the other end of the Ethernet cable into the WAN port.
4
Proceed to Next step on page 165.
To connect the BCM50a or BCM50ba main units to the WAN
1 Use the Integrated Router Web GUI to configure the router card on the BCM50a and
BCM50ba main units. For information about how to configure the router, see the BCM50a
Integrated Router Configuration Guide.
2
Make sure the power supply is connected to the main unit and to the AC power source (wall outlet).
NN40170-305
Chapter 17 Connecting the BCM50 system to the LAN and WAN 165
Warning: Do not plug the WAN cable into the system unless the power supply is connected to the main unit and an AC power source with a third-wire ground.
3 Connect one end of a standard telephone cable to the ADSL telephone line provided by your
ISP.
4 Plug the other end of the telephone cable into the WAN port.
Note: If you use the ADSL telephone line for both ADSL and regular voice communication, you must install a splitter filter. Your ADSL service provider supplies the splitter filter. Follow your service provider's instructions about connecting the splitter.
Next step
After you connect the cables to the BCM50 system, you can test the system. For information about testing the BCM50 system, see
Testing basic BCM50 functionality on page 167.
BCM50 Installation and Maintenance Guide
166 Chapter 17 Connecting the BCM50 system to the LAN and WAN
NN40170-305
Chapter 18 Testing basic BCM50 functionality 167
Chapter 18
Testing basic BCM50 functionality
This section describes how to test the BCM50 system.
For information about testing and troubleshooting the BCM50 system:
•
To test the main unit on page 167
•
To troubleshoot the main unit on page 168
•
To test the expansion unit on page 168
•
To troubleshoot the expansion unit on page 168
•
•
To test a station MBM on page 169
•
To test a trunk MBM on page 169
•
To determine why an MBM does not appear in Element Manager on page 170
•
To determine why the ATA2 does not function on page 170
•
To determine why there is no dial tone at the ATA2 on page 170
•
To check the ATA2 wiring on page 171
•
Reset to factory settings on page 171
•
To perform a Level 1 and Level 2 reset on page 172
To test the main unit
If you have the digital station feature included in your installed keycode, use the following test to ensure the main unit is operating properly:
1
Go to an extension that is connected to the RJ-21 telephony connector on the main unit.
2 Check for a dial tone.
3 Use this extension to make a call to another extension on the system.
4 If this system has an expansion unit with a media bay module (MBM) that supports extensions, repeat steps 3 and 4 for an extension connected to the expansion unit.
5 Go to an extension that has access to one of the lines on the main unit.
6
Select the line or line pool to which the line belongs.
7 Check for a dial tone.
8 Make a call using the line or line pool.
9 If this system has an expansion unit with an MBM that supports lines, repeat steps 6 to 8 with an extension that can access one of the lines connected to the expansion unit.
BCM50 Installation and Maintenance Guide
168 Chapter 18 Testing basic BCM50 functionality
To troubleshoot the main unit
If a test fails, use the following procedure:
1
Verify that any nonfunctional feature is included in your installed keycode.
2 Check the wiring to the main unit and to the MBMs. Make sure that the cables are properly seated and are connected to the correct ports.
3 Reboot the BCM50 system.
4
Check LEDs (see Viewing the BCM50 system LEDs on page 61).
5 Use Element Manager or the Telset Administration feature to check the programming for the lines or extensions that failed the call test.
6 If the programming is incorrect, use the Backup and Restore Utility to load a recent backup of system programming. If a recent backup is not available, correct the programming using
Element Manager or the Telephone Administration feature.
To test the expansion unit
Use the following test to ensure the expansion unit is operating properly:
1 Make sure that the BCM50 system is fully booted. For indications that the system is fully operational, see
Viewing the BCM50 system LEDs on page 61.
2 Check the power and status LEDs on the MBM that is inserted in the expansion unit. Both
LEDs must be solid green. If either LED is not solid green, a problem exists with the MBM or
3 If the expansion unit has an MBM that supports extensions, go to an extension that is connected to the MBM.
4 Check for a dial tone.
5 Use this extension to make a call to another extension on the system.
6 If the expansion unit has an MBM that supports lines, go to an extension that has access to one of the lines on the MBM.
7 Select the line or line pool to which the line belongs.
8 Check for a dial tone.
9 Make a call using the line or line pool.
To troubleshoot the expansion unit
1 Check that the correct feature for the expansion unit is included in your installed keycode.
2 Check that the expansion port is connected to the proper connector. For location of the LAN ports, see the figure
on page 106 and the figure Connecting the expansion unit to the BCM50 main unit on page 107.
NN40170-305
Chapter 18 Testing basic BCM50 functionality 169
3
Check the wiring to the MBM. Make sure that the cables are properly seated and are connected to the correct ports with proper LED indications.
4
Check that the switches on the MBM are all set to on. For more information about these
switches, see Verifying the media bay module switch settings on page 98.
If the MBM is a GASM or GATM, all the switches on the right are not on. For information
about setting these switches, see Verifying the media bay module switch settings on page 98.
To check the MBM switches, you must remove the MBM from the expansion unit. For
instructions, see Replacing a media bay module on page 185.
5
Perform a firmware download to ensure that the correct version is loaded on the ASM/GASM or GATM unit.
6 Use Element Manager or Telset Admin to check the programming for the lines or extensions connected to the MBM.
7
Reboot the system to ensure that the BCM50 main unit functions correctly.
8 If the programming is incorrect, use the Backup and Restore Utility to load a recent backup of system programming. If a recent backup is not available, correct the programming using
Element Manager or the Telephone Administration feature.
To test the MBM
1 Check the Power and Status LEDs on the MBM. Both LEDs must be solid green. If either
LED is not solid green, a problem exists with the MBM. For a detailed description of the LED
states, see Media bay module LEDs (expansion units only) on page 67.
2 Perform a call test to make sure the new MBM functions correctly. If you replaced a station
MBM, use
169 and To test a trunk MBM on page 169.
To test a station MBM
1 Go to an extension on the MBM.
2
Check for a dial tone.
3 Use this extension to make a call to another extension on the system.
4 Use this extension to make a call to an external telephone number.
To test a trunk MBM
1 Go to an extension that has access to one of the lines on the MBM.
2 Select the line or line pool to which the line belongs.
3 Check for a dial tone.
4
Make a call using the line or line pool.
BCM50 Installation and Maintenance Guide
170 Chapter 18 Testing basic BCM50 functionality
To determine why an MBM does not appear in Element Manager
1 Check that the correct feature for the expansion unit is included in your installed keycode.
2
Check that both the Power and Status LEDs on the MBM are solid green.
• If the Power LED is off, check that the power supply cable is properly seated in the expansion unit and the power supply is connected to a working power outlet.
Also check that the MBM is properly seated in the expansion unit.
• If the Status LED is not solid green, check that the Expansion cable is properly seated in the Expansion port on the expansion unit and on the main unit.
3 Check that the MBM and expansion unit are enabled using either Element Manager or Telset
Administration. If the units are enabled, disable them, and then re-enable them.
4 Check that all the switches on the MBM are on. For more information about these switches,
see Verifying the media bay module switch settings on page 98.
If the MBM is a GASM or GATM, all the switches on the right are not set to on. For information about setting these switches, see
Verifying the media bay module switch settings on page 98.
To check the MBM switches, you must remove the MBM from the expansion unit. For
instructions, see Replacing a media bay module on page 185.
To determine why the ATA2 does not function
1 Check for a dial tone using an analog device.
2 Check that AC power is connected to the ATA2 unit.
3 Check that the correct feature for digital sets is included in your installed keycode.
4 Verify that the ATA2 is connected to a digital station port.
5
Allow sufficient startup time (30–60 sec).
6 Plug an analog device into the phone port of the ATA2 and check for a dial-tone.
To determine why there is no dial tone at the ATA2
1 If you hear no dial tone, replace a single-line telephone for the data communication device.
2 If you hear no dial tone at the ATA2 unit: a Disconnect the line side of the ATA2. Connect a digital telephone to the ATA2 port.
b Check that the connection from the ATA2 to the BCM50 hardware works correctly.
NN40170-305
Chapter 18 Testing basic BCM50 functionality 171
To check the ATA2 wiring
1 Use an analog phone to test the ATA2.
2
Check the following connections: a ATA2 to the terminal
The resistance must be 200 ohms or less for data applications and 1300 ohms or less for voice applications.
b
BCM50 hardware to the ATA2
The wiring must be equivalent to 800 m of 0.5 mm wire (2600 ft. of 24-AWG) or less. Do not use bridge taps and loading coils between the BCM50 hardware and ATA2.
Reset to factory settings
This section describes how to reset the BCM50 system to the factory settings or a stable working
condition using the reset switch (see the figure Reset switch location on page 171). When the
BCM50 is in this condition, you can make further modifications.
Figure 68 Reset switch location
Reset switch
Some possible situations in which you use the reset feature are:
• If the BCM50 system is configured incorrectly to an extent that it is no longer functional. The customer must use a level 1 reset to return to the default system programming and restore a previous configuration or reconfigure the system.
• If distributors want to reuse BCM50 systems, they must first erase all customer-specific data using a level 1 or level 2 reset.
Reset levels
Reset to factory settings is a stand-alone feature that has the following levels of reset:
• Level 1 reset erases all customer-specific data and restores the default configuration for all components. This reset leaves the software components untouched. That is, the system has the latest release and patch level of the software installed. Only the system and user configuration data is erased and replaced with default values. No Ethernet connectivity to the system occurs during this operation.
BCM50 Installation and Maintenance Guide
172 Chapter 18 Testing basic BCM50 functionality
• Level 2 reset erases all customer and system configuration data and all software releases and patches. This reset re-installs the original factory configuration settings. Level 2 reset also resets the router firmware to what was shipped from the factory. No Ethernet connectivity to the system occurs during this operation.
Warning: If you perform a Level 2 reset to solve an undetermined problem and still have access to Element Manager, you must retrieve all the log files for technical support before performing the Level 2 reset. A Level 2 reset erases all log files from the system.
Activate the reset feature
You activate the reset feature by pressing the reset switch with a long, thin, nonmetallic needle in
the sequence described in the procedure To perform a Level 1 and Level 2 reset on page 172.
Warning: Before performing a Level 1 or Level 2 reset, review all the effects of
the levels of reset. See Reset levels on page 171.
As you press the reset switch, the LEDs blink in a predefined fashion to guide and confirm user input. The various states of the power and status LEDs indicate the following:
• A blinking power LED indicates a user input window; the BCM50 system is waiting for user input.
• A solid red power LED indicates extreme action is requested; caution is urged.
• A solid status LED (any color) indicates level of reset action:
— Level 1 is yellow
— Level 2 is red
• A blinking status LED indicates an interim state; trying to establish user request.
• A solid status LED indicates confirmation of a user selection (power LED has priority).
To perform a Level 1 and Level 2 reset
The router configuration of a BCM50a or BCM50e is not affected by a Level 1 reset. To perform a soft reset on the router, use Element Manager.
See the figure Level 1 and Level 2 reset sequence on page 173, or follow the sequence in the table
Level 1 reset on page 174 and the table Level 2 reset on page 174 to perform a Level 1 and Level 2
reset.
NN40170-305
Chapter 18 Testing basic BCM50 functionality 173
Figure 69 Level 1 and Level 2 reset sequence
Reset query state
(( )) Level 1 reset pending
Press re set
(( ))
Level 2 reset pending
Level 1 reset confirm
Do n
rese t ot p ress
tim er
5 se cond
Press re set
(( ))
(( ))
Press
rese t
Perform level 1 reset
Level 2 reset confirm
Do
n ot pre
5 s econ ss re set d tim er
(( ))
(( ))
(( ))
Press rese t
Perform level 2 reset
Note 1 : In the reset confirm steps, the lower LED flashes faster than the upper LED.
Note 2 : All times in this figure are approximate.
System is ready
System reboots
(Reset request cancelled)
System is ready
BCM50 Installation and Maintenance Guide
174 Chapter 18 Testing basic BCM50 functionality
Table 31 Level 1 reset
Step User action
1
2
3
4
Boot the system
Power LED
Solid yellow
Solid yellow
Press reset switch Solid red
Wait five seconds Flashing red
Press reset switch
Solid red
Solid green
Status LED
Solid yellow
Off
Flashing yellow Solid yellow
Flashing yellow
Flashing yellow
Solid yellow
Solid green
System state Alternative user action
Power self-test
Power self-test
Ready for reset input
No action; system remains off
Request Level 1 reset
Do not press reset switch; system boots normally
Awaiting Level 1 reset confirmation
Press reset switch; system proceeds to
Level 2 reset
System performs
Level 1 reset
All configuration programming erased.
System rebooted and is ready for user action.
Do not press reset switch; system boots normally
Table 32 Level 2 reset
Step User action
1
Power LED Status LED
Solid yellow
Boot up the system Solid yellow
Solid yellow
Off
Flashing yellow Solid yellow
2
3
4
5
Press reset switch Solid red
Press reset switch again within five seconds of the first button press.
Solid red
Wait five seconds Flashing red
Press reset switch
Solid red
Solid green
Flashing yellow
Flashing red
Flashing red
Solid red
Solid green
System state Alternative user action
Power self-test
Power self-test
Ready for reset input
No action; system remains off
Request Level 1 reset
Do not press reset switch; system boots normally
Request Level 2 reset
Do not press reset switch; system remains in Level 1 reset state
Awaiting Level 2 reset confirmation
Press reset switch; system proceeds to
Nortel factory mode (do not use)
System performs
Level 2 reset; all configuration programming and software updates erased.
System rebooted and is ready for user action.
Do not press reset switch; system boots normally
NN40170-305
Chapter 19 Replacing the BCM50 system components 175
Chapter 19
Replacing the BCM50 system components
This section provides an overview of how to replace the BCM50 system components. The figure
Overview of replacing the BCM50 system components on page 175 shows the steps required to
replace the BCM50 system components.
This section also describes common procedures required to prepare the system for maintenance.
Figure 70 Overview of replacing the BCM50 system components
For information about replacing the BCM50 components:
•
Replacing a power supply on page 177
•
Replacing a main unit on page 181
•
Replacing a media bay module on page 185
•
Replacing an expansion unit on page 189
•
Replacing an internal component on page 195
BCM50 Installation and Maintenance Guide
176 Chapter 19 Replacing the BCM50 system components
Preparing the system for maintenance
Use the following procedure to prepare the system for maintenance. This procedure is referenced throughout the maintenance portion of this document:
To shut down the system
1 Check for a recent backup of the BCM50 system programming.
2 If no recent backup is available, then use Element Manager to back up the system data. For information about backing up the system data, see the Administration Guide.
3
In Element Manager, from the Administration tab, click the Utilities folder to expand it.
4 From the Utilities folder, select Reset.
5
Click Reboot to reboot the system.
The BCM50 system begins the shutdown process.
6 Unplug the main unit when the status and power LEDs change from solid green to flashing orange.
Restarting the system after maintenance
When you finish your maintenance procedure, restart the BCM system in the order described in this section.
To return the system to operation
1 Check the Power and Status LEDs on the main unit. After the BCM50 starts, both LEDs must be solid green. If either LED is not solid green, a problem with the main unit exists. For a
detailed description of the LED states, see System status LEDs on page 61.
2 If this system has an expansion unit, check the Power and Status LEDs on the media bay module (MBM) in the expansion unit. Both LEDs must be solid green. If either LED is not solid green, a problem exists with the MBM or the expansion unit. For a detailed description
of the LED states, see Media bay module LEDs (expansion units only) on page 67.
3 If this system has a second expansion unit, check the Power and Status LEDs on the second
MBM.
4 Use Element Manager to restore the programming. For information about restoring system programming, see the Administration Guide.
5
Warning: When you restart the system, all digital telephony, IP client voice mail, and VoIP ports are not available until the system services restart.
NN40170-305
Chapter 20 Replacing a power supply 177
Chapter 20
Replacing a power supply
This chapter describes the procedure for replacing a power supply.
The figure Overview of replacing the BCM50 power supply on page 177 shows an overview of
replacing a power supply.
Figure 71 Overview of replacing the BCM50 power supply
For information about replacing a power supply:
•
Preparing the system for maintenance on page 178
•
Removing the power supply on page 178
•
Connect the new power supply on page 178
BCM50 Installation and Maintenance Guide
178 Chapter 20 Replacing a power supply
Preparing the system for maintenance
In most cases, if the power supply for the main unit is faulty, the system is already shut down. If
this is the case, proceed to Removing the power supply on page 178. If you replace the expansion
Removing the power supply
Before you disconnect the power supply, read the warnings about connecting network lines in
To remove the power supply
1
Remove the telephony and data networking lines from the BCM50 units. These lines include:
• the RJ-21 telephony connector on the main unit
• the ADSL line in the WAN port on a BCM50a main unit
• any analog telephone lines in the media bay modules (MBM) in the expansion units
• any digital telephone lines in the MBMs in the expansion units
2 Rotate the power supply retention clip to free the power supply cord.
3 Remove the power supply cord from the BCM50 unit.
Warning: Leakage currents
You must disconnect the telephony and data networking cables from the system before disconnecting the power cord from a grounded outlet.
4 Remove the power supply cord from the AC wall outlet.
If your system has a UPS, remove the power supply cord from the UPS socket.
5 Remove the power supply from the table, rack-mount shelf, or wall-mount bracket.
6
Proceed to Connect the new power supply on page 178.
Connect the new power supply
Before you connect the power supply, read the warnings about connecting network lines in
NN40170-305
Chapter 20 Replacing a power supply 179
To connect the new power supply
1
Connect the new power supply. See Connecting the power supply on page 108.
2
3
Continue with the procedure To return the system to operation on page 176.
BCM50 Installation and Maintenance Guide
180 Chapter 20 Replacing a power supply
NN40170-305
Chapter 21 Replacing a main unit 181
Chapter 21
Replacing a main unit
Three types of main units are available: the BCM50, the BCM50a, and the BCM50e. This chapter describes the procedure for replacing a main unit.
The figure
Overview of replacing a main unit on page 181 shows an overview of replacing a main
unit.
Figure 72 Overview of replacing a main unit
BCM50 Installation and Maintenance Guide
182 Chapter 21 Replacing a main unit
For information about replacing the BCM50 main unit:
•
Preparing the system for maintenance on page 182
•
Removing the main unit on page 182
•
Installing the new main unit on page 183
Preparing the system for maintenance
In most cases, if the BCM50 main unit is faulty, the system is already shut down. If this is the case, continue with the procedure
To disconnect the cables on page 182. If the system is still operating,
perform the procedure To shut down the system on page 176.
To disconnect the cables
1
Remove the 25-pair cable from the RJ-21 telephony connector on the front of the main unit.
2 Remove the Ethernet cable from the LAN port.
3 If the main unit is a BCM50a or a BCM50e, remove the Ethernet cable or ADSL line from the
WAN port and the Ethernet cables from the Router card LAN ports.
4 Remove the expansion cables or LAN cables from the expansion ports on the main unit. For the expansion cables, make sure you mark the cables with the number of the port to which they connect.
5 If the system uses the external Music Source port, remove the cable from the Music Source port.
6 If the system uses a UPS, remove the USB cable from the USB port.
7 Rotate the power supply retention clip to free the power supply cord.
8 Remove the power supply cord from the main unit.
Warning: Leakage currents
You must disconnect the telephony and data networking cables from the system before disconnecting the power cord from a grounded outlet.
9
Proceed to Removing the main unit on page 182.
Removing the main unit
The method you use to remove the main unit depends on how the unit is mounted. Use one of the following procedures to remove the main unit:
•
To remove a rack-mounted main unit on page 183
•
To remove a wall-mounted main unit on page 183
•
To remove a desktop mounted main unit on page 183
NN40170-305
Chapter 21 Replacing a main unit 183
To remove a rack-mounted main unit
1 Ensure you remove all the cables from the main unit.
If necessary, see the procedure
To disconnect the cables on page 182.
2 If a unit is mounted to the top of the main unit, slide that unit forward until it disengages from the clips on the main unit. Lift the unit off of the top of the main unit.
3 If the main unit is secured to the rack-mount shelf with screws, remove these screws from the bottom of the rack-mount shelf.
4 Slide the main unit forward until it disengages from the clips on the rack-mount shelf.
5
Lift the main unit off of the rack-mount shelf and set it on a flat, clean, static-free surface.
6
Proceed to Installing the new main unit on page 183.
To remove a wall-mounted main unit
1 Ensure you remove all the cables from the main unit.
If necessary, see the procedure
To disconnect the cables on page 182.
2
Lift the main unit until it disengages from the clips on the wall-mount bracket.
3 Pull the main unit out and away from the wall-mount bracket.
4 Set the main unit on a flat, clean, static-free surface.
5
Proceed to Installing the BCM50 unit on the wall on page 88.
To remove a desktop mounted main unit
1 Ensure you remove all the cables from the main unit.
If necessary, see the procedure
To disconnect the cables on page 182.
2
If a unit is mounted to the top of the main unit, slide that unit forward until it disengages from the clips on the main unit. Lift the unit off of the top of the main unit.
3 Lift the main unit off of the table and set it on a flat, clean, static-free surface.
4
Continue with the procedure To install the BCM50 unit on a desktop or shelf on page 93.
Installing the new main unit
Use one of the following procedures to install the new BCM50 main unit:
•
Installing the BCM50 unit on the rack-mount shelf on page 85
•
To install the BCM50 unit on the wall-mount bracket on page 90
•
To install the BCM50 unit on a desktop or shelf on page 93
After you install the new BCM50 main unit, proceed to the procedure
To connect the cables on page 184.
BCM50 Installation and Maintenance Guide
184 Chapter 21 Replacing a main unit
To connect the cables
1 Insert the power supply retention clip into the new main unit.
2
Rotate the power supply retention clip so that the power supply jack is clear.
3 Connect the power supply cord to the main unit.
4 Rotate the power supply retention clip to lock the power supply cord in place.
5 Connect to AC power source: a
If the system has a UPS, connect the USB cable to the USB port on the main unit and plug the UPS power cord into the AC power source (wall outlet).
b
If the system has no UPS, plug the power supply cable into the AC power source (wall outlet).
6 If the system uses the external Music Source port, connect the music source cable to the Music
Source port on the main unit.
7
Connect the expansion cables or LAN cables to the expansion ports on the main unit. For expansion cables, make sure you connect the cables to the expansion ports from which you removed them to ensure the same line and extension numbering.
8 If the main unit is a BCM50a or BCM50e, connect the Ethernet cable or ADSL line to the
WAN port and the Ethernet cables to the Router card LAN ports.
Warning: Leakage currents
You must connect the power cord to a grounded outlet before connecting the telephony and data networking cables to the system.
9 Connect the Ethernet cable to the LAN port.
10 Connect the 25-pair cable to the RJ-21 telephony connector on the front of the main unit.
11 Secure the RJ-21 connector to the BCM50 main unit.
If you use a straight RJ-21 connector, use the two screws on the sides of the connector to secure it.
If you use a right-angle RJ-21 connector, use the screw on the left side of the connector to secure the left side of the connector. To secure the right side of the connector, use a cable tie to fasten the 25-pair cable to the anchor on the BCM50 main unit.
12
Continue with the procedure To return the system to operation on page 176.
NN40170-305
Chapter 22 Replacing a media bay module 185
Chapter 22
Replacing a media bay module
This chapter describes the procedure for replacing a media bay module (MBM).
The figure Overview of replacing an MBM on page 185 shows an overview of replacing the
MBM.
Figure 73 Overview of replacing an MBM
See the following procedures to replace an MBM:
•
•
To insert the new MBM on page 187
BCM50 Installation and Maintenance Guide
186 Chapter 22 Replacing a media bay module
To remove the MBM
1 Use Element Manager to disable the MBM. For more information about disabling an MBM, see the Administration Guide.
2 If the expansion unit is wall-mounted, it must be removed from the wall-mount bracket before you remove the MBM. For more information, see the procedure
To remove a wall-mounted expansion unit on page 191, and then proceed to step 7.
3
Disconnect all of the telephone line and extension cables from the MBM.
If more than one cable exists, mark the cables to identify the port from which you removed them.
4 Rotate the power supply retention clip to free the power supply cord.
5 Remove the power supply cord from the expansion unit.
6 Attach one end of the grounding strap to your wrist and the other end to a grounded metal surface.
7 Pull out the ejector lever with your index finger. Then grasp the ejector lever with your thumb
Finish removing the MBM by hand.
on page 186. Finish removing the MBM by hand.
Figure 74 Remove an MBM
Grasp the edge of the MBM ejector lever and pull outward
8
Grasp the top and bottom edges of the MBM. Remove the MBM from the expansion unit.
Place the MBM on a flat, clean, static-free surface.
Warning: Protect the hardware components against damage from electrostatic discharge. Always wear a ground wrist strap before you handle components. Always place the components in a static-free container.
9
Continue with the procedure To insert the new MBM on page 187.
NN40170-305
Chapter 22 Replacing a media bay module 187
To insert the new MBM
1 Unpack the new MBM.
2
3
Install the MBM. See Installing a media bay module in an expansion unit on page 102.
4 If the new MBM is a different type of module (for example, you replaced a DSM16 with a
4x16), use Element Manager to configure the new MBM before continuing. For more
information about configuring the MBM, see the procedure To configure the MBM(s) on page
5
Reconnect the power supply cable. See the procedure To connect a power supply without a
6 Connect the telephone line and extension cables to the port on the front of the new MBM. See
Connecting the lines and extensions on page 110.
If the new MBM is a different type of module (for example, you replaced a DSM16 with a
4x16), you must make any additional connections to the MBM before continuing.
7
Proceed to the procedure To test the MBM on page 169.
8
Continue with the procedure To return the system to operation on page 176.
BCM50 Installation and Maintenance Guide
188 Chapter 22 Replacing a media bay module
NN40170-305
Chapter 23 Replacing an expansion unit 189
Chapter 23
Replacing an expansion unit
This chapter describes the procedure for replacing an expansion unit.
The figure Overview of replacing an expansion unit on page 189 shows an overview of replacing
an expansion unit.
Figure 75 Overview of replacing an expansion unit
BCM50 Installation and Maintenance Guide
190 Chapter 23 Replacing an expansion unit
For information about replacing an expansion unit:
•
Disconnecting the cables on page 190
•
Removing the expansion unit on page 190
•
•
Inserting the MBM in the new expansion unit on page 192
•
Installing the new expansion unit on page 193
Disconnecting the cables
Use the following procedure to disconnect the expansion unit from the other equipment.
To disconnect the expansion unit cables
1
Use Element Manager to disable the media bay module (MBM) that is installed in the expansion unit. For more information, see the Nortel Business Communications Manager 5.0
Administration and Security.
2 Disconnect the expansion cable from the expansion port on the expansion unit.
3 Disconnect the LAN cable from the LAN port on the expansion unit.
4 Disconnect all of the telephone lines and extension cables from the MBM inserted in the expansion unit.
If more than one cable exists, mark the cables to identify the port from which you removed them.
5 Rotate the power supply retention clip to free the power supply cord.
6 Remove the power supply cord from the expansion unit.
Warning: Leakage currents
You must disconnect the telephony and data networking cables from the system before disconnecting the power cord from a grounded outlet.
7
Proceed to Removing the expansion unit on page 190.
Removing the expansion unit
How you remove the expansion unit depends on how the unit is mounted. Use one of the following procedures to remove the expansion unit:
•
To remove a rack-mounted expansion unit on page 191
•
To remove a wall-mounted expansion unit on page 191
•
To remove a desktop-mounted expansion unit on page 191
NN40170-305
Chapter 23 Replacing an expansion unit 191
To remove a rack-mounted expansion unit
1 Ensure you remove all the cables from the expansion unit.
If necessary, see the procedure
To disconnect the expansion unit cables on page 190.
2 If a unit is mounted to the top of the expansion unit, slide that unit forward until it disengages from the clips on the expansion unit. Lift the unit off the top of the expansion unit.
3 If the expansion unit is mounted on top of another unit, slide the expansion unit forward until it disengages from the clips of the other unit. Go to step 6.
If the expansion unit is not mounted on top of another unit, continue to the next step.
4
If the expansion unit is secured to the rack-mount shelf with screws, remove these screws from the bottom of the rack-mount shelf.
5 Slide the expansion unit forward until is disengages from the clips on the rack-mount shelf.
6 Lift the expansion unit off of the rack-mount shelf or other unit and set it on a flat, clean, static-free surface.
7
Continue with the procedure To remove the MBM on page 186.
To remove a wall-mounted expansion unit
1 Ensure you remove all the cables from the expansion unit.
If necessary, see the procedure
To disconnect the expansion unit cables on page 190.
2 Lift the expansion unit until it disengages from the clips on the wall-mount bracket.
3 Pull out the expansion unit and move it away from the wall-mount bracket.
4
Set the expansion unit on a flat, clean, static-free surface.
5
Proceed to Removing the MBM on page 192.
To remove a desktop-mounted expansion unit
1 Ensure you remove all the cables from the expansion unit.
If necessary, see the procedure
To disconnect the expansion unit cables on page 190.
2 If a unit is mounted to the top of the expansion unit, slide that unit forward until it disengages from the clips on the expansion unit. Lift the unit off the top of the expansion unit and set it on a flat, clean, static-free surface.
3 If the expansion unit is mounted on top of another unit, slide the expansion unit forward until it disengages from the clips of the other unit.
4 Lift the expansion unit off of the table or other unit and set it on a flat, clean, static-free surface.
5
Proceed to Removing the MBM on page 192.
BCM50 Installation and Maintenance Guide
192 Chapter 23 Replacing an expansion unit
Removing the MBM
After you remove the expansion unit, use the following procedure to remove the MBM from the expansion unit.
To remove the MBM
1 Attach one end of a grounding strap to your wrist and the other end to a grounded metal surface.
2 Grasp the right edge of the MBM ejector lever with your thumb, index, and middle fingers.
Pull outward to partially eject the MBM. Pull further on the lever to eject the MBM from the
expansion unit. See the figure Remove an MBM on page 192.
Figure 76 Remove an MBM
Grasp the edge of the MBM ejector lever and pull outward
3
Grasp the top and bottom edges of the MBM. Remove the MBM from the expansion unit.
Place the MBM in a flat, clean, and static-free surface.
Warning: Protect the hardware components against damage from electrostatic discharge. Always wear a ground wrist strap before you handle components. Always place the components in a static-free container.
4
Proceed to Installing the new expansion unit on page 193.
Inserting the MBM in the new expansion unit
To insert the MBM in the new expansion unit, see
Installing a media bay module in an expansion unit on page 102.
Proceed to Installing the new expansion unit on page 193.
NN40170-305
Chapter 23 Replacing an expansion unit 193
Installing the new expansion unit
Use one of the following procedures to install the new expansion unit:
•
Installing the BCM50 unit in an equipment rack on page 84
•
Installing the BCM50 unit on the wall on page 88
•
Installing the BCM50 unit on a desktop or shelf on page 93
To connect the cables
1 Insert the power supply retention clip into the new expansion unit.
2
Rotate the power supply retention clip so that the power supply jack is clear.
3 Connect the power supply cord to the expansion unit.
4 Rotate the power supply retention clip to lock the power supply cord in place.
5 Connect the expansion cable to the expansion port on the front of the expansion unit.
6
Connect the LAN cable to the LAN port on the front of the expansion unit (if applicable).
7 Connect all of the telephone line and extension cables to the MBM inserted in the expansion unit. To ensure the same line and extension numbering, make sure you connect the cables to the ports from which you removed them.
Warning: Leakage currents
You must connect the power cord to a grounded outlet before connecting the telephony and data networking cables to the system.
8 Use Element Manager to enable the MBM. For more information about enabling an MBM, see the Administration Guide.
BCM50 Installation and Maintenance Guide
194 Chapter 23 Replacing an expansion unit
NN40170-305
Chapter 24 Replacing an internal component 195
Chapter 24
Replacing an internal component
You can replace three components inside the main unit: the hard disk, the fan, and the router card.
The figure Overview of replacing an internal component on page 195 shows an overview of
replacing an internal component.
Caution: You must wear an antistatic grounding strap at all times when handling electronic components. Failure to do so can result in damage to the equipment.
Figure 77 Overview of replacing an internal component
BCM50 Installation and Maintenance Guide
196 Chapter 24 Replacing an internal component
For information about replacing an internal component:
•
Preparing the system for maintenance on page 196
•
Removing the main unit on page 196
•
Opening the main unit case on page 196
•
Removing an internal component on page 198
•
Inserting the new component on page 201
•
Closing the main unit case on page 206
•
Installing the main unit on page 207
Special tools
Before you replace the components, ensure you have the following equipment:
• Phillips screwdriver #2, with a 3.5-inch blade
• 3/16-inch slot screwdriver
• antistatic wrist grounding strap
Caution: You must wear an antistatic grounding strap at all times when handling electronic components. Failure to do so can result in damage to the equipment.
Preparing the system for maintenance
If the system is still operating, perform the procedure To shut down the system on page 176.
After the system shuts down, perform the procedure To disconnect the cables on page 182.
Removing the main unit
The method you use to remove the main unit depends on how the unit is mounted. Use one of the following procedures to remove the BCM50 main unit:
•
To remove a rack-mounted main unit on page 183
•
To remove a wall-mounted main unit on page 183
•
To remove a desktop mounted main unit on page 183
Opening the main unit case
This procedure is based on the assumption that you intend to perform maintenance activities. Do not operate the main unit with the cover removed.
NN40170-305
Chapter 24 Replacing an internal component 197
To open the main unit case
Danger: Electrical shock warning.
Disconnect the power cord, telephone cables, and network cables before opening the
BCM50 main unit.
1 Attach one end of a grounding strap to your wrist and the other end to a grounded metal surface.
2 Turn the main unit over so that the bottom of the unit is facing up.
3 Remove the three case screws from the back of the unit. For the location of the screws, see the
figure BCM50 case screws on page 197.
Figure 78 BCM50 case screws screws
4 Turn the BCM50 unit over so that the top of the unit is facing up.
5 While holding the bottom of the BCM50 case, slide the top of the case back to disengage the locking clips. See the figure
Remove the top of the case on page 198.
BCM50 Installation and Maintenance Guide
198 Chapter 24 Replacing an internal component
Figure 79 Remove the top of the case
6 Lift the top of the case off the BCM50 unit.
7
Proceed to Removing an internal component on page 198.
Removing an internal component
Use one of the following procedures to remove the component:
•
To remove the hard disk on page 199
•
•
To remove the router card on page 201
Warning: Protect the hardware components against damage from electrostatic discharge. Always wear a ground wriststrap before you handle components. Always place the components in static-free container.
NN40170-305
Chapter 24 Replacing an internal component 199
To remove the hard disk
Caution: Do not use an electric or magnetized screwdriver near the hard disk. You can lose the information stored on the disk. Shock can damage the hard disk. Do not drop or hit the hard disk.
1 Attach one end of a grounding strap to your wrist and the other end to a grounded metal surface.
2 Remove the two screws that attach the hard disk assembly to the main unit. See the figure
Figure 80 Hard disk and bracket installation
Remove these screws
Fan cable clips
Fan cable cutouts
3
Lift the hard disk and hard disk bracket from the main unit and place them on a flat, clean, static-free surface.
BCM50 Installation and Maintenance Guide
200 Chapter 24 Replacing an internal component
4
Remove the four screws that secure the hard disk to the hard disk bracket. See the figure
Hard disk and bracket assembly on page 200.
Figure 81 Hard disk and bracket assembly
Hard disk
Hard disk bracket screws
Hard disk bracket
Hard disk/power cable connector
Hard disk cable
Power cable
Hard disk bracket screws
5 Remove the hard disk and power cable from the connector.
6 Lift the hard disk from the hard disk bracket and set it on a flat, clean, static-free surface.
7
Proceed to Inserting the new component on page 201.
To remove the fan
1 Attach one end of a grounding strap to your wrist and the other end to a grounded metal surface.
2
Ensure the main unit case is open. If necessary, see Opening the main unit case on page 196.
3
Remove the hard disk to access the fan cable. See the procedure To remove the hard disk on page 199.
4 Remove the fan cable from the header. See the figure
NN40170-305
Figure 82 Location of fan
Chapter 24 Replacing an internal component 201
Fan
5 Lift the fan from the main unit and set it on a flat, clean, static-free surface.
6
Proceed to Inserting the new component on page 201.
To remove the router card
1 Attach one end of a grounding strap to your wrist and the other end to a grounded metal surface.
2
Ensure the main unit case is open. If necessary, see Opening the main unit case on page 196.
3
Remove the three router card retaining screws.
4 Gently lift the back of the router card to disengage it from the card connector.
5 Slide the router card back so the modular connectors clear the bezel.
6 Lift the router card over the top of the LED pipes and place it on a flat, clean, static-free surface.
7
Proceed to Inserting the new component on page 201.
Inserting the new component
Use one of the following procedures to insert the new component:
•
To insert the new hard disk on page 202
•
To insert the new fan on page 204
•
To insert the new router card on page 205
BCM50 Installation and Maintenance Guide
202 Chapter 24 Replacing an internal component
Caution: Use only a Nortel-approved replacement part. Contact your account representative for the current list of approved replacement parts.
Warning: Protect the hardware components against damage from electrostatic discharge. Always wear a ground wriststrap before you handle components.
Always place the components in static-free container.
To insert the new hard disk
Caution:
Do not use an electric or magnetized screwdriver near the hard disk.
You can lose the information stored on the disk. Shock can damage the hard disk.
Do not drop or hit the hard disk.
1 Attach one end of a grounding strap to your wrist and the other end to a grounded metal surface.
2
Note: If the cables do not insert properly, check that the notch on the hard disk connector is aligned with the corresponding notch on the cable.
Figure 83 Hard disk and bracket assembly
Hard disk
Hard disk bracket screws
Hard disk bracket
Hard disk/power cable connector
Hard disk cable
Power cable
Hard disk bracket screws
NN40170-305
Chapter 24 Replacing an internal component 203
3
Place the new hard disk in the hard disk bracket.
4 Use the four hard disk bracket screws to secure the hard disk to the bracket.
Caution: Use only the screws that you removed from the hard disk in the
procedure To remove the hard disk on page 199. Using other screws can damage
the hard disk.
5
Set the hard disk and bracket in the main unit. See the figure
Make sure that the hard disk cable and power cable are routed properly. Route the power cable under the bracket and loop the hard disk cable as shown.
Figure 84 Hard disk and bracket installation
Fan cable clips
Fan cable cutouts
6
Press down lightly on the top of the hard disk to ensure that the hard disk bracket is seated properly.
BCM50 Installation and Maintenance Guide
204 Chapter 24 Replacing an internal component
7
Ensure you route the fan cable through the cutouts under the hard disk and bracket. Also, make sure you secure any slack in the fan cable in the clips on the hard disk bracket. See the figure
Figure 85 Cable routing
Caution: Ensure that you follow the same routing for the cables as before you removed the component.
8 Fasten the hard disk assembly to the main unit with two screws. Use only the supplied screws, since other screws can damage the unit.
9 Perform a restore or manually reprogram the system.
10
Continue with the procedure To close the main unit case on page 206.
To insert the new fan
1 Attach one end of a grounding strap to your wrist and the other end to a grounded metal surface.
2 Insert the new fan into the fan slot in the bottom of the BCM50 case.
NN40170-305
Chapter 24 Replacing an internal component 205
Ensure the fans are oriented so air flows out of the unit.
Note: Ensure the label of the new fan faces the back of the BCM50 unit. Air must flow out of the unit as indicated by the arrows imprinted on the fan.
3
Connect the fan cable to the header.
4 Ensure your route the fan cable through the cutouts under the hard disk and bracket. Also, make sure that you secure any slack in the fan cable with the clips on the hard disk bracket.
See the figure
Note: Do not force the cable.
The connectors on the fan cable prevents you from inserting the cable backwards.
If you cannot insert the cable properly, check that the raised edge on the fan cable connector faces the plastic tab on the header.
5
Insert the hard disk. See the procedure To insert the new hard disk on page 202.
6
Continue with the procedure To close the main unit case on page 206.
To insert the new router card
1 Attach one end of a grounding strap to your wrist and the other end to a grounded metal surface.
2 With the back of the router card raised enough to clear the LED pipes, align the modular connectors on the router card with the corresponding holes in the bezel.
3 Move the router card forward until the front edge of the card touches the bezel.
4
Align the card connector on the router card with the connector on the Compact Services Card
(CSC).
5 Gently press down on the back of the router card to seat the router card in the connector on the
CSC.
6 Use the three screws you removed in the procedure
To remove the router card on page 201 to
secure the Router card to the CSC.
Caution: Use only the original screws to secure the Router card. Using other screws can interfere with proper installation.
7
Continue with the procedure To close the main unit case on page 206.
BCM50 Installation and Maintenance Guide
206 Chapter 24 Replacing an internal component
Closing the main unit case
To close the main unit case
1 Attach one end of a grounding strap to your wrist and the other end to a grounded metal surface.
2 Place the top of the case on top of the main unit case. Make sure the side edges of the case are aligned and the front of the top is back about 1 cm (3/8 in.).
3
Figure 86 Replacing the top of the case
4 Turn the main unit over so you can access the screws holes on the bottom of the unit.
5 Insert the three case screws in the back of the unit and tighten them. For the location of the screws, see the figure
BCM50 case screws on page 197.
Caution: Use only the screws that you removed from the unit in the procedure
Opening the main unit case on page 196. Do not use any other screws.
6 Turn the main unit over so that the top of the unit faces up.
7
Proceed to Installing the main unit on page 207.
NN40170-305
Chapter 24 Replacing an internal component 207
Installing the main unit
Use one of the following procedures to install the BCM50 main unit:
•
Installing the BCM50 unit on the rack-mount shelf on page 85
•
To install the BCM50 unit on the wall-mount bracket on page 90
•
To install the BCM50 unit on a desktop or shelf on page 93
Connecting the cables
Use the procedure
To connect the cables on page 184 to reconnect the cables to the main unit.
BCM50 Installation and Maintenance Guide
208 Chapter 24 Replacing an internal component
NN40170-305
Appendix A RJ-21 telephony connector wiring chart 209
Appendix A
RJ-21 telephony connector wiring chart
You can connect 4 analog telephone lines (standard main units only), 4 analog telephony devices, and 12 digital telephones to the RJ-21 telephony connector.
Note: The four analog lines on the RJ-21 telephony connector are available only on the standard main units. The four analog lines are not available on the BRI series (b-series) main units, which have two BRI ports instead.
The figure RJ-21 telephony connector on a BCM50 on page 209 shows the RJ-21 telephony
connector on a BCM50.
Figure 87 RJ-21 telephony connector on a BCM50
Main Unit
RJ-21 telephony connector pin out
RJ-21 telephony connector
The table
RJ-21 telephony connector wiring on page 209 lists the wiring details for the RJ-21
telephony connector.
Table 33 RJ-21 telephony connector wiring (Sheet 1 of 3)
Device Pin Connection Wire color Type of device Port Default DN
Default line number
1
2
26 Tip
1 Ring
27 Tip
2 Ring
White-Blue
Blue-White
White-Orange
Orange-White
Analog line
Analog line
—
—
—
—
061
062
3
4
28 Tip
3 Ring
29 Tip
4 Ring
White-Green
Green-White
White-Brown
Brown-White
Analog line
Analog line
—
—
—
—
063
064
Note: The four analog lines are available only on the standard main units; the analog lines are not available on the
BRI series (b-series) main units, which have two BRI ports instead.
BCM50 Installation and Maintenance Guide
210 Appendix A RJ-21 telephony connector wiring chart
Table 33 RJ-21 telephony connector wiring (Sheet 2 of 3)
Device Pin
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
Connection Wire color Type of device
38 Tip
13 Ring
39 Tip
14 Ring
40 Tip
15 Ring
41 Tip
16 Ring
42 Tip
17 Ring
43 Tip
18 Ring
44 Tip
19 Ring
45 Tip
20 Ring
46 Tip
21 Ring
47 Tip
22 Ring
30 Tip
5 Ring
31 Tip
6 Ring
32 Tip
7 Ring
33 Tip
8 Ring
White-Slate
Slate-White
Red-Blue
Blue-Red
Red-Orange
Orange-Red
Red-Green
Green-Red
34 No connection Red-Brown
9 No connection Brown-Red
35 Tip
10 Ring
Red-Slate
Slate-Red
36 Tip
11 Ring
37 Tip
12 Ring
Black-Blue
Blue-Black
Black-Orange
Orange-Black
Black-Green
Green-Black
Black-Brown
Brown-Black
Black-Slate
Slate-Black
Yellow-Blue
Blue-Yellow
Yellow-Orange
Orange-Yellow
Yellow-Green
Green-Yellow
Yellow-Brown
Brown-Yellow
Yellow-Slate
Slate-Yellow
Violet-Blue
Blue-Violet
Violet-Orange
Orange-Violet
Analog telephone
Analog telephone
Analog telephone
Analog telephone
No connection
Auxiliary
Ringer
Page Relay
Page Output
Music Source
Digital telephone
Digital telephone
Digital telephone
Digital telephone
Digital telephone
Digital telephone
Digital telephone
Digital telephone
Digital telephone
Port
413
414
415
416
—
—
—
—
—
412
411
410
409
408
407
406
405
404
230
229
228
227
232
231
—
—
236
—
—
—
Default DN
233
Default line number
—
234
235
—
—
—
—
—
—
226
225
224
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
NN40170-305
Appendix A RJ-21 telephony connector wiring chart 211
Table 33 RJ-21 telephony connector wiring (Sheet 3 of 3)
Device Pin
23
24
25
Connection
48 Tip
23 Ring
49 Tip
24 Ring
50 Tip
25 Ring
Wire color Type of device
Violet-Green
Green-Violet
Violet-Brown
Brown-Violet
Violet-Slate
Slate-Violet
Digital telephone
Digital telephone
Digital telephone
Port
403
402
401
Default DN
223
Default line number
—
222
221
—
—
BCM50 Installation and Maintenance Guide
212 Appendix A RJ-21 telephony connector wiring chart
NN40170-305
Appendix B BRI wiring chart 213
Appendix B
BRI wiring chart
The digital BRI ISDN lines connects to the BCM50b, BCM50ba, and BCM50be main units
through the BRI ports (RJ-45) on the front of the main units. See the figure BRI ports and pin out
The figure BRI ports and pin out (BCM50b shown) on page 213, the table BRI port wiring on page
213, and the table BRI line numbering on page 214 apply to S-Loop and T-Loop connections.
S-Loop are used to connect S-Loop devices such as video phones, terminal adapters, and Grp 3
Fax machines. The T-Loops are used to connect to the CO/PSTN.
Warning: For a U-loop connection, the BRI port must be connected only to an NT1 provided by the service provider. The NT1 must provide a Telecommunication Network
Voltage (TNV) to Safety Extra Low Voltage (SELV) barrier.
Figure 88 BRI ports and pin out (BCM50b shown)
BRI ports
BRI port pin out
The table
on page 213 and the table BRI line numbering on page 214 list the
wiring details for the RJ-45 ports.
Table 34 BRI port wiring
Pin
7
8
5
6
3
4
1
2
Signal
No connection
No connection
+ Receive (+Rx)
+ Transmit (+Tx)
- Transmit (-Tx)
- Receive (-Rx)
No connection
No connection
Signal on system side
No connection
No connection
+Tx
+Rx
-Rx
-Tx
No connection
No connection
BCM50 Installation and Maintenance Guide
214 Appendix B BRI wiring chart
Table 35 BRI line numbering
Port number
Default line numbers on
Expansion port 1
3
4
1
2
065 – 066
067 – 068
069 – 070
071 – 072
Default line numbers on
Expansion port 2
095 – 096
097 – 098
099 – 100
101 – 102
NN40170-305
Appendix C LAN ports wiring chart 215
Appendix C
LAN ports wiring chart
All BCM50 units have LAN ports as follows:
• The BCM50 and BCM50b have three LAN ports.
• The BCM50a and BCM50ba have seven LAN ports.
• The BCM50e and BCM50be have seven LAN ports.
• The expansion unit has one LAN port.
The figure
LAN ports on the BCM50 units on page 215 shows the LAN ports on the BCM50 units.
Figure 89 LAN ports on the BCM50 units
BCM50/BCM50b Expansion unit
OAM port
LAN port
BCM50a BCM50e
LAN port
LAN ports
BCM50ba
LAN ports
BCM50be
LAN ports LAN ports
LAN port pin out
BCM50 Installation and Maintenance Guide
216 Appendix C LAN ports wiring chart
The table
LAN port wiring on page 216 lists the wiring details for the LAN ports.
Table 36 LAN port wiring
Pin
7
8
5
6
3
4
1
2
Signal
+ Receive Data (Rx+)
– Receive Data (Rx–)
+ Transmit Data (Tx+)
No connection
No connection
– Transmit Data (Tx–)
No connection
No connection
NN40170-305
Appendix D WAN ports wiring chart 217
Appendix D
WAN ports wiring chart
Four BCM50 main units, the BCM50a, BCM50ba, BCM50e, and BCM50be, have a Router card.
On a BCM50a and BCM50ba main units, the WAN port is an RJ-11 port. On a BCM50e and
BCM50be main units, the WAN port is an RJ-45 port.
The figure BCM50a,BCM50ba, BCM50e, BCM50be main unit WAN ports on page 217 shows
the WAN ports for the BCM50a, BCM50ba, BCM50e, and BCM50be.
Figure 90 BCM50a,BCM50ba, BCM50e, BCM50be main unit WAN ports
BCM50a (BCM50ba)
WAN port LAN ports
RJ-11 pin out
BCM50e (BCM50be)
WAN port LAN ports
RJ-45 pin out
The table RJ-11 WAN port wiring
on page 217 and the table RJ-45 WAN port wiring on page 218
list the wiring details for the WAN ports.
Table 37 RJ-11 WAN port wiring (Sheet 1 of 2)
Pin
1
2
3
Signal
No connection
No connection
Ring
BCM50 Installation and Maintenance Guide
218 Appendix D WAN ports wiring chart
Table 37 RJ-11 WAN port wiring (Sheet 2 of 2)
Pin
4
5
6
Signal
Tip
No connection
No connection
Table 38 RJ-45 WAN port wiring
Pin
7
8
5
6
3
4
1
2
Signal
+ Receive Data (Rx+)
– Receive Data (Rx–)
+ Transmit Data (Tx+)
No connection
No connection
– Transmit Data (Tx–)
No connection
No connection
NN40170-305
Appendix E Expansion ports wiring chart 219
Appendix E
Expansion ports wiring chart
Two of the four RJ-45 connectors on the BCM50, BCM50a, BCM50e, BCM50b, BCM50ba, and
BCM50be main units are designated as expansion ports. See the figure
BCM50 and an expansion unit on page 219. These ports connect to an expansion unit or connect
network devices to the LAN.
Figure 91 Expansion ports on a BCM50 and an expansion unit
BCM50 main unit
Expansion/LAN
(port 2)
Expansion/LAN
(port 3)
Expansion unit
Expansion port pin out
Expansion port
The table
Expansion port wiring on page 219 lists the wiring details for the expansion ports.
Table 39 Expansion port wiring (Sheet 1 of 2)
Pin
3
4
1
2
5
6
Signal
+ Ethernet Receive Data
– Ethernet Receive Data
+ Ethernet Transmit Data
– FS256 Transmit Data
+ FS256 Transmit Data
– Ethernet Transmit Data
BCM50 Installation and Maintenance Guide
220 Appendix E Expansion ports wiring chart
Table 39 Expansion port wiring (Sheet 2 of 2)
Pin
7
8
Signal
– FS256 Receive Data
+ FS256 Receive Data
NN40170-305
Appendix F DTM wiring chart 221
Appendix F
DTM wiring chart
The digital telephone line connects to the Digital Trunk Module (DTM) through the RJ-48c jack
on the front of the media bay module (MBM). See the figure DTM RJ-48C port on page 221.
Figure 92 DTM RJ-48C port
DTM
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
RJ-48C pin out
Bantam jack RJ-48C jack
The table
DTM RJ-48c port wiring on page 221 and the table DTM line numbering on page 221
list the wiring details for the RJ-48C port.
Table 40 DTM RJ-48c port wiring
Pin
7
8
5
6
3
4
1
2
Signal
Receive Ring
Receive Tip
Receive Shield
Transmit Ring
Transmit Tip
Transmit Shield
No connection
No connection
Table 41 DTM line numbering
Line type
T1
PRI
E1
Default line numbers on
Expansion port 1
065 – 088
065 – 087
065 – 094
Default line numbers on
Expansion port 2
095 – 118
095 – 117
095 – 124
BCM50 Installation and Maintenance Guide
222 Appendix F DTM wiring chart
NN40170-305
Appendix G BRIM wiring chart 223
Appendix G
BRIM wiring chart
The digital BRI ISDN lines connects to the BRIM through the RJ-45 jacks on the front of the media bay module (MBM). See the figure
BRIM RJ-45 ports on page 223. You can connect up to
four BRI ISDN lines to the BRIM.
The figure BRIM RJ-45 ports on page 223, the table BRIM RJ-45 port wiring on page 223, and the
table BRIM line numbering on page 224 apply to S-Loop and T-Loop connections. S-Loops
connect S-Loop devices such as video phones, terminal adapters, and Grp 3 Fax machines. The
T-Loops connect to the CO/PSTN.
Warning: For a U-loop connection, you must connect the BRIM only to an NT1 supplied by the service provider. The NT1 must provide a Telecommunication Network Voltage
(TNV) to Safety Extra Low Voltage (SELV) barrier.
Figure 93 BRIM RJ-45 ports
BRIM
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
RJ-45 pin out
RJ-45 jacks
The table
on page 223 and the table BRIM line numbering on page 224
list the wiring details for the RJ-45 ports.
Table 42 BRIM RJ-45 port wiring
Pin
7
8
5
6
3
4
1
2
Signal
No connection
No connection
+ Receive (+Rx)
+ Transmit (+Tx)
– Transmit (-Tx)
– Receive (-Rx)
No connection
No connection
Signal on system side
No connection
No connection
+Tx
+Rx
– Rx
– Tx
No connection
No connection
BCM50 Installation and Maintenance Guide
224 Appendix G BRIM wiring chart
Table 43 BRIM line numbering
Port number
Default line numbers on
Expansion port 1
3
4
1
2
065–066
067–068
069–070
071–072
Default line numbers on
Expansion port 2
095–096
097–098
099–100
101– 02
NN40170-305
Appendix H ADID wiring chart 225
Appendix H
ADID wiring chart
Analog telephone lines connect to the ADID4 or ADID8 through the RJ-21 connector on the front
of the media bay module (MBM). See the figure ADID RJ-21 connector on page 225.
Figure 94 ADID RJ-21 connector
ADID
RJ-21 connector RJ-21 pin out
The table
ADID4 and ADID8 RJ-21 connector wiring on page 225 lists the wiring details for the
RJ-21 connector on the ADID4 and ADID8. Use the first four lines for the ADID4 and use all eight lines for the ADID8.
Table 44 ADID4 and ADID8 RJ-21 connector wiring
Line
Default line numbers on
Expansion port 1
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Pin
32
7
33
8
30
5
31
6
28
3
29
4
26
1
27
2
Tip
Ring
Tip
Ring
Tip
Ring
Tip
Ring
Tip
Ring
Tip
Ring
Tip
Ring
Tip
Ring
Connection
065
066
067
068
073
074
075
076
Default line numbers on
Expansion port 2
095
096
097
098
103
104
105
106
BCM50 Installation and Maintenance Guide
226 Appendix H ADID wiring chart
NN40170-305
Appendix I GATM wiring chart 227
Appendix I
GATM wiring chart
Analog telephone lines connect to the GATM4 or GATM8 through the RJ-21 connector on the
front of the media bay module (MBM). See the figure GATM RJ-21 connector on page 227.
Figure 95 GATM RJ-21 connector
GATM
RJ-21 connector RJ-21 pin out
The table
GATM4 RJ-21 connector wiring on page 227 lists the wiring details for the RJ-21
connector on the GATM4.
Table 45 GATM4 RJ-21 connector wiring (Sheet 1 of 2)
Line
Default line numbers on
Expansion port 1
Default line numbers on
Expansion port 2
1
2
—
—
3
4
—
.
.
.
Pin
.
.
.
Connection
26 Tip
1 Ring
27 Tip
2 Ring
28 No connection
3 No connection
29 No connection
4 No connection
30 Tip
5 Ring
31 Tip
6 Ring
32 No connection
7 No connection
.
.
.
Wire color
White-Blue
Blue-White
White-Orange
Orange-White
White-Green
Green-White
White-Brown
Brown-White
White-Slate
Slate-White
Red-Blue
Blue-Red
Red-Orange
Orange-Red
.
.
.
065
066
—
—
067
068
—
.
.
.
095
096
—
—
097
098
—
.
.
.
BCM50 Installation and Maintenance Guide
228 Appendix I GATM wiring chart
Table 45 GATM4 RJ-21 connector wiring (Sheet 2 of 2)
Line Pin Connection Wire color
Default line numbers on
Expansion port 1
Default line numbers on
Expansion port 2
—
Aux
49 No connection
24 No connection
50 Tip
25 Ring
Violet-Brown
Brown-Violet
Violet-Slate
Slate-Violet
—
—
—
—
Note: The AUX port supports full data speeds. When the line is in use by an analog device, the icon is lit on the phone to indicate it is in use. If you try to seize the line using the phone, the display shows “in use”. Also, if a power failure occurs, an analog set on line 1 activates (powered by the CO).
The table
GATM8 RJ-21 connector wiring on page 228 lists the wiring details for the RJ-21
connector on the GATM8.
Table 46 GATM8 RJ-21 connector wiring (Sheet 1 of 2)
Line
Default line numbers on
Expansion port 1
Default line numbers on
Expansion port 2
1
2
—
—
3
4
—
—
5
6
—
—
Pin Connection Wire color
26 Tip
1 Ring
27 Tip
2 Ring
White-Blue
Blue-White
White-Orange
Orange-White
28 No connection White-Green
3 No connection Green-White
29 No connection White-Brown
4 No connection Brown-White
30 Tip
5 Ring
31 Tip
6 Ring
White-Slate
Slate-White
Red-Blue
Blue-Red
32 No connection Red-Orange
7 No connection Orange-Red
33 No connection Red-Green
8 No connection Green-Red
34 Tip
9 Ring
35 Tip
10 Ring
Red-Brown
Brown-Red
Red-Slate
Slate-Red
36 No connection Black-Blue
11 No connection Blue-Black
37 No connection Black-Orange
12 No connection Orange-Black
065
066
—
—
067
068
—
—
073
074
—
—
095
096
—
—
097
098
—
—
103
104
—
—
NN40170-305
Appendix I GATM wiring chart 229
Table 46 GATM8 RJ-21 connector wiring (Sheet 2 of 2)
Line
7
8
—
Pin Connection Wire color
38 Tip
13 Ring
Black-Green
Green-Black
39 Tip Black-Brown
14 Ring Brown-Black
40 No connection Black-Slate
15 No connection Slate-Black
Default line numbers on
Expansion port 1
075
076
—
Default line numbers on
Expansion port 2
105
106
—
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
—
49 No connection Violet-Brown
24 No connection Brown-Violet
— —
Aux
(see
Note)
50
25
Tip
Ring
Violet-Slate
Slate-Violet
— —
Note: The AUX port supports full data speeds. When the line is in use by an analog device, the icon is lit on the phone to indicate it is in use. If you try to seize the line using the phone, the display shows “in use”. Also, if a power failure occurs, an analog set on line 1 activates (powered by the CO).
BCM50 Installation and Maintenance Guide
230 Appendix I GATM wiring chart
NN40170-305
Appendix J 4x16 wiring charts 231
Appendix J
4x16 wiring charts
You can connect up to 4 analog telephone lines and up to 16 digital telephones to the 4x16 media bay module (MBM).
The analog telephones lines connect to the 4x16 through the RJ-11 jacks (labeled 1 to 4) on the front of the MBM. Do not connect analog telephone lines to the auxiliary jack on the front of the media bay module. These jacks are intended for analog telephones designated as emergency
telephones. See the figure 4x16 connectors on page 231.
The digital telephones, such as the Business Series Telephones, connect to the RJ-21 connector on the front of the 4x16.
Figure 96 4x16 connectors
4x16
RJ-21 connector
RJ-21 pin out
RJ-11 jacks
6 5 4 3 2 1
RJ-11 pin out
The table
on page 231 and the table 4x16 default line numbering on page
232 list the wiring details for the RJ-11 jacks on the 4x16. This wiring applies to the numbered
ports and the Aux ports.
Table 47 4x16 RJ-11 port wiring (Sheet 1 of 2)
Pin
3
4
1
2
Signal
No connection
No connection
Ring
Tip
BCM50 Installation and Maintenance Guide
232 Appendix J 4x16 wiring charts
Table 47 4x16 RJ-11 port wiring (Sheet 2 of 2)
Pin
5
6
Signal
No connection
No connection
Table 48 4x16 default line numbering
Port number
Default line number on
Expansion port 1
Default line number on
Expansion port 2
3
4
1
2
065
066
067
068
095
096
097
098
The table
4x16 RJ-21 connector wiring on page 232 lists the wiring details for the RJ-21 connector
on the 4x16.
Table 49 4x16 RJ-21 connector wiring (Sheet 1 of 2)
Set
Default DN on
Expansion port 1
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Pin Connection
26 Tip
1 Ring
27 Tip
2 Ring
28 Tip
3 Ring
29 Tip
4 Ring
30 Tip
5 Ring
31 Tip
6 Ring
32 Tip
7 Ring
33 Tip
8 Ring
34 Tip
9 Ring
Wire color
White-Blue
Blue-White
White-Orange
Orange-White
White-Green
Green-White
White-Brown
Brown-White
White-Slate
Slate-White
Red-Blue
Blue-Red
Red-Orange
Orange-Red
Red-Green
Green-Red
Red-Brown
Brown-Red
253
254
255
256
257
258
259
260
261
Default DN on
Expansion port 2
285
286
287
288
289
290
291
292
293
NN40170-305
Table 49 4x16 RJ-21 connector wiring (Sheet 2 of 2)
Set
Default DN on
Expansion port 1
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
—
.
.
.
—
Pin Connection Wire color
35 Tip
10 Ring
36 Tip
11 Ring
37 Tip
12 Ring
38 Tip
13 Ring
Red-Slate
Slate-Red
Black-Blue
Blue-Black
Black-Orange
Orange-Black
Black-Green
Green-Black
39 Tip
14 Ring
40 Tip
15 Ring
Black-Brown
Brown-Black
Black-Slate
Slate-Black
41 Tip
16 Ring
Yellow-Blue
Blue-Yellow
42 No connection Yellow-Orange
17 No connection Orange-Yellow
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
50 No connection Violet-Slate
25 No connection Slate-Violet
262
263
264
265
266
267
268
—
.
.
.
—
Appendix J 4x16 wiring charts 233
Default DN on
Expansion port 2
294
295
296
—
.
.
.
—
297
298
299
300
BCM50 Installation and Maintenance Guide
234 Appendix J 4x16 wiring charts
NN40170-305
Appendix K G4x16 and G8x16 wiring charts 235
Appendix K
G4x16 and G8x16 wiring charts
You can connect 4 or 8 analog telephone lines and up to 16 digital telephones to the G4x16 or
G8x16 media bay module (MBM).
The analog telephones lines connect to the G4x16 or G8x16 through the lower RJ-21 (amphenol)
connector on the front of the MBM. See the figure G4x16/G8x16 connectors on page 235.
The digital telephones, such as the Business Series Telephones, connect to the upper RJ-21
(amphenol) connector on the front of the G4x16 or G8x16 MBM.
Figure 97 G4x16/G8x16 connectors
RJ-21 (amphenol) connector for 16 digital telephones
RJ-21 (amphenol) connector for 4 or 8 analog PSTN lines
RJ-21 pin out
The table
G4x16 and G8x16 lower RJ-21 (amphenol) connector wiring for analog PSTN lines on page 237 lists the
wiring details for the lower RJ-21 (amphenol) connector on the G4x16 and G8x16 MBMs.
Table 50 G4x16/G8x16 MBM upper RJ-21 (amphenol) connector wiring for digital telephones
(Sheet 1 of 2)
Set
1
2
Pin
26
1
27
2
Connection
Tip
Ring
Tip
Ring
Wire color
White-Blue
Blue-White
White-Orange
Orange-White
Default DN on
Expansion port 1
253
254
Default DN on
Expansion port 2
285
286
BCM50 Installation and Maintenance Guide
236 Appendix K G4x16 and G8x16 wiring charts
Table 50 G4x16/G8x16 MBM upper RJ-21 (amphenol) connector wiring for digital telephones
(Sheet 2 of 2)
.
.
.
Set
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
—
—
Connection
Tip
Ring
Tip
Ring
Tip
Ring
Tip
Ring
Tip
Ring
Tip
Ring
No connection
No connection
.
.
.
No connection
No connection
Tip
Ring
Tip
Ring
Tip
Ring
Tip
Ring
Tip
Ring
Tip
Ring
Tip
Ring
Tip
Ring
.
.
.
Pin
40
15
41
16
42
17
38
13
39
14
36
11
37
12
34
9
35
10
32
7
33
8
30
5
31
6
28
3
29
4
50
25
Wire color
Black-Blue
Blue-Black
Black-Orange
Orange-Black
Black-Green
Green-Black
Black-Brown
Brown-Black
Black-Slate
Slate-Black
Yellow-Blue
Blue-Yellow
Yellow-Orange
Orange-Yellow
.
.
.
Violet-Slate
Slate-Violet
White-Green
Green-White
White-Brown
Brown-White
White-Slate
Slate-White
Red-Blue
Blue-Red
Red-Orange
Orange-Red
Red-Green
Green-Red
Red-Brown
Brown-Red
Red-Slate
Slate-Red
.
.
.
Default DN on
Expansion port 1
255
256
257
258
259
260
261
262
263
264
265
266
267
268
—
—
.
.
.
Default DN on
Expansion port 2
287
288
289
290
291
292
293
294
295
296
297
298
299
300
—
—
NN40170-305
Appendix K G4x16 and G8x16 wiring charts 237
Table 51 G4x16 and G8x16 lower RJ-21 (amphenol) connector wiring for analog PSTN lines
(Sheet 1 of 2)
.
.
.
Line Pin
1
2
—
—
3
4
—
—
5
6
—
—
7
8
—
—
Connection Wire color
Default line numbers on
Expansion port 1
Default line numbers on
Expansion port 2
26 Tip
1 Ring
White-Blue
Blue-White
065 095
27 Tip White-Orange
066
2 Ring Orange-White
28 No connection White-Green
—
3 No connection Green-White
29 No connection White-Brown
—
4 No connection Brown-White
30 Tip White-Slate
067
5 Ring
31 Tip
Slate-White
Red-Blue
7
068
6 Ring Blue-Red
32 No connection Red-Orange
—
No connection Orange-Red
The following part of the wiring chart applies only to the G8x16 MBM.
096
—
—
097
098
—
33 No connection Red-Green
8 No connection Green-Red
34 Tip
9 Ring
Red-Brown
Brown-Red
—
073
—
103
35 Tip
10 Ring
Red-Slate
Slate-Red
36 No connection Black-Blue
11 No connection Blue-Black
37 No connection Black-Orange
12 No connection Orange-Black
38 Tip
13 Ring
39 Tip
14 Ring
Black-Green
Green-Black
Black-Brown
Brown-Black
074
—
—
075
076
104
—
—
105
106
40 No connection Black-Slate
15 No connection Slate-Black
— —
.
.
.
The following part of the wiring chart applies to both the G4x16 and G8x16 MBMs.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
49 No connection Violet-Brown
— —
24 No connection Brown-Violet
BCM50 Installation and Maintenance Guide
238 Appendix K G4x16 and G8x16 wiring charts
Table 51 G4x16 and G8x16 lower RJ-21 (amphenol) connector wiring for analog PSTN lines
(Sheet 2 of 2)
Line Pin Connection Wire color
Default line numbers on
Expansion port 1
Default line numbers on
Expansion port 2
Aux
(see
Note)
50
25
Tip
Ring
Violet-Slate
Slate-Violet
— —
Note: The Aux port supports full data speeds. When the line is in use by an analog device, the icon is lit on the phone. If you try to seize the line using the phone, the display shows “in use.” Also, if a power failure occurs, an analog set on line 1 activates (powered by the CO).
NN40170-305
Appendix L DSM16 and DSM32 wiring charts 239
Appendix L
DSM16 and DSM32 wiring charts
Digital telephones, such as the Business Series Telephones, connect to the Digital Station Module
(DSM16 or DSM32) through the RJ-21 connectors on the front of the media bay module. The
DSM16 has a single RJ-21 connector and the DSM32 has two RJ-21 connectors. See the figure
DSM16 and DSM32 RJ-21 connectors on page 239.
Figure 98 DSM16 and DSM32 RJ-21 connectors
DSM16 DSM32
RJ-21 connector RJ-21 connectors
RJ-21 pin out
The table
DSM16 and DSM32 RJ-21 connector wiring on page 239 lists the wiring details for the
RJ-21 connectors on the DSM16 and DSM32.
Table 52 DSM16 and DSM32 RJ-21 connector wiring (Sheet 1 of 3)
Default DN on Expansion port 1
Default DN on Expansion port 2
Set Pin Connection Wire color
1
2
3
26 Tip
1 Ring
27 Tip
2 Ring
28 Tip
3 Ring
White-Blue
Blue-White
White-Orange
Orange-White
White-Green
Green-White
237
238
239
501 253 601 269
502
503
254
255
602
603
270
271
701
702
703
285 801
286
287
802
803
BCM50 Installation and Maintenance Guide
240 Appendix L DSM16 and DSM32 wiring charts
Table 52 DSM16 and DSM32 RJ-21 connector wiring (Sheet 2 of 3)
Default DN on Expansion port 1
Default DN on Expansion port 2
.
.
.
29 Tip
4 Ring
30 Tip
5 Ring
31 Tip
6 Ring
32 Tip
7 Ring
33 Tip
8 Ring
34 Tip
9 Ring
35 Tip
10 Ring
36 Tip
11 Ring
37 Tip
12 Ring
38 Tip
13 Ring
39 Tip
14 Ring
40 Tip
15 Ring
41 Tip
16 Ring
42
17
No connection
No connection
Set Pin Connection Wire color
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
White-Brown
Brown-White
White-Slate
Slate-White
Red-Blue
Blue-Red
Red-Orange
Orange-Red
Red-Green
Green-Red
Red-Brown
Brown-Red
Red-Slate
Slate-Red
Black-Blue
Blue-Black
Black-Orange
Orange-Black
Black-Green
Green-Black
Black-Brown
Brown-Black
Black-Slate
Slate-Black
Yellow-Blue
Blue-Yellow
—
Yellow-Orange
Orange-Yellow
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
240
241
242
243
244
245
246
247
248
249
250
251
252
—
.
.
.
504 256 604 272
505
506
507
508
509
510
511
512
513
514
515
516
257
258
259
260
261
262
263
264
265
266
267
268
—
.
.
.
605
606
607
608
609
610
611
612
613
614
615
616
273
274
275
276
277
278
279
280
281
282
283
284
—
.
.
.
704
705
706
707
708
709
710
711
712
713
714
715
716
288 804
289
290
291
292
293
294
295
296
297
298
299
300
—
.
.
.
805
806
807
808
809
810
811
812
813
814
815
816
NN40170-305
Appendix L DSM16 and DSM32 wiring charts 241
Table 52 DSM16 and DSM32 RJ-21 connector wiring (Sheet 3 of 3)
Default DN on Expansion port 1
Default DN on Expansion port 2
Set Pin Connection Wire color
—
50
25
No connection
No connection
Violet-Slate
Slate-Violet
— — — —
BCM50 Installation and Maintenance Guide
242 Appendix L DSM16 and DSM32 wiring charts
NN40170-305
Appendix M ASM8, ASM8+, and GASM wiring chart 243
Appendix M
ASM8, ASM8+, and GASM wiring chart
Analog telephony devices, such as single line telephones, modems and Fax machines, connect to the Analog Station Module (ASM) through the RJ-21 connector on the front of the media bay
module. See the figure ASM RJ-21 connector on page 243.
Figure 99 ASM RJ-21 connector
GASM
RJ-21 pin out
RJ-21 connector
The table
ASM RJ-21 connector wiring on page 243 lists the wiring details for the RJ-21
connector on the ASM.
Table 53 ASM RJ-21 connector wiring (Sheet 1 of 2)
Set
Default DN on
Expansion port 1
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Pin Connection
26 Tip
1 Ring
27 Tip
2 Ring
28 Tip
3 Ring
29 Tip
4 Ring
30 Tip
5 Ring
31 Tip
6 Ring
32 Tip
7 Ring
33 Tip
8 Ring
Wire color
White-Blue
Blue-White
White-Orange
Orange-White
White-Green
Green-White
White-Brown
Brown-White
White-Slate
Slate-White
Red-Blue
Blue-Red
Red-Orange
Orange-Red
Red-Green
Green-Red
237
238
239
240
241
242
243
244
Default DN on
Expansion port 2
269
270
271
272
273
274
275
276
BCM50 Installation and Maintenance Guide
244 Appendix M ASM8, ASM8+, and GASM wiring chart
Table 53 ASM RJ-21 connector wiring (Sheet 2 of 2)
Set
Default DN on
Expansion port 1
—
.
.
.
—
Pin
.
.
.
Connection Wire color
34 No connection Red-Brown
9 No connection Brown-Red
.
.
.
.
.
.
50 No connection Violet-Slate
25 No connection Slate-Violet
—
.
.
.
—
Default DN on
Expansion port 2
—
.
.
.
—
NN40170-305
245
Appendix N
Market profile attributes
This section describes some of the differences in the market profile attributes. These attributes are derived from the market profile selected when you configure the system. Each market profile uses a set of system attributes that provide specific functionality for the geographical area in which you deploy the system.
This section covers the following main topics:
•
Interface availability on page 245
•
Tones and cadences on page 247
•
Core parameters for market profiles on page 255
•
Analog Trunk parameters on page 270
•
•
•
•
•
ISDN line services on page 287
•
Analog and digital trunk types on page 287
Interface availability
Some of the BCM50 interfaces are customized for a specific region and are not available to all market profiles. Refer to the following tables for a list of interfaces available within each market profile:
•
Analog interface availability by market profile on page 246
•
Digital interface availability by market profile on page 246
Analog interfaces
Analog interfaces are not supported in the following market profiles: Denmark, France, Germany,
Holland, Italy, Norway, Spain, Sweden, and Switzerland.
The symbols in the table Analog interface availability by market profile on page 246 are defined as
follows: indicates full support. The interface is available and is localized in the market profile.
indicates that functionality and support is limited. The interface is available in the market profile, but is not localized.
BCM50 Installation and Maintenance Guide
246 Appendix N Market profile attributes
Table 54 Analog interface availability by market profile
Market profile
Australia
ASM/
ASM8 ASM8+ GASM8 GASI
CTM4/
CTM8
Legacy
GATM4/
GATM8
New
GATM4/
GATM8
Legacy
4X16
G4x16
G8x16
(new) GATI ADID
Bahrain
Brazil
CALA
Canada
Caribbean
Global
Hong Kong
Ireland
Mexico
New Zealand
North America
Poland
PRC
Taiwan
United Kingdom
Digital interfaces
The table
Digital interface availability by market profile on page 246 lists the digital interfaces
supported in each market profile. Note that the Digital Station Interface and the BRI cNIC are onboard interfaces.
Table 55 Digital interface availability by market profile (Sheet 1 of 2)
DSM16+/
DSM32+
Digital station interface BRI
BRI cNIC DTM R2MFC Market profile
Australia
Bahrain
Brazil
NN40170-305
Appendix N Market profile attributes 247
Table 55 Digital interface availability by market profile (Sheet 2 of 2)
DSM16+/
DSM32+
Digital station interface BRI
BRI cNIC DTM R2MFC Market profile
CALA
Canada
Caribbean
Denmark
France
Germany
Global
Holland
Hong Kong
Ireland
Italy
Mexico
New Zealand
North America
Norway
Poland
PRC
Russia
South Africa
Spain
Sweden
Switzerland
Taiwan
United Kingdom
Tones and cadences
The following tables provide region-specific settings for tones and cadences.
Note: The sum of two tones is indicated by “A+B”. The sequence of two tones is indicated by “A:B”.
BCM50 Installation and Maintenance Guide
248 Appendix N Market profile attributes
•
Localized, Dial, and Quiet Dial on page 248
•
Special Dial, Overflow, and Busy on page 249
•
Ring Back, Aux Ring, Async Ring Back on page 251
•
Hold, Warble, Intrusion on page 252
•
Table 56 Localized, Dial, and Quiet Dial (Sheet 1 of 2)
Dial
Market profile Localized Tones (Hz)
Australia
Bahrain
Brazil
CALA
Canada
Caribbean
Denmark
France
Germany
Yes
Yes
Yes
No (North
America)
Yes
No (North
America)
Yes
Yes
Yes
400
330+440
425
440+350
440+350
440+350
425
440
425
Level per
Tone
(dBm0)
-13
-16
-11.5
-17
-17
-17
-11.5
-11.5
-11.5
Global -17
Cadence
Continuous
Continuous
Continuous
Continuous
Continuous
Continuous
Continuous
Continuous
200 ms on
275 ms off
200 ms on
275 ms off
200 ms on
875 ms off
Continuous
Holland
Hong Kong
Ireland
Italy
Mexico
New Zealand
North America
Norway
Poland
PRC
Russia
South Africa
Spain
Sweden
Switzerland
Taiwan
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No (North
America)
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No (North
America)
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
440+350
425
440+350
425
350+425
440+350
400
440+350
425
425
450
425
367+400
425
425
425
400
-13
-17
-11.5
-17.5
-11.5
-10
-17
-11.5
-11.5
-11.5
-12
-11.5
-11.5
-14.5
-8.5
-17
Continuous
Continuous
Continuous
Continuous
Continuous
Continuous
Continuous
Continuous
Continuous
Continuous
Continuous
Continuous
Continuous
Continuous
Continuous
Continuous
Quiet Dial
Tones
(Hz)
Level per
Tone
(dBm0) Cadence
400 -21
330+440 -20
425 -18
440+350 -25
Continuous
Continuous
Continuous
Continuous
440+350 -25
440+350 -25
425
400
425
-19.5
-17.5
-17.5
440+350 -25
425 -19.5
440+350 -17.6
425 -17.5
350+425 -17.5
440+350 -25
400 -21
440+350 -25
425
425
-17.5
-19.5
450
425
-17.5
-13
367+400 -25
425 -17.5
425
425
400
-17.5
-17.5
-20
Continuous
Continuous
Continuous
Continuous
200 ms on
275 ms off
200 ms on
275 ms off
200 ms on
875 ms off
Continuous
Continuous
Continuous
Continuous
Continuous
Continuous
Continuous
Continuous
Continuous
Continuous
Continuous
Continuous
Continuous
Continuous
Continuous
Continuous
Continuous
NN40170-305
Appendix N Market profile attributes 249
Table 56 Localized, Dial, and Quiet Dial (Sheet 2 of 2)
Dial
Market profile Localized Tones (Hz)
United Kingdom Yes 440+350
Level per
Tone
(dBm0)
-17.5
Cadence
Continuous
Quiet Dial
Tones
(Hz)
Level per
Tone
(dBm0)
440+350 -14.5
Cadence
Continuous
Table 57 Special Dial, Overflow, and Busy (Sheet 1 of 2)
Market profile
Australia
Bahrain
Brazil
CALA
Canada
Caribbean
Denmark
France
Germany
Global
Holland
Hong Kong
Ireland
Italy
Mexico
Special Dial
Tones
(Hz)
400
330+400 -16
425
Silence
Silence
Silence
Silence
Silence
Silence
Silence
425
Silence
Silence
Silence
Level per
Tone
(dBm0) Cadence
-13
-11.5
-11.5
400:432 -14.5
100 ms on
900 ms off
100 ms on
900 ms off
500 ms on
500 ms off
500 ms on
50 ms off
0.4 s:0.4 s
Overflow Busy
Tones
(Hz)
Level per
Tone
(dBm0) Cadence
800 -13 100 ms on
100 ms off
425
950: 1400:
1800: silence
480+620
480+620
480+620
950:1400:
1800: silence
-16
-18
-21
-21
-21
-25
950:1400:
1800: silence
425
480+620 -21
950: 1400:
1800: silence
-25:
-11.5:
-25: silence
333 ms:
333 ms:
333 ms:
1 s off
-11.5
240 ms on
240 ms off
-18
250 ms on
250 ms off
333 ms:
333 ms:
333 ms:
1 s off
480+620 -14.5
425
425
480+620
-17.5
-8
-21
500 ms on
500 ms off
450 ms on
450 ms off
200 ms on
200 ms off
250 ms on
250 ms off
400 ms on
350 ms off
225 ms on
525 ms off
333 ms:
333 ms:
333 ms:
1s off
250 ms on
250 ms off
250 ms on
250 ms off
250 ms on
250 ms off
333 ms:
333 ms:
333 ms:
1s off
Tones
(Hz)
425
425
425 -11.5
480+620 -21
480+620 -21
480+620 -21
425
440
425
-11.5
-11.5
-11.5
480+620 -21
425
480+620 -14.5
425
425
-11.5
-17.5
-8
480+620 -21
Level per
Tone
(dBm0) Cadence
-13
-15
375 ms on
375 ms off
375 ms on
375 ms off
250 ms on
250 ms off
500 ms on
500 ms off
500 ms on
500 ms off
500 ms on
500 ms off
250 ms on
250 ms off
500 ms on
500 ms off
150 ms on
475 ms off
500 ms on
500 ms off
500 ms on
500 ms off
500 ms on
500 ms off
450 ms on
450 ms off
500 ms on
500 ms off
500 ms on
500 ms off
BCM50 Installation and Maintenance Guide
250 Appendix N Market profile attributes
Table 57 Special Dial, Overflow, and Busy (Sheet 2 of 2)
Special Dial Overflow Busy
Market profile
New Zealand
North America
Norway
Poland
PRC
Russia
South Africa
Spain
Sweden
Switzerland
Taiwan
Tones
(Hz)
400: silence
Silence
Silence
Silence
Silence
Silence
Silence
Silence
425
Silence
Silence
Level per
Tone
(dBm0) Cadence
-13
-11.5
United Kingdom 440+350:
440
-17.5
0.1 s:0.1 s
320 ms on
25 ms off
Tones
(Hz)
400
950:1400:
1800: silence
-25
950:1400:
1800: silence
-25
450
425
400
950:1400:
1800: silence
-25
0.75 s:0.75 s 400
Level per
Tone
(dBm0) Cadence
-11.5
480+620 -21
-11.5
-10
-21
950: 1400:
1800: silence
-25
950: 1400:
1800: silence
-25
950: 1400:
1800: silence
-25
-11.5
Tones
(Hz)
Level per
Tone
(dBm0)
75 ms on
100 ms off
75 ms on
100 ms off
75 ms on
100 ms off
75 ms on
400 ms off
250 ms on
250 ms off
333 ms:
333 ms:
333 ms:
1.0 s
333 ms:
333 ms:
333 ms:
1.0 s
400 ms on,
400 ms off
160 ms on,
160 ms off
400
480+620
425
425
450
425
-11.5
-21
-11.5
-17.5
-11.5
-10
250 ms on,
250 ms off
333 ms:
333 ms:
333 ms:
1.0 s
333 ms:
333 ms:
333 ms:
1.0 s
333 ms:
333 ms:
333 ms:
1.0 s
333 ms:
333 ms:
333 ms:
1.0 s
400
425
425
425
480+620
Continuous 400
-21
-11.5
-11.5
-11.5
-21
-11.5
Cadence
500 ms on
500 ms off
500 ms on
500 ms off
500 ms on
500 ms off
500 ms on
500 ms off
350 ms on
350 ms off
350 ms on,
350 ms off
500 ms on,
500 ms off
200 ms on
200 ms off
250 ms on
250 ms off
500 ms on
500 ms off
500 ms on
500 ms off
375 ms on
375 ms off
NN40170-305
Appendix N Market profile attributes 251
Table 58 Ring Back, Aux Ring, Async Ring Back (Sheet 1 of 2)
Market profile
Australia
Bahrain
Brazil
CALA
Canada
Caribbean
Denmark
France
Germany
Global
Holland
Hong Kong
Ireland
Italy
Mexico
New Zealand
North America
Norway
Poland
Ring Back
Tones
(Hz)
400+450
425
425
440+480
440+480
440+480
425
440
425
440+480
425
440+480
400+450
425
440+480
400+450
440+480
425
425
Level per Tone
(dBm0) Cadence
-14.5
-15
-11.5
-16
-16
-16
-11.5
-11.5
-11.5
-16
-11.5
-11.5
-14.5
-8
-16
-14.5
-16
-11.5
-17.5
1 s on
4 s off
2 s on
4 s off
1 s on
4 s off
400 ms on
200 ms off
400 ms on
3 s off
400 ms on
200 ms off
400 ms on
2s off
1 s on
4 s off
2 s on
4 s off
400 ms on
200 ms off
400 ms on
2 s off
400 ms on
200 ms off
400 ms on
2 s off
400 ms on
200 ms off
400 ms on
2s off
1 s on
4 s off
2 s on
4 s off
2 s on
4 s off
2 s on
4 s off
1 s on
4 s off
1.5 s on
3.5 s off
2 s on
4 s off
1 s on
4 s off
1s on
4 s off
Aux Ring
Tones
(Hz)
Silence
Silence
Silence
Silence
Silence
Silence
Silence
Silence
Silence
Silence
Silence
Silence
Silence
Silence
Silence
Silence
Silence
Silence
Silence
Async Ring Back
Level per
Tone
(dBm0) Cadence
Tones
(Hz)
Level per
Tone
(dBm0) Cadence
400+450 -14.5
Continuous
425
Silence
440+480 -16
440+480 -16
440+480 -16
Silence
440+450 -14.5
Silence
440+480 -16
Silence
Silence
400+450 -14.5
Silence
440+480 -16
440+480 -14.5
440+480 -16
Silence
Silence
-15 Continuous
2 s on
4 s off
2 s on
4 s off
2 s on
4 s off
Continuous
2 s on
4 s off
Continuous
2 s on
4 s off
Continuous
2 s on
4 s off
BCM50 Installation and Maintenance Guide
252 Appendix N Market profile attributes
Table 58 Ring Back, Aux Ring, Async Ring Back (Sheet 2 of 2)
Market profile
PRC
Russia
South Africa
Spain
Sweden
Switzerland
Taiwan
Ring Back
Tones
(Hz)
450
425
367+400
425
425
425
440+480
United Kingdom 400+450
Level per Tone
(dBm0) Cadence
-11.5
-10
-16
-11.5
-11.5
-11.5
-21
-14.5
1s on
4 s off
1 s on,
4 s off
400ms on,
200ms off,
400ms on,
2s off
1.5 s on
3 s off
1 s on
5 s off
1 s on
4 s off
1 s on
2 s off
400 ms on
200 ms off
400 ms on
2 s off
Aux Ring
Tones
(Hz)
Silence
Silence
Silence
Silence
Silence
Silence
Silence
Silence
Async Ring Back
Level per
Tone
(dBm0) Cadence
Tones
(Hz)
Silence
Level per
Tone
(dBm0) Cadence
425
Silence
Silence
Silence
-10
367+400 -16
440+480 -21
400+450 -14.5
Continuous
Continuous
1 s on
2 s off
Continuous
Table 59 Hold, Warble, Intrusion (Sheet 1 of 2)
Hold Warble
Market profile
Tones
(Hz)
Australia
Bahrain
Brazil
400
400
425
CALA 440
Canada
Caribbean
Denmark
France
Germany
440
440
Silence
400
425
Level per Tone
(dBm0) Cadence
-13
-16
-11.5
-14
-14
-14
Tones
(Hz)
Continuous Silence
Continuous Silence
0.5 s on
9.5 s off
Silence
Cadenced by CoreTel
Silence
Cadenced by CoreTel
Cadenced by CoreTel
Silence
Silence
Silence
-11.5
-11.5
Continuous Silence
Continuous Silence
Intrusion
Level per
Tone
(dBm0) Cadence
Tones
(Hz)
425
400
Silence
Level per
Tone
(dBm0) Cadence
-13
-16
Continuous
Continuous
Silence
Silence
Silence
425
1400
425
-11.5
-11.5
-11.5
50 ms on
500 ms off
Continuous
Continuous
NN40170-305
Appendix N Market profile attributes 253
Table 59 Hold, Warble, Intrusion (Sheet 2 of 2)
Hold Warble
Market profile
Tones
(Hz)
Global 440
Holland 425
Hong Kong
Ireland
Italy
Mexico
New Zealand
North America
Norway
Silence
400
Silence
440
400
400
425
Poland
PRC
Russia
South Africa
Spain
Sweden
425
Silence
425
400
Silence
Silence
Switzerland Silence
Taiwan 440
United Kingdom 400
Level per Tone
(dBm0) Cadence
-14
-11.5
-11.5
-14
-11.5
-14
-11.5
-17.5
-10
-14
Tones
(Hz)
Cadenced by CoreTel
0.5 s on
9.5 s off
Silence
Silence
Silence
Continuous Silence
Cadenced by CoreTel
Silence
Silence
Continuous Silence
Cadenced by CoreTel
Silence
200 ms on
600 ms off
200 ms on
10 s off
Silence
Continuous Silence
Silence
Continuous Silence
Continuous Silence
Silence
Silence
-14
-11.5
Silence
Continuous Silence
Continuous Silence
Intrusion
Level per
Tone
(dBm0) Cadence
Tones
(Hz)
Silence
Level per
Tone
(dBm0) Cadence
Silence
1400
1400
425
Silence
-11.5
-11.5
-12
1400
Silence
-11.5
1400 -11.5
1400
1400
425
Silence
1400
1400
-25
-11.5
-10
-25
-25
1400
Silence
1400
-25
-11.5
Continuous
Continuous
Continuous
Continuous
Continuous
Continuous
Continuous
Continuous
Continuous
0.35s on,
15s off
Continuous
Continuous
Table 60 Reorder, 1 kHz (Sheet 1 of 3)
Reorder
Market profile
Tones
(Hz)
Australia 425
Bahrain
Brazil
400
425
1 kHz
Level per Tone
(dBm0) Cadence
-13: off:
-23: off
375 ms on
375 ms off
-16
-11.5
75 ms on
100 ms off
75 ms on
400 ms off
250 ms on
250 ms off
Tones
(Hz)
N/A
N/A
N/A
Level per Tone
(dBm0) Cadence
BCM50 Installation and Maintenance Guide
254 Appendix N Market profile attributes
Table 60 Reorder, 1 kHz (Sheet 2 of 3)
Reorder
Market profile
Tones
(Hz)
CALA 480+620
Canada
Caribbean
Denmark
France
Germany
Global
Holland
Hong Kong
Ireland
Italy
Mexico
New Zealand
North America
Norway
Poland
PRC
Russia
480+620
480+620
Silence
Silence
425
480+620
425
480+620
200
425
480+620
400
480+620
425
425
450
Silence
1 kHz
Level per Tone
(dBm0) Cadence
-21
-21
-21
250 ms on
250 ms off
250 ms on
250 ms off
250 ms on
250 ms off
Tones
(Hz)
1004
1004
1004
-11.5
- 21
-11.5
-14.5
240 ms on
240 ms off
250 ms on
250 ms off
250 ms on
250 ms off
250 ms on
250 ms off
-11.5:
Silence:
-17.5:
Silence
400 ms on
350 ms off
225 ms on
525 ms off
-8 200 ms on
200 ms off
-21 250 ms on
250 ms off
-11.5:
Silence:
-17.5:
Silence
400 ms on
350 ms off
225 ms on
525 ms off
-21
-11.5
-17.5
250 ms on
250 ms off
200 ms on
200 ms off
200 ms on
200 ms off
-11.5
700 ms on
700 ms off
N/A
N/A
N/A
1004
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
1004
N/A
1004
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
South Africa
Spain
Sweden
400
425
425
-21
-11.5
-11.5
250ms on,
250ms off
200 ms on
200 ms off
200 ms on
200 ms off
200 ms on
600 ms off
250 ms on
750 ms off
N/A
N/A
N/A
Level per Tone
(dBm0) Cadence
-14 Continuous
-14 Continuous
-14 Continuous
-14
-14
-14
Continuous
Continuous
Continuous
NN40170-305
Appendix N Market profile attributes 255
Table 60 Reorder, 1 kHz (Sheet 3 of 3)
Reorder
Market profile
Tones
(Hz)
Switzerland 425
Taiwan 480+620
United Kingdom 400
1 kHz
Level per Tone
(dBm0) Cadence
-11.5
200 ms on
200 ms off
-21 300 ms on
300 ms off
-11.5:
Silence:
-17.5:
Silence
400 ms on
350 ms off
225 ms on
525 ms off
Tones
(Hz)
N/A
N/A
N/A
Level per Tone
(dBm0) Cadence
Core parameters for market profiles
The core parameters for the available market profiles are provided in the following tables:
•
Australia, Brazil, CALA, Canada, Caribbean, and Denmark parameters on page 255
•
France, Germany, Global, Holland, Hong Kong, and Ireland parameters on page 258
•
Italy, Mexico, New Zealand, North America, Norway, and Poland on page 261
•
Russia and South Africa parameters on page 264
•
PRC, Spain, Sweden, Switzerland, Taiwan, and United Kingdom parameters on page 267
Table 61 Australia, Brazil, CALA, Canada, Caribbean, and Denmark parameters (Sheet 1 of 4)
Market profile
Functionality Attribute
Access codes
Protocols
Australia Bahrain Brazil CALA Canada
Direct dial digit
9
Dest code for default route
0
Digital trunking protocols
BRI trunk protocol variants
ISDN
DASS2
DPNSS
ETSI-403
ETSI-QSIG
BRI S-loop protocol variant
PRI trunk protocol variants
ETSI-102
ETSI-403
ETSI-QSIG
MCDN
0
9
ISDN
DASS2
DPNSS
ETSI-403
ETSI-QSIG
ETSI-102
ETSI-403
ETSI-QSIG
MCDN
9
0
ISDN
DASS2
DPNSS
ETSI-403
ETSI-102
ETSI-QSIG
0
9
ISDN
DASS2
DPNSS
ETSI-403
ETSI-QSIG
ETSI-102
ETSI-403
ETSI-QSIG
MCDN
ETSI-403
ETSI-QSIG
MCDN
Global analog trunk versions
GATv1
GATv2
GATv2 GATv1
GATv2
GATv1
GATv2
0
9
ISDN
NI-2
NI-2
NI-2
DMS100
DMS250
4ESS
MCDN
GATv1
GATv2
Caribbean Denmark
0
0
ISDN
NI-2
NI-2
NI-2
DMS100
DMS250
4ESS
MCDN
GATv1
GATv2
0
9
ISDN
DASS2
DPNSS
ETSI-403
ETSI-QSIG
ETSI-102
ETSI-403
ETSI-QSIG
MCDN
N/A
BCM50 Installation and Maintenance Guide
256 Appendix N Market profile attributes
Table 61 Australia, Brazil, CALA, Canada, Caribbean, and Denmark parameters (Sheet 2 of 4)
Market profile
Functionality Attribute Australia Bahrain Brazil CALA Canada Caribbean Denmark
Telephony feature settings
System settings
Hunt groups
Service times
Conference tone supported
Held line reminder
Delay ring transfer
Transfer callback timeout
Network callback
Host delay
(ms)
Link time
(ms)
Yes
After 30 seconds
After 15 rings
After 15 rings
30
1000
N/A
No
Off
Yes
Off
Yes
Off
After 4 rings After 4 rings After 4 rings
After 4 rings After 4 rings After 4 rings
30
1000
600
30
1000
300
30
1000
600
No
Off
After 4 rings
After 4 rings
N/A
1000
600
Yes
Off
After 4 rings
After 4 rings
30
1000
600
No
Off
After 4 rings
After 4 rings
30
1000
600
Target line if busy setting
BRI ISDN
Answer
Mode
Busy
Manual
Companding law
A-law
DTI carrier type
E1
Number of rings in a cycle
M7000 set supported
2
Yes
Prime
Manual
A-law
E1
1
Yes
Prime
Manual
A-law
E1
1
Yes
Prime
Manual
A-law
E1
1
Yes
Prime
Manual mu-law
T1
1
No
Prime
Manual mu-law
T1
1
Yes
Prime
Manual
A-law
E1
1
Yes
Mode Sequential Broadcast
Default delay 4 ring cycles
Broadcast
4 ring cycles 4 ring cycles
Broadcast
4 ring cycles
Broadcast
4 ring cycles
Broadcast Broadcast
4 ring cycles 4 ring cycles
60 60 60 60 60 60 60 Queue timeout
(sec)
If busy
Night
Evening
Lunch
Busy tone Busy tone
Start 17:00
End 08:00
Start 00:00
End 00:00
Start 00:00
End 00:00
Start 23:00
End 07:00
Start 17:00
End 23:00
Start 12:00
End 13:00
Busy tone
Start 23:00
End 07:00
Start 17:00
End 23:00
Start 12:00
End 13:00
Busy tone
Start 23:00
End 07:00
Start 17:00
End 23:00
Start 12:00
End 13:00
Busy tone Busy tone
Start 23:00
End 07:00
Start 23:00
End 07:00
Start 17:00
End 23:00
Start 17:00
End 23:00
Start 12:00
End 13:00
Start 12:00
End 13:00
Busy tone
Start 23:00
End 07:00
Start 17:00
End 23:00
Start 12:00
End 13:00
NN40170-305
Appendix N Market profile attributes 257
Table 61 Australia, Brazil, CALA, Canada, Caribbean, and Denmark parameters (Sheet 3 of 4)
Market profile
Functionality Attribute
Service modes
Public DN
Public OLI
Australia Bahrain Brazil CALA Canada Caribbean Denmark
Ringing service mode
Off
Ringing service trunk ans
Yes
Restriction service mode
Off
Restriction global overrides
Restriction filter 01
000
131440
Off
Yes
Off
N/A
Off
Yes
Off
190
Off
Yes
Off
N/A
Off
Yes
Off
N/A
Off
Yes
Off
N/A
Off
Yes
Off
N/A
0(013),
1(13, 1800)
0,
1(1800,
1866,
1877,
1888),
911(911),
411, 976,
1976,
1***976,
1900,
1***900,
5551212
0,
1(1800,
1866,
1877,
1888),
911(911),
411, 976,
1976,
1***976,
1900,
1***900,
5551212
0,
1(1800,
1866,
1877,
1888),
911(911),
411, 976,
1976,
1***976,
1900,
1***900,
5551212
0,
1(1800,
1866,
1877,
1888),
911(911),
411, 976,
1976,
1***976,
1900,
1***900,
5551212
0,
1(1800,
1866,
1877, 1888),
911(911),
411, 976,
1976,
1***976,
1900,
1***900,
5551212
N/A
N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A 00, 1(13,
11, 1800)
* N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A
Restriction filter 05
Restriction filter 06
Routing service mode
Routing service overflow
Public DN lengths
Off
No
Default(7)
N/A
Off
No
Default(7),
0(11),
00(12),
01(17),
011(18),
1(11),
411(3),
911(3)
Variable
Off
No
Default(7),
0(11),
00(12),
01(17),
011(18),
1(11),
411(3),
911(3)
Variable
Off
No
Default(7),
0(11),
00(12),
01(17),
011(18),
1(11),
411(3),
911(3)
Variable
Off
No
Default(7),
0(11),
00(12),
01(17),
011(18),
1(11),
411(3),
911(3)
N/A
Off
No
Default(7),
0(11),
00(12),
01(17),
011(18),
1(11),
411(3),
911(3)
N/A
Off
No
Default(8),
00(17),
1(3), 16(5),
17(4), 18(4)
Variable Unknown number length
Local number length
National number length
8
9
Variable
Variable
Variable
Variable
Variable
Variable
7
10
7
10
Variable
Variable
BCM50 Installation and Maintenance Guide
258 Appendix N Market profile attributes
Table 61 Australia, Brazil, CALA, Canada, Caribbean, and Denmark parameters (Sheet 4 of 4)
Market profile
Functionality Attribute Australia Bahrain Brazil CALA Canada Caribbean Denmark
Set capabilities
Handsfree Auto
Pickup group 1
Allow redirect
Enabled
Auto
None
Disabled
Auto
None
Disabled
Auto
None
Disabled
Auto
None
Disabled
Auto
None
Disabled
Auto
None
Disabled
Call forward delay
Disabled (4) Disabled (4) Disabled (4) Disabled (4) Disabled
(4)
Disabled (4) Disabled (4)
Note: The field for number of rings is hidden in default mode (disabled). When you enter a value for call forward delay, the field for number of rings becomes visible with the given default value.
Dial tone detection
Set preferences
ONN blocking
Language
(first is default)
Enabled Enabled
UK English English
French
Spanish
Turkish
None Analog VSC
(tone)
1831
Analog VSC
(pulse)
1831 None
Enabled
Portuguese
English
Spanish
Enabled
Spanish
English
French
None
None
None
None
Enabled
English
French
Spanish
None
None
Enabled
English
French
Spanish
None
None
Enabled
Danish
English
Norwegian
Swedish
None
None
BRI VSC None
BRI per loop SuprsBit
Release reason Release text Simple
Release code
On
None
SuprsBit
Simple
On
None
SuprsBit
Simple
On
None
SuprsBit
None
Off
None
SuprsBit
None
Off
None
SuprsBit
None
Off
None
SuprsBit
Simple
On
DTMF parameters
Tone duration (ms)
Pause time
(ms)
3.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5
Interdigit time (ms)
100 80 80 80 80 80 80
Table 62 France, Germany, Global, Holland, Hong Kong, and Ireland parameters (Sheet 1 of 4)
Market profile
Functionality
Access codes
Attribute
Direct dial digit
Dest code for default route
France
9
0
Germany Global
9
0
0
9
Holland
0
9
0
9
Hong
Kong Ireland
9
0
NN40170-305
Appendix N Market profile attributes 259
Table 62 France, Germany, Global, Holland, Hong Kong, and Ireland parameters (Sheet 2 of 4)
Market profile
Functionality Attribute France
Digital trunking protocols
ISDN
DASS2
DPNSS
BRI trunk protocol variants
ETSI-403
ETSI-QSIG
Germany Global
ISDN
DASS2
DPNSS
ETSI-403
ETSI-QSIG
ISDN
DASS2
DPNSS
ETSI-403
ETSI-QSIG
Holland
ISDN
DASS2
DPNSS
ETSI-403
ETSI-QSIG
Hong
Kong
ISDN
DASS2
DPNSS
HKTA2015
Ireland
ISDN
DASS2
DPNSS
ETSI-403
ETSI-QSIG Protocols
Held line reminder Off Off Off Off Off Immediate
Delay ring transfer After 4 rings After 4 rings After 4 rings After 4 rings After 4 rings After 4 rings
Telephony feature settings
Transfer callback timeout
After 4 rings
Network callback 30
After 4 rings
30
After 4 rings
30
After 4 rings
30
After 4 rings
N/A
After 4 rings
30
Host delay (ms)
Link time (ms)
1000
N/A
Target line if busy setting
PBX > Busy
DID > Prime
BRI ISDN Answer
Mode
Manual
1000
N/A
PBX > Busy
DID > Prime
Manual
1000
600
Prime
Manual
1000
600
Prime
Manual
1000
600
Prime
Manual
1000
N/A
PBX > Busy
DID > Prime
Auto
System settings
BRI S-loop protocol variant
ETSI-102
PRI trunk protocol variants
ETSI-403
ETSI-QSIG
MCDN
N/A Global analog trunk versions
Conference tone supported
No
Companding law
DTI carrier type
A-law
E1
Number of rings in a cycle
2
M7000 set supported
Yes
ETSI-102
ETSI-403
ETSI-QSIG
MCDN
N/A
Yes
A-law
E1
2
Yes
ETSI-102
ETSI-403
ETSI-QSIG
MCDN
GATv1
GATv2
No
A-law
E1
1
Yes
ETSI-102
ETSI-403
ETSI-QSIG
MCDN
N/A
No
A-law
E1
1
Yes
ETSI-102
HkTA2015
MCDN
GATv1
GATv2
No mu-law
T1
1
No
ETSI-102
+ BTNR191
ETSI-403
ETSI-QSIG
MCDN
GATv1
GATv2
Yes
A-law
E1
2
Yes
Hunt groups
Mode
Default delay
Queue timeout
(sec)
If busy
Night
Sequential Sequential Broadcast Broadcast Broadcast Sequential
4 ring cycles 4 ring cycles 4 ring cycles 4 ring cycles 4 ring cycles 4 ring cycles
60 60 60 60 60 60
Service times
Evening
Lunch
Busy tone
Start 23:00
End 07:00
Start 17:00
End 23:00
Start 12:00
End 13:00
Busy tone
Start 23:00
End 07:00
Start 17:00
End 23:00
Start 12:00
End 13:00
Busy tone
Start 23:00
End 07:00
Start 17:00
End 23:00
Start 12:00
End 13:00
Busy tone
Start 23:00
End 07:00
Start 17:00
End 23:00
Start 12:00
End 13:00
Busy tone
Start 23:00
End 07:00
Start 17:00
End 23:00
Start 12:00
End 13:00
Busy tone
Start 23:00
End 07:00
Start 17:00
End 23:00
Start 12:00
End 13:00
BCM50 Installation and Maintenance Guide
260 Appendix N Market profile attributes
Table 62 France, Germany, Global, Holland, Hong Kong, and Ireland parameters (Sheet 3 of 4)
Market profile
Functionality Attribute France Germany Global Holland
Hong
Kong Ireland
Ringing service mode
Ringing service trunk ans
Manual
Yes
Restriction service mode
Restriction global overrides
Off
N/A
Restriction filter
01
N/A
Manual
Yes
Off
N/A
Off
Yes
Off
N/A
Off
Yes
Off
N/A
Off
Yes
Off
N/A
Manual
Yes
Off
N/A
Service modes
N/A 0,
1(1800,
1866,
1877, 1888),
911(911),
411, 976,
1976,
1***976,
1900,
1***900,
5551212
N/A
N/A N/A
00***, 170,
172, 173,
1747, 1760,
1761, 1766,
1770, 1771,
1772, 1775,
1778, 1783,
1788, 900
0(0800), 1
Restriction filter
05
Restriction filter
06
Routing service mode
N/A
N/A
Off
Routing service overflow
No
Public DN lengths Default(25)
N/A
N/A
Off
No
N/A
Off
No
N/A
Off
No
N/A
N/A
Off
No
010, 1, 00
*
Off
No
Public DN Default(25) Default(7),
0(11),
00(12),
01(17),
011(18),
1(11),
411(3),
911(3)
Variable
Default(7) Default(7),
0(11),
00(12),
01(17),
011(18),
1(11),
411(3),
911(3)
Variable
Default(8),
0(11) 00(17),
1(3), 118(6),
9(3)
Public OLI
Set capabilities
Unknown number length
Variable
Local number length
Variable
Variable National number length
Handsfree
Pickup group
Allow redirect
Auto
None
Disabled
Variable
Variable
Variable
Auto
None
Disabled
Variable
Variable
Auto
None
Disabled
Variable
Variable
Variable
Auto
None
Disabled
Variable
Variable
Auto
None
Disabled
Variable
Variable
Variable
None
None
Disabled
Call forward delay Disabled (4) Disabled (4) Disabled (4) Disabled (4) Disabled (4) Disabled (4)
Note: The field for number of rings is hidden in default mode (disabled). When you enter a value for call forward delay, the field for number of rings becomes visible with the given default value.
Dial tone detection
Set preferences Language
(first is default)
Enabled
EuroFrench
English
Enabled
German
English
Enabled
English
French
Spanish
Turkish
Enabled
Dutch
English
EuroFrench
Enabled
English
French
Spanish
Enabled
UK English
NN40170-305
Appendix N Market profile attributes 261
Table 62 France, Germany, Global, Holland, Hong Kong, and Ireland parameters (Sheet 4 of 4)
Market profile
Functionality Attribute France Germany Global Holland
Hong
Kong Ireland
ONN blocking
Release reason
Analog VSC
(tone)
Analog VSC
(pulse)
BRI VSC
BRI per loop
Release text
Release code
None
None
None
SuprsBit
Simple
On
None
None
None
SuprsBit
Detailed
Off
None
None
None
SuprsBit
Simple
On
None
None
None
SuprsBit
Simple
On
None
None
None
SuprsBit
None
Off
141
141
141
SrvcCode
Detailed
Off
DTMF parameters
Tone duration
(ms)
120 120 120 120 120 120
Pause time (ms) 3.5 3.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 3.5
Interdigit time
(ms)
100 100 80 80 80 100
Table 63 Italy, Mexico, New Zealand, North America, Norway, and Poland (Sheet 1 of 4)
Functionality
Access codes
Protocols
Market profile
Attribute Italy
Direct dial digit 9
Dest code for default route
0
Digital trunking protocols
BRI trunk protocol variants
ISDN
DASS2
DPNSS
ETSI-102
ETSI-QSIG
BRI S-loop protocol variant
ETSI-102
PRI trunk protocol variants
ETSI-102
ETSI-QSIG
MCDN
Mexico
0
9
ISDN
DASS2
DPNSS
ETSI-403
ETSI-QSIG
ETSI-102
ETSI-403
ETSI-QSIG
MCDN
0
0
New
Zealand
Global analog trunk versions
N/A GATv1
GATv2
0
9
North
America
ISDN
DASS2
DPNSS
ETSI-403
ETSI-QSIG
ETSI-102
+ BTNR191
ETSI-403
ETSI-QSIG
MCDN
N/A
ISDN
NI-2
NI-2
NI-2
DMS100
DMS250
4ESS
MCDN
GATv1
GATv2
N/A
Norway
9
0
Poland
0
9
ISDN
DASS2
DPNSS
ETSI-403
ETSI-QSIG
ETSI-102
ISDN
DASS2
DPNSS
ETSI-403
ETSI-QSIG
ETSI-102
ETSI-403
ETSI-QSIG
MCDN
ETSI-403
ETSI-QSIG
MCDN
GATv1
GATv2
BCM50 Installation and Maintenance Guide
262 Appendix N Market profile attributes
Table 63 Italy, Mexico, New Zealand, North America, Norway, and Poland (Sheet 2 of 4)
Market profile
Functionality Attribute Italy Mexico
New
Zealand
North
America Norway Poland
Conference tone supported
Yes
Held line reminder Off
No Yes No No Yes
Telephony feature settings
Off Immediate Off Off After 30 seconds
Delay ring transfer After 4 rings After 4 rings After 4 rings After 4 rings After 4 rings After 15 rings
Transfer callback timeout
After 4 rings After 4 rings After 4 rings After 4 rings After 4 rings After 15 rings
System settings
Hunt groups
Service times
Network callback
Host delay (ms)
Link time (ms)
Target line if busy setting
30
1000
N/A
PBX > Busy
DID > Prime
30
1000
600
Prime
30
1000
N/A
PBX > Busy
DID > Prime
Auto
N/A
1000
600
Prime
30
1000
N/A
PBX > Busy
DID > Prime
Auto
30
1000
N/A
Busy
BRI ISDN Answer
Mode
Manual
Companding law A-law
DTI carrier type E1
Number of rings in a cycle
2
Yes M7000 set supported
Mode
Default delay
Queue timeout
(sec)
If busy
Night
Evening
Lunch
Sequential
A-law
E1
1
A-law
E1
2 mu-law
T1
1
A-law
E1
2
A-law
E1
2
4 ring cycles 4 ring cycles 4 ring cycles 4 ring cycles 4 ring cycles 4 ring cycles
60 60 60 60 60 60
Busy tone
Start 23:00
End 07:00
Start 17:00
End 23:00
Start 12:00
End 13:00
Manual
Yes
Broadcast
Busy tone
Start 23:00
End 07:00
Start 17:00
End 23:00
Start 12:00
End 13:00
Yes
Sequential
Busy tone
Start 23:00
End 07:00
Start 17:00
End 23:00
Start 12:00
End 13:00
Manual
No
Broadcast
Busy tone
Start 23:00
End 07:00
Start 17:00
End 23:00
Start 12:00
End 13:00
Yes
Sequential
Busy tone
Start 23:00
End 07:00
Start 17:00
End 23:00
Start 12:00
End 13:00
Manual
Yes
Sequential
Busy tone
Start 23:00
End 08:00
Start 00:00
End 00:00
Start 00:00
End 00:00
NN40170-305
Appendix N Market profile attributes 263
Table 63 Italy, Mexico, New Zealand, North America, Norway, and Poland (Sheet 3 of 4)
Market profile
Functionality Attribute Italy Mexico
New
Zealand
North
America Norway Poland
Service modes
Public DN
Public OLI
Ringing service mode
Ringing service trunk ans
Restriction service mode
Restriction global overrides
Restriction filter
01
Manual
Yes
Off
N/A
N/A
Off
Yes
Off
N/A 999
112
0,
1(1800,
1866,
1877, 1888),
911(911),
411, 976,
1976,
1***976,
1900,
1***900,
5551212
0(0800), 1
N/A 010, 1, 00 Restriction filter
05
Restriction filter
06
Routing service mode
N/A
N/A
Off
N/A
Off
Routing service overflow
No No
Public DN lengths Default(25) Default(7),
0(11),
00(12),
01(17),
011(18),
1(11),
411(3),
911(3)
Variable Unknown number length
Variable
Local number length
Variable Variable
Manual
Yes
Off
*
Off
No
Default(8),
0(11) 00(17),
1(3), 118(6),
9(3)
Variable
Variable
Off
Yes
Off
N/A
0,
1(1800,
1866,
1877, 1888),
911(911),
411, 976,
1976,
1***976,
1900,
1***900,
5551212
N/A
N/A
Off
No
Default(7),
0(11),
00(12),
01(17),
011(18),
1(11),
411(3),
911(3)
N/A
7
Manual
Yes
Off
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
Off
No
Default(25)
Variable
Variable
Off
Yes
Off
112
990
N/A
N/A
N/A
Off
No
Default(7)
Variable
Variable
Set capabilities
National number length
Handsfree
Pickup group
Allow redirect
Variable
Auto
None
Disabled
Variable
Auto
None
Disabled
Variable
None
None
Disabled
10
Auto
None
Disabled
Variable
Auto
None
Disabled
Variable
Auto
0
Disabled
Call forward delay Disabled (4) Disabled (4) Disabled (4) Disabled (4) Disabled (4) Disabled (4)
Note: The field for number of rings is hidden in default mode (disabled). When you enter a value for call forward delay, the field for number of rings becomes visible with the given default value.
Dial tone detection
Set preferences Language
(first is default)
Enabled
Italian
English
Enabled
English
French
Spanish
Turkish
Enabled
UKEnglish
Enabled
English
French
Spanish
Enabled
Norwegian
English
Swedish
Danish
Enabled
Polish
EuroFrench
English
Czech
BCM50 Installation and Maintenance Guide
264 Appendix N Market profile attributes
Table 63 Italy, Mexico, New Zealand, North America, Norway, and Poland (Sheet 4 of 4)
Market profile
Functionality Attribute Italy Mexico
New
Zealand
North
America Norway Poland
ONN blocking
Release reason
DTMF parameters
Analog VSC
(tone)
Analog VSC
(pulse)
BRI VSC
BRI per loop
Release text
Release code
None
None
None
SuprsBit
Simple
On
None
None
None
SuprsBit
Simple
On
141
141
141
SrvcCode
Detailed
Off
None
None
None
SuprsBit
None
Off
None
None
None
SuprsBit
Simple
On
1831
1831
None
SuprsBit
Simple
On
Tone duration
(ms)
120 120 120 120 120 110
Pause 3.5 1.5 3.5 1.5 3.5 1.5
Interdigit time
(ms)
100 80 100 80 100 80
Table 64 Russia and South Africa parameters (Sheet 1 of 4)
Functionality Attribute
Access codes
Protocols
Russia
Direct dial digit 0
Dest code for default route
9
Digital trunking protocols
BRI trunk protocol variants
ISDN
DASS2
DPNSS
ETSI-403
ETSI-QSIG
BRI S-loop protocol variant
ETSI-102
PRI trunk protocol variants
ETSI-403
ETSI-QSIG
MCDN
Global analog trunk versions
GATv2
Market profile
South Africa
9
0
ISDN
DASS2
DPNSS
ETSI-403
ETSI-QSIG
ETSI-102
ETSI-403
ETSI-QSIG
MCDN
GATv2
NN40170-305
Table 64 Russia and South Africa parameters (Sheet 2 of 4)
Functionality Attribute Russia
Conference tone supported
No
Held line reminder Off
Delay ring transfer After 4 rings
Telephony feature settings
Transfer callback timeout
After 4 rings
Network callback 30
System settings
Hunt groups
Service times
Host delay (ms)
Link time (ms)
1000
600
Target line if busy setting
Prime
BRI ISDN Answer
Mode
Manual
Companding law A-law
DTI carrier type E1
Number of rings in a cycle
1
M7000 set supported
Yes
Mode
Default delay
Queue timeout
If busy
Night
Evening
Lunch
Broadcast
4 rings
60 sec
Busy tone
Start 23:00
End 07:00
Start 17:00
End 23:00
Start 12:00
End 13:00
Market profile
South Africa
Yes
After 30 s
After 15 rings
After 15 rings
30
1000
N/A
Busy
Auto
A-law
E1
2
Yes
Sequential
4 rings
60 sec
Busy tone
Start 17:00
End 08:00
Start 00:00
End 00:00
Start 00:00
End 00:00
Appendix N Market profile attributes 265
BCM50 Installation and Maintenance Guide
266 Appendix N Market profile attributes
Table 64 Russia and South Africa parameters (Sheet 3 of 4)
Market profile
Functionality Attribute Russia South Africa
Service modes
Public DN
Public OLI
Ringing service mode
Off
Ringing service trunk ans
Yes
Restriction service mode
Off
Off
Yes
Off
Restriction global overrides
N/A 000
131440
Restriction filter 01 0,
1(1800, 1866,
1877, 1888),
911(911), 411,
976, 1976,
1***976, 1900,
1***900, 5551212
0(013),
1(13,1800)
Restriction filter 05 N/A
Restriction filter 06 N/A
Routing service mode
Routing service overflow
Off
No
00,
1
(13,11,1800)
*
Off
No
Default (7) Public DN lengths Default(7), 0(11),
00(12), 01(17),
011(18), 1(11),
411(3), 911(3)
Unknown number length
Variable
Local number length
National number length
Variable
Variable
N/A
8
9
Set capabilities
Handsfree
Pickup group
Auto
None
Allow redirect Disabled
Call forward delay Enabled
Auto
1
Enabled
Enabled
Note: The field for number of rings is hidden in default mode (disabled). When you enter a value for call forward delay, the field for number of rings becomes visible with the given default value.
Dial tone detection Enabled
Set preferences Language
(first is default)
Enabled
English
French
Spanish
Turkish
UIKEnglish
NN40170-305
Appendix N Market profile attributes 267
Table 64 Russia and South Africa parameters (Sheet 4 of 4)
Market profile
Functionality Attribute Russia South Africa
ONN blocking
Analog VSC
(tone)
Analog VSC
(pulse)
BRI VSC
BRI per loop
Release text
None
None
None
SuprsBit
Simple
1831
1831
None
SuprsBit
Simple Release reason
DTMF parameters
Release code
Tone duration
(ms)
On
Pause time (ms) 1.5
Interdigit time (ms) 80
On
120 80
3.5
100
Table 65 PRC, Spain, Sweden, Switzerland, Taiwan, and United Kingdom parameters (Sheet 1 of 4)
Market profile
Functionality Attribute
Access codes
Protocols
PRC
Direct dial digit 0
Dest code for default route
9
Digital trunking protocols
ISDN
DASS2
DPNSS
BRI trunk protocol variants
ETSI-403
ETSI-QSIG
BRI S-loop protocol variant
ETSI-102
PRI trunk protocol variants
Global analog trunk versions
ETSI-403
ETSI-QSIG
MCDN
GATv1
GATv2
Spain
9
0
ISDN
DASS2
DPNSS
ETSI-403
ETSI-QSIG
ETSI-102
Sweden
0
0
ISDN
DASS2
DPNSS
ETSI-403
ETSI-QSIG
ETSI-102
Switzerland Taiwan
9
0
ISDN
DASS2
DPNSS
ETSI-403
ETSI-QSIG
ETSI-102
ETSI-403
ETSI-QSIG
MCDN
N/A
ETSI-403
ETSI-QSIG
MCDN
N/A
ETSI-403
ETSI-QSIG
MCDN
N/A
0
9
ISDN
DASS2
DPNSS
ITU-T
ETSI-102
ITU-T
MCDN
GATv1
GATv2
0
0
United
Kingdom
ISDN
DASS2
DPNSS
ETSI-403
ETSI-QSIG
ETSI-102
+ BTNR191
ETSI-403
ETSI-QSIG
MCDN
GATv1
GATv2
BCM50 Installation and Maintenance Guide
268 Appendix N Market profile attributes
Table 65 PRC, Spain, Sweden, Switzerland, Taiwan, and United Kingdom parameters (Sheet 2 of 4)
Market profile
Functionality Attribute
Telephony feature settings
System settings
Hunt groups
Service times
PRC Spain Sweden Switzerland Taiwan
United
Kingdom
Conference tone supported
Held line reminder
No
Off
No
Off
No
Off
No
Off
No
Off
Yes
Immediate
Delay ring transfer
Transfer callback timeout
After 4 rings After 4 rings After 4 rings After 4 rings After 4 rings After 4 rings
After 4 rings After 4 rings After 4 rings After 4 rings After 4 rings After 4 rings
Network callback 30
Host delay (ms) 1000
Link time (ms)
Target line if busy setting
600
Prime
30
1000
N/A
PBX > Busy
DID > Prime
30
1000
600
Prime
30
1000
N/A
PBX > Busy
DID > Prime
N/A
1000
600
Prime
30
1000
N/A
PBX > Busy
DID > Prime
BRI ISDN Answer
Mode
Manual
Companding law A-law
DTI carrier type
Number of rings in a cycle
M7000 set supported
Mode
E1
1
Yes
Default delay
Queue timeout
If busy
Night
Evening
Lunch
Auto
A-law
E1
2
Yes
Manual
A-law
E1
1
Yes
Auto
A-law
E1
2
Yes
Manual mu-law
T1
1
Yes
Auto
A-law
E1
2
Yes
Broadcast Sequential Broadcast Sequential Broadcast Sequential
4 ring cycles 4 ring cycles 4 ring cycles 4 ring cycles 4 ring cycles 4 ring cycles
60 sec 60 sec 60 sec 60 sec 60 sec 60 sec
Busy tone
Start 23:00
End 07:00
Start 17:00
End 23:00
Start 12:00
End 13:00
Busy tone
Start 23:00
End 07:00
Start 17:00
End 23:00
Start 12:00
End 13:00
Busy tone
Start 23:00
End 07:00
Start 17:00
End 23:00
Start 12:00
End 13:00
Busy tone
Start 23:00
End 07:00
Start 17:00
End 23:00
Start 12:00
End 13:00
Busy tone
Start 23:00
End 07:00
Start 17:00
End 23:00
Start 12:00
End 13:00
Busy tone
Start 23:00
End 07:00
Start 17:00
End 23:00
Start 12:00
End 13:00
NN40170-305
Appendix N Market profile attributes 269
Table 65 PRC, Spain, Sweden, Switzerland, Taiwan, and United Kingdom parameters (Sheet 3 of 4)
Market profile
Functionality Attribute PRC Spain Sweden Switzerland Taiwan
United
Kingdom
Service modes
Ringing service mode
Ringing service trunk ans
Restriction filter
01
Off
Yes
Restriction service mode
Off
Restriction global overrides
N/A
Manual
Yes
Off
N/A
0, 1(1800,
1866,
1877, 1888),
911(911),
411, 976,
1976,
1***976,
1900,
1***900,
5551212
N/A
N/A
N/A Restriction filter
05
Restriction filter
06
Routing service mode
N/A
Off
N/A
Off
Off
Yes
Off
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
Off
Manual
Yes
Off
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
Off
Off
Yes
Off
N/A 999
112
0, 1(1800,
1866,
1877, 1888),
911(911),
411, 976,
1976,
1***976,
1900,
1***900,
5551212
N/A
0(0800), 1
010, 1, 00
N/A
Off
Manual
Yes
Off
*
Off
Public DN
Routing service overflow
No
Public DN lengths Default(7),
0(11), 00(12),
01(17),
011(18),
1(11), 411(3),
911(3)
No
Default(25)
No No
Default(11),
00(17),
01(10),
02(10),
020(9),
0200(10),
02000(7),
020000(10),
0201(10),
02010(9),
07(10),
071(11),
0718(10),
072(11),
077(11),
09(11), 1(3)
Variable
Default(25)
Variable
No
Default(7),
0(11), 00(12),
01(17),
011(18),
1(11), 411(3),
911(3)
No
Default(8),
0(11) 00(17),
1(3), 118(6),
9(3)
Public OLI
Set capabilities
Unknown number length
Variable
Local number length
Variable
Variable National number length
Handsfree
Pickup group
Allow redirect
Auto
None
Disabled
Variable
Variable
Variable
Auto
None
Disabled
Variable
Variable
Auto
None
Disabled
Variable
Variable
Auto
None
Disabled
Variable
Variable
Variable
Auto
None
Disabled
Variable
Variable
Variable
None
None
Disabled
Call forward delay Disabled (4) Disabled (4) Disabled (4) Disabled (4) Disabled (4) Disabled (4)
Note: The field for number of rings is hidden in default mode (disabled). When you enter a value for call forward delay, the field for number of rings becomes visible with the given default value.
BCM50 Installation and Maintenance Guide
270 Appendix N Market profile attributes
Table 65 PRC, Spain, Sweden, Switzerland, Taiwan, and United Kingdom parameters (Sheet 4 of 4)
Market profile
Functionality Attribute PRC Spain Sweden Switzerland Taiwan
United
Kingdom
Dial tone detection
Set preferences Language
(first is default)
Enabled
English
French
Spanish
Turkish
None
Enabled
EuroSpanish
English
Portuguese
Enabled
Swedish
English
Norwegian
Danish
None None
Enabled
German
English
EuroFrench
Italian
None
Enabled
English
French
Spanish
Enabled
UKEnglish
ONN blocking
Release reason
DTMF parameters
Analog VSC
(tone)
Analog VSC
(pulse)
BRI VSC
BRI per loop
Release text
Release code
None
None
SuprsBit
Simple
On
None
None
SuprsBit
Simple
On
None
None
SuprsBit
Simple
On
None
None
SuprsBit
Simple
On
None
None
None
SuprsBit
Simple
On
141
141
141
SrvcCode
Detailed
Off
Tone duration
(ms)
120 120 120 120 120 120
Pause time (ms) 1.5 3.5 1.5 3.5 1.5 3.5
Interdigit time
(ms)
Analog Trunk parameters
The table
Localization, PSTN standards, and pulse dialing parameters on page 271 contains
information for the onboard GATI interface, the G4x16/G8x16 MBM (NT5B42AAABE5/
NT5B42AAACE5), the new GATM4/8 MBM (NT5B44BAABE5/NT5B44AAABE5), and the legacy GATM4/8 MBM (NT5B44BAAA/NT5B44AAAA) in a BCM50R3 system. Differences between the interfaces are noted in this table. The 4x16 (NT5B42AAAA) and CTM4/8 MBMs are not covered in this table.
Global analog trunks are not supported in the following market profiles: Denmark, France,
Germany, Holland, Italy, Norway, Spain, Sweden, and Switzerland.
The analog trunk parameters are provided in the following tables:
•
Localization, PSTN standards, and pulse dialing parameters on page 271
•
Transmission parameters on page 273
•
Call supervision parameters on page 274
•
On-hook caller ID, disconnect supervision, and message waiting parameters on page 275
NN40170-305
Appendix N Market profile attributes 271
Table 66 Localization, PSTN standards, and pulse dialing parameters (Sheet 1 of 3)
Market profile Localized
Differences between GATI,
G4x16/G8x16, New
GATM4/8, and
Legacy GATM4/8
PSTN Standards, Specifications
Referenced Pulse Dialing (ms)
Break time
Make time
Interdigit time
Australia
Bahrain
Brazil
CALA
Yes
Yes
Yes
None [1] AS/ACIF S003:2005 (2nd Edition)
— Customer Access Equipment for
Connection to a Telecommunications
Network
[2] AS/ACIF S002:2001 — Analogue interworking and non-interference requirements for Customer Equipment for connection to the Public Switched
Telephone Network
66
Legacy GATM4/8 NOT supported (will not function)
[1] Bahrain PSTN Specification
[2] Si3050 Global Voice/Data Direct
Access Arrangement Specification
[3] AN84 Digital Hybrid with the Si305X
DAAS Specification
[4] ETSI ETS 300 659-1 Public
Switched Telephone Network (PSTN),
Subscriber line protocol over the local loop for display (and related) services.
Part 1: On hook data transmission.
25
DTMF CLID NOT supported on GATI or
Legacy GATM4/8
None
[1] Identification of the Calling Party for
SPC With DTMF, 220-250-713.
[2] Si3050 Global Voice/Data Direct
Access Arrangement Specification.
66
N/A 60
34
17
34
40
860
700
800
700
Canada
Caribbean
Global
Hong Kong
No
(North
American based
A-law)
Yes
Yes
No (North
American based
A-Law)
Yes
None
None
None
N/A
N/A
N/A
60
60
60
40
40
40
33
700
700
700
600 Line Reversal NOT supported on Legacy
GATM4/8
[1] General Technical Characteristics of Fixed Telecommunications Networks in Hong Kong, HKTA 2201, Issue 4,
April 2003.
[2] Network Connection Specification for Connection of Customer Premises
Equipment (CPE) to Direct-Dial-In
(DDI) Line of the Public Switched
Telephone Network (PSTN) in Hong
Kong, HKTA 2013, Issue 3, February
2003.
[3] Si3050 Global Voice/Data Direct
Access Arrangement Specification.
[4] AN84 Digital Hybrid with the Si305X
DAAS Specification.
66
BCM50 Installation and Maintenance Guide
272 Appendix N Market profile attributes
Table 66 Localization, PSTN standards, and pulse dialing parameters (Sheet 2 of 3)
Market profile Localized
Differences between GATI,
G4x16/G8x16, New
GATM4/8, and
Legacy GATM4/8
PSTN Standards, Specifications
Referenced Pulse Dialing (ms)
Break time
Make time
Interdigit time
Ireland 34 1000
Mexico
New Zealand
North America
Poland
PRC
Yes
Yes
No
(UK-based telephony with
Australian tones)
Yes
Yes
Yes
Legacy GATM4/8 NOT supported (will not function)
[1] Eircom PSTN Interface
Specification, Eircom document reference R452 NPD00, Revision: 1.1,
21/7/2000
[2] Si3050 Global Voice/Data Direct
Access Arrangement Specification.
[3] ETSI ETS 300 659-1 Public
Switched Telephone Network (PSTN),
Subscriber line protocol over the local loop for display (and related) services.
Part 1: On hook data transmission.
66
None
None
[1] Mexico general Specification, June
9, 1993
60
[1] PABX External Port
Interface Requirements PTC 107: 1989
ISSUE 1.
[2] Specification PTC 200
Requirements for Connection of
Customer Equipment to Analogue
Lines.
[3] PTC220 Requirements for Private
Voice Networks connected to the
PSTN/ISDN DRAFT FOR COMMENT
12 February 2003.
[4] The document “TNA 102: June
1996".
[5] The document “TNA102 -
Amendment to Section 10 and new
Section 12.pdf”.
66
None
None
[1] TIA/EIA-716: Telecommunications
Telephone Terminal Equipment – Type
1 Caller Identity Equipment
Performance Requirements.
[2] AN84 – Digital Hybrid with the
Si3050 DAA.
[3] si3050.pdf
60
[1] Polish ASS_1_v1.doc
[2] ITU-T Telecommunication
Standardization Sector of ITU
Supplement2 Series E 01/94
66
DTMF CLID NOT supported on GATI or
Legacy GATM4/8
[1] Feature Description and Detailed
Design Description documents of the existing GATI firmware
[2] AN84 Digital Hybrid with the Si305x
DAAs.pdf
[3] si3050.pdf
[4] Chapter-8-done.doc
[5] PRC Fixed Telephone Network
Caller Identity Delivery
(YDT1277.1-2003).doc
[6] PRC Ringing and Tone for
Telephone Automatic Switching
Network (GB3380-82).doc
34
40
34
40
33
66
700
740
700
700
700
NN40170-305
Appendix N Market profile attributes 273
Table 66 Localization, PSTN standards, and pulse dialing parameters (Sheet 3 of 3)
Market profile Localized
Differences between GATI,
G4x16/G8x16, New
GATM4/8, and
Legacy GATM4/8
PSTN Standards, Specifications
Referenced Pulse Dialing (ms)
Break time
Make time
Interdigit time
Russia Yes 67 60
South Africa
Spain
Taiwan
Yes
Yes
Yes
United Kingdom Yes
Legacy GATM4/8 not supported
Legacy GATM4/8 not supported
Legacy GATM4/8 not supported
None
None
[1] OGSTFS – Russian PSTN specs
[2] si3050.pdf
[3]AN84 Digital Hybrid with the Si305x
DAAs.pdf
60
[1]S_Africa_Specs.pdf
[2]ICASA TE-010.doc
[3] si3050.pdf
[4]AN84 Digital Hybrid with the Si305x
DAAs.pdf
40
[1]M1_Analogue_Trunk_Card_Spain.p
df
[2]Public Switched Telephone Network
Analogue Line interface specification
“Interfaz_de_telefonica_de_Espa_a-v5
_Eng.doc”
[3] si3050.pdf
[4]AN84 Digital Hybrid with the Si305x
DAAs.pdf
600
[1] Technical Specifications for
Terminal Equipment for Connection to
Public Switched Telephone Network,
PSTN01, September 27, 2001
[1] BT Public Switched Telephone
Network (PSTN): SIN352
[2] BT Public Switched Telephone
Network (PSTN): SIN227
+AC7
[3] BT Public Switched Telephone
Network (PSTN): SIN242
[4] AN84 – Digital Hybrid with the
Si3050 DAA
[5] Si3050/Si3019 Global Voice/Data
Direct Access Arrangement
66
66
33
950
33
34
40
200
800
740
Table 67 Transmission parameters (Sheet 1 of 2)
Transmission
Market profile
Australia
Bahrain
Brazil
CALA
Canada
Caribbean
Global
PCM coding scheme
A-law
A-law
A-law
A-law mu-law mu-law
A-law
AC impedance
220
Ω
+ (820
Ω
||
120 nF)
900
Ω
+ 2.16 uF
600
Ω
/900
Ω
600
Ω
600
Ω
600
Ω
600
Ω
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Loop length adjustment capability
No
Tx CO gain
(short, medium, long)
(N/A, 0, N/A)
Rx CO gain
(short, medium, long)
(N/A, 6 dB, N/A)
(0, 3 dB, 3 dB)
(-3 dB, 0, 0)
(-3 dB, 0, 0)
(-3 dB, 0, 0)
(-3 dB, 0, 0)
(0, 3 dB, 3 dB)
(3, 3 dB, 6 dB)
(0, 0, 3 dB)
(0, 0, 3 dB)
(0, 0, 3 dB)
(0, 0, 3 dB)
(3 dB, 3 dB, 6 dB)
BCM50 Installation and Maintenance Guide
274 Appendix N Market profile attributes
Table 67 Transmission parameters (Sheet 2 of 2)
Market profile
Hong Kong
Ireland
Mexico
New Zealand
North America
Poland
PRC
Russia
South Africa
Spain
Taiwan
United Kingdom
Transmission
PCM coding scheme mu-law
A-law
A-law
A-law mu-law
A-law
A-law
A-law
A-law
A-law u-law
A-law
Loop length adjustment capability AC impedance
600
Ω
270
(750
Ω
+
||150 nF)
600
Ω
320
Ω
+ (1050
Ω
||
230 nF)
600
Ω
600
Ω
600
Ω
600
Ω
220
Ω
+ (820
Ω
|| 115 nF)
270
Ω
+ (750
Ω nF)
|| 150
600
Ω
320
Ω
+ (1050
Ω
||
230 nF)
No
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
No
No
Yes
No
Tx CO gain
(short, medium, long)
Rx CO gain
(short, medium, long)
(N/A, 0, N/A)
(0, 3 dB, 3 dB)
(N/A, 6 dB, N/A)
(3 dB, 3 dB, 6 dB)
(0, 3 dB, 3 dB)
(N/A, 3 dB, N/A)
(-3 dB, 0, 0)
(N/A, 3 dB, N/A)
(-3 dB, 0, 0)
(-3 dB, 0, 0)
(N/A, 3 dB, N/A)
(3 dB, 3 dB, 6 dB)
(N/A, 3 dB, N/A)
(0, 0, 3 dB)
(N/A, 3 dB, N/A)
(0, 0, 3 dB)
(0, 0, 3 dB)
(N/A, 3 dB, N/A)
Market profile
Australia
Bahrain
Brazil
CALA
Canada
Caribbean
Global
Hong Kong
Ireland
Mexico
New Zealand
North America
Poland
PRC
Russia
Table 68 Call supervision parameters (Sheet 1 of 2)
Call supervision
Link/flash time
(ms) OSI time (ms)
600
500
600
100
500
150
600
90
100
600
300
600
600
600
600
100
500
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
Force on-hook time (ms)
1000
2000
1600
1600
1600
1800
1600
400
1600
1600
2000
1500
1600
1600
1500
Wetting time
(ms)
N/A
N/A
N/A
0
N/A
N/A
N/A
15
0
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
Ring confirmation count (ms)
256
256
256
256
256
200
256
200
150
256
256
256
256
256
256
NN40170-305
Appendix N Market profile attributes 275
Table 68 Call supervision parameters (Sheet 2 of 2)
Call supervision
Market profile
South Africa
Spain
Taiwan
United Kingdom
Link/flash time
(ms) OSI time (ms)
100
120
600
90
100
100
100
100
Force on-hook time (ms)
1600
1600
1600
1600
Wetting time
(ms)
0
0
0
15
Ring confirmation count (ms)
256
256
256
200
Table 69 On-hook caller ID, disconnect supervision, and message waiting parameters (Sheet 1 of 2)
Market profile
Australia
Bahrain
Brazil
CALA
Canada
Caribbean
Global
Hong Kong
Ireland
Mexico
On-hook caller ID
FSK
DTMF
(Start Digit,
Stop Digit) OSI
Bellcore
ETSI
Not supported
Not supported
No
No
Disconnect supervision
Busy tone
Line reversal
No ROI and
ROA
Supported
(425 ±10% Hz,
380 ±10% on/
380 ±10%off)
No
Supported
(425 ± 25 Hz,
250 ms On /
250 ms Off ±
10%)
No Not supported
Bellcore
Bellcore
Bellcore
Bellcore
Bellcore
Supported
(A,C).
NOTE: Not
Supported on
GATI or
Legacy
GATM4/8
No
Yes Not supported
Not supported
Yes
Yes Not supported
Not supported
Not supported
Yes
No
ETSI
ETSI
Not supported
Not supported
No
No
FSK
Message waiting
Voltage reversal
Supported Not supported
Supported Not supported
Stutter dial tone
Not supported
Not supported
Supported Not supported
Not supported
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
Supported Not supported
Supported Not supported
Supported Not supported
Supported Not supported
Supported Not supported
Not supported
Not supported
Not supported
Not supported
Not supported
Supported
(480 ± 10 Hz and 620 ± 10
Hz, 500 ± 100 ms On / 500 ±
80 ms Off)
Yes (NOT supported on Legacy
GATM4/8)
Supported
(425 Hz ±
25%, 450 ms
On/ 450 ms Off
± 23%)
Supported
(425 Hz, 250 ms On/ 250 ms
Off)
No
No
Supported Not supported
Not supported
Supported Not supported
Not supported
BCM50 Installation and Maintenance Guide
276 Appendix N Market profile attributes
Table 69 On-hook caller ID, disconnect supervision, and message waiting parameters (Sheet 2 of 2)
Market profile
New Zealand
Poland
PRC
Russia
South Africa
Spain
Taiwan
United
Kingdom
On-hook caller ID
FSK
ETSI
North America Bellcore
ETSI
Bellcore
ETSI
ETSI
ETSI
ETSI
ETSI
Disconnect supervision Message waiting
DTMF
(Start Digit,
Stop Digit) OSI Busy tone
Line reversal
Not supported
Yes
(500 ms UK
Guarded
Clear)
No
Yes No
No
Not supported
Not supported
Not supported
Not supported
Supported
(D, C)
Not supported
No
Supported
(A/C)
NOTE: Not
Supported on
GATI or
Legacy
GATM4/8
No
Not supported
No
No
Supported in unsupervised mode
(425 Hz, 500 ms On/ 500 ms
Off)
Supported in supervised mode
Supported
(450 ± 25 Hz,
350 ms On/350 ms Off ± 10%)
No
Supported
(425 ± 50 Hz,
400 ms On/400 ms Off ±
100ms)
No
No Supported in
Supervised
Mode (400 ±
25 Hz,
500 ms On/500 ms Off ±
100ms)
Yes
(Supported in
Supervised mode)
No
No
Yes
(500 ms UK
Guarded
Clear)
No
No
Supported
(480 + 620 Hz,
500 ms On/
500 ms Off)
No
Yes
(Supported in
Supervised mode)
No
FSK
Voltage reversal
Supported Not supported
Supported Not supported
Supported Not supported
Supported Not supported
Supported Not
Supported
Supported Not
Supported
Supported Not
Supported
Supported Not supported
Supported Not supported
Stutter dial tone
Not supported
Not supported
Not supported
Not supported
Not
Supported
Not
Supported
Not
Supported
Not supported
Not supported
GASM8 parameters
This section contains information for the GASM8 MBM.
Global analog stations are not supported in the following market profiles: Brazil, CALA,
Denmark, France, Germany, Holland, Italy, Norway, PRC, Spain, Sweden, Switzerland, and
Taiwan.
The GASM8 parameters are provided in the following tables:
NN40170-305
Appendix N Market profile attributes 277
•
Localization, DIP switch settings, specifications, and transmission parameters on page 277
•
Loop interface and call supervision parameters on page 278
•
Dial pulse and DTMF parameters on page 278
•
MWI, On-hook Caller Id, Disconnect Supervision on page 279
Table 70 Localization, DIP switch settings, specifications, and transmission parameters
Specifications Transmission
Market profile
Australia
Localized
Yes
DIP switch setting
Standards used
Australia TS 003
TCE2
Terminal
Input impedance
220
(820
Ω
Ω
120 nF)
||
600
Ω
Nominal
Network
Input
Impedance
220
(820
Ω
Ω
120 nF)
||
600
Ω
PCM coding scheme
A-law
A-law
600
Ω
600
Ω mu-law
Bahrain
Canada
Caribbean
Global
Hong Kong
No (North American
Based A-Law)
Yes
Yes
No (North American based A-law)
No (North American based mu-law)
No (UK-Based)
North
America
North
America
North
America
North
America
North
America
UK
N/A
Refer to North
America Specs
Refer to North
America Specs
N/A
N/A
600
600
600
Ω
Ω
Ω
600
600
600
Ω
Ω
Ω
Ireland N/A 370
(620
Ω
+
|| 310 nF)
600
Ω
300
Ω
(1000
Ω
220 nF)
||
600
Ω
Mexico
New Zealand
United
Kingdom
No (North American based A-law)
North
America
No (UK-based telephony with Australian tones)
UK
North America Yes
Poland Yes
Yes
North
America
Poland
UK
N/A
N/A 370
(620
Ω
+
|| 310 nF)
600
Ω
EIA/TIA-464A
CS-03 Part I
T512.1
T512.2
[1] Polish
ASS_1_v1.doc
2] Technical
Requirements for
Private Automatic
Branch
Exchanges.
Reference Analog interfaces11.doc
600
Ω
BS 6450 Part 4
BTNR 1080
EN 41003 AnnexD
BS 6305
BTNR 315
370
(620
Ω
Ω
310 nF)
||
300
Ω
(1000
Ω
||
220 nF)
600
Ω
600
Ω
300
Ω
(1000
Ω
220 nF)
|| mu-law
A-law mu-law
A-Law
A-law
A-law mu-law
A-law
A-law
BCM50 Installation and Maintenance Guide
278 Appendix N Market profile attributes
Table 71 Loop interface and call supervision parameters
Market profile
Australia
Bahrain
Canada
Caribbean
Global
Hong Kong
Ireland
Mexico
New Zealand
North America
Poland
United Kingdom
Loop interface Call supervision
Ringing frequency
(Hz)
Ringing amplitu de
(Vrms)
Loop
Current
Detect
Thresho ld (mA)
Loop current limit
(mA)
Min. seize duration
(ms)
25 65
20 65
18
18
20 65
20
20
18
65 18
65 18
25 65
20 65
25
20
65
65
25
25
65
65
18
18
18
18
18
18
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
150
150
150
150
150
200
150
200
150
180
200
50
25
80
50
25
25
50
25
Min answer duration
(ms)
Min/max recall duration
(ms)
Min clear duration
(ms)
Disconn ect
Supervi sion OSI
Time
(ms)
25 250/1100 1400
250/1100 1400
250/1100 1400
15/150 1500
250/1100 1400
75/520
15/150
680
1500
850
850
850
850
800
850
850
850
850
850
800
850
Table 72 Dial pulse and DTMF parameters
Market profile
Australia
Bahrain
Canada
Caribbean
Global
Hong Kong
Ireland
Mexico
New Zealand
North America
Poland
United Kingdom
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
Dial pulse coding scheme
Dial pulse DTMF
Min/max break duration (ms)
Min/max make duration (ms)
Min interdigit pause duration (ms)
DTMF coding scheme
(digits)
Min DTMF detect level
(dB)
40/90
25/120
25/120
25/120
25/120
25/120
15/200
25/120
15/200
25/120
44/88
15/200
20/60
10/90
10/90
10/90
300 16 -36
250 12 -36
250 12 -36
250 12 -36
10/90 250 12 -36
10/90 250 12 -36
15/200 200 16 -36
10/90 250 12 -36
15/200
10/90
200
250
25/48 400
15/200 200
16
12
-36
-36
12 -36
16 -36
NN40170-305
Appendix N Market profile attributes 279
Table 73 MWI, On-hook Caller Id, Disconnect Supervision
Market profile
Australia
Bahrain
Canada
Caribbean
Global
Hong Kong
Ireland
Mexico
New Zealand
North America
Poland
United Kingdom
MWI
High
Voltage
(HV)
Supported
110 V
Supported
120 V
Supported
120 V
Supported
120 V
Supported
120 V
Supported
120 V
Not supported
Supported
120 V
Not supported
Supported
120 V
Supported
110 V
Not supported
Line
Reversal
(LR) Tone
Class
MWI
Not supported
Not supported
Not supported
Supported Not supported
Supported Not supported
Supported Not supported
Not supported
Not supported
Supported Not supported
Supported Not supported
Not supported
Supported Not supported
Supported Supported Not supported
Not supported
Supported Not supported
Supported Supported Not supported
Not supported
Not supported
Supported
Supported
Not supported
Not supported
Supported Supported Not supported
On-hook
Caller Id Disconnect Supervision
FSK support OSI
Busy
Tone
Yes - AUSTEL
TS 030
Yes - Bellcore
Yes - Bellcore
Supported Not supported
Supported Not supported
Supported Not supported
Yes - Bellcore
Yes - Bellcore
Supported Not supported
Supported Not supported
Yes - Bellcore Supported Not supported
Yes - BT-SIN227 Supported Not supported
Yes - Bellcore Supported Not supported
Yes - BT-SIN227 Supported Not supported
Yes - Bellcore
Yes - ETSI
Supported Not supported
Supported Not supported
Yes - BT-SIN227 Supported Not supported
Line
Reversal
Not supported
Not supported
Not supported
Not supported
Not supported
Not supported
Not supported
Not supported
Not supported
Not supported
Not supported
Not supported
GASI parameters
This section contains information for the onboard GASI interface.
GASI interfaces are not supported in the following market profiles: Australia, Bahrain, Brazil,
CALA, Denmark, France, Germany, Holland, Ireland, Italy, Mexico, New Zealand, Norway,
Poland, PRC, Spain, Sweden, Switzerland, Taiwan, UK.
Note that the GASI currently has not been localized for markets except North America. The GASI will function in some profiles outside of North America; however, the interface will respond with
North American characteristics.
The GASI parameters are provided in the following tables.
BCM50 Installation and Maintenance Guide
280 Appendix N Market profile attributes
Table 74 GASI parameters (Sheet 1 of 2)
Market Profile
Aspect Parameter Canada Caribbean Global Hong Kong North America
Market Support Localized?
Yes
Transmission Terminal Input
Impedance
Nominal Network
Input Impedance
PCM Coding
Scheme
600
Ω
Loop Interface Ringing Frequency
(Hz)
Ringing Amplitude
(Vrms)
20
63
Loop Current Detect
Threshold (mA)
10.16
Loop Current Limit
(mA)
26
Call
Supervision
Dial Pulse
600
Ω
mu-Law
Minimum Seize
Duration (ms)
Minimum Answer
Duration (ms)
Minimum/Maximum
Recall Duration (ms)
Minimum Clear
Duration (ms)
200
10
250/1100
1400
800 Disconnect
Supervision OSI
Time (ms)
Dial Pulse Coding
Scheme
Minimum/Maximum
Break Duration (ms)
Minimum/Maximum
Make Duration (ms)
N
25/120
10/90
Yes
600
600
mu-Law
20
63
10.16
26
200
10
250/1100
1400
800
N
Ω
Ω
25/120
10/90
No (North
American
Based A-Law)
600
600
20
63
26
200
10
1400
800
N
Ω
Ω
A-Law
10.16
250/1100
25/120
10/90
No (North
American Based
A-Law)
600
Ω
600
mu-Law
20
63
10.16
26
200
10
250/1100
1400
800
N
Ω
25/120
10/90
Yes
600
Ω
600
Ω
mu-Law
20
63
10.16
26
200
10
250/1100
1400
800
N
25/120
10/90
DTMF
MWI
Minimum Interdigit
Pause Duration (ms)
DTMF Coding
Scheme
(digits)
Min DTMF Detect
Level (A) (dBm)
HIgh Voltage (HV)
250
-27
Line Reversal (LR)
Tone
250
-27
250
-27
250
-27
250
-27
Supported -
95V
Supported -
95V
Supported -
95V
Supported - 95V
Not Supported Not Supported Not Supported Not Supported
Supported Supported Supported Supported
Supported - 95V
Not Supported
Supported
On-hook Caller
ID
Class MWI
FSK Support
Not Supported Not Supported Not Supported Not Supported
Yes - Bellcore Yes - Bellcore Yes - Bellcore Yes - Bellcore
Not Supported
Yes - Bellcore
NN40170-305
Appendix N Market profile attributes 281
Table 74 GASI parameters (Sheet 2 of 2)
Aspect Parameter
DIsconnect
Supervision
OSI
Busy Tone
Line Reversal
Specifications Standards used
Market Profile
Canada Caribbean Global Hong Kong
Supported
Refer to North
America Specs
Supported Supported
Refer to North
America
Specs
N/A
Supported
Not Supported Not Supported Not Supported Not Supported
Not Supported Not Supported Not Supported Not Supported
N/A
North America
Supported
Not Supported
Not Supported
EIA/TIA-464A
CS-03 Part I
T512.1
T512.2
ATA2 parameters
This section contains information for the ATA2 device. The ATA2 is either DR6 or DR7 mode.
The mode is determined by the region in which you are located, and is not a modifiable user preference. Refer to the following tables for a list of parameters in each mode.
•
•
ATA2 DR7 Market Support, Transmission and Loop Interface parameters on page 283
•
ATA2 DR7 Call Supervision, Dial Pulse, and DTMF parameters on page 284
ATA2 DR6
Table 75 ATA2 DR6 Market Support, Transmission, Loop Interface, Call Supervision, and
Dial Pulse parameters (Sheet 1 of 2)
Market profile
Australia
Bahrain
Canada
Caribbean
Global
Hong Kong
Call
Supervision
Market
Support Transmission
Loop
Interface Duration (ms)
Localized?
Yes
No (North
American
Based A-Law)
Yes
Yes
No (North
American
Based A-Law)
600
Ω
600
Ω
600
Ω
600
Ω
No (North
American
Based mu-Law)
Terminal Input
Impedance
Ω
Ω
+ (820
|| 120 nF)
600
Ω
25
20
20
20
20
20
Ringing
Frequency
(Hz)
Min/
Max
Recall
10/150
Min
Clear
310
290/1010 1500
290/1010 1500
290/1010 1500
290/1010 1500
290/1010 1500
Dial
Pulse
Coding
Scheme
N
N
N
N
N
N
Dial Pulse
Duration (ms)
Min/
Max
Break
20/125
20/130
20/130
20/130
20/130
20/130
Min/
Max
Make
10/230
15/130
15/130
15/130
15/130
15/130
BCM50 Installation and Maintenance Guide
282 Appendix N Market profile attributes
Table 75 ATA2 DR6 Market Support, Transmission, Loop Interface, Call Supervision, and
Dial Pulse parameters (Sheet 2 of 2)
Market profile
Ireland
Mexico
New Zealand
North America
PRC
Taiwan
United Kingdom
Call
Supervision
Market
Support Transmission
Loop
Interface Duration (ms)
Localized?
No (UK based)
No (North
American
Based A-Law)
No (UK
Based)
Yes
No (North
American
Based A-Law)
300
Ω
(1000
Ω
220 nF)
||
600
Ω
600
Ω
600
Ω
No (North
American
Based mu-Law)
Terminal Input
Impedance
Ω
Ω
+ (1000
|| 220 nF)
600
Ω
25
20
Ringing
Frequency
(Hz)
Min/
Max
Recall
10/150
Min
Clear
310
290/1010 1500
25
20
20
20
10/150 310
290/1010 1500
290/1010 1500
290/1010 1500
Yes 300
Ω
(1000
Ω
||
220 nF)
25 10/150 310
Dial
Pulse
Coding
Scheme
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
Dial Pulse
Duration (ms)
Min/
Max
Break
20/125
20/130
20/125
20/130
20/130
20/130
20/125
Min/
Max
Make
10/230
15/130
10/230
15/130
15/130
15/130
10/230
NN40170-305
Appendix N Market profile attributes 283
ATA2 DR7
Table 76 ATA2 DR7 Market Support, Transmission and Loop Interface parameters
Market
Support Transmission
Market profile
Brazil
CALA
Denmark
France
Germany
Holland
Italy
Norway
Poland
Spain
Sweden
Switzerland
Localized?
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Terminal
Input
Impedance
900
Ω
900 W
300
Ω
(1000
Ω
||
220 nF)
210
Ω
(1020
Ω
140 nF)
||
220
(820
Ω
Ω
110 nF)
||
300
Ω
+
(1000
220 nF)
Ω
||
180
Ω
(620
Ω
||
62 nF)
120
(840
Ω
Ω
110 nF)
||
220
(820
Ω
+
||
120 nF)
220
(820
Ω
+
||
120 nF)
200
Ω
(1000
Ω
||
200 nF)
220
(820
Ω
+
||
120 nF)
PCM
Coding
Scheme
A-Law
A-Law
A-Law
A-Law
A-Law
A-Law
A-Law
A-Law
A-Law
A-Law
A-Law
A-Law
Loop Interface
25
25
25
Ringing
Frequency
(Hz)
Ringing
Amplitude
(Vrms)
Loop
Current
Detect
Threshold
(mA)
Loop
Current
Limit
(mA)
75
75
75
18
18
12
85
85
85
25
25
25
25
25
50
25
25
25
75
75
75
75
75
80
75
75
75
6
6
12
6
12
18
6
12
6
65
55
55
23
85
40
55
30
55
BCM50 Installation and Maintenance Guide
284 Appendix N Market profile attributes
Market profile
Brazil
CALA
Denmark
France
Germany
Holland
Italy
Norway
Poland
Spain
Sweden
Switzerland
Table 77 ATA2 DR7 Call Supervision, Dial Pulse, and DTMF parameters
Call Supervision
Duration (ms)
Dial Pulse
Duration (ms) DTMF
Min
Seize
Min
Answer
Min/Max
Recall
200
150
200
150
150
200
150
200
200 50
200 50
200
140
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
250/1100
250/1100
80/140
220/320
80/120
90/130
80/140
80/150
25/150
80/140
30/150
80/140
225
750
225
750
750
750
750
225
750
225
125
225
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N+1
N
Min
Clear
Dial
Pulse
Coding
Scheme
Min/
Max
Break
40/90
40/90
15/200
60/75
50/70
30/70
50/70
30/70
40/90
60/75
30/70
50/70
Min/
Max
Make
15/55
15/55
15/200
25/40
30/50
25/80
30/50
25/80
20/60
25/40
25/80
30/50
650
400
700
400
250
250
200
800
300
450
450
350
Min
Interdigit
Pause
DTMF
Coding
Scheme
(digits)
Min
DTMF
Detect
Level
(A)
(dBm0)
16 -25
16 -25
16 -25
16 -25
16 -25
16 -25
16 -25
16 -40
16 -25
16 -25
16 -28
16 -25
Voicemail
The following voicemail parameter values are the same for all countries
• AMIS Address Start Key: #
• Country Key Language Toggle: 9
• Country Key Operator Revert: 0
• Maximum CLID Entry: 16
• Maximum Network DN Length: 16
• Maximum Packet Network DN Length: 8
• Broadcast Key Event: 9
See the table Voicemail parameters, by country on page 285for the remaining voicemail
parameters.
NN40170-305
Appendix N Market profile attributes 285
Table 78 Voicemail parameters, by country (Sheet 1 of 2)
Market
Argentina
Australia
Austria
Bahrain
Brazil
Cala **
Caribbean **
Chile
Columbia
Czech
Denmark
Finland
France
Germany
Global
Holland 8
Hong Kong **
India
Indonesia
Ireland
Italy
Malaysia
Mexico
New
Zealand
North
America
8
8
8
8
*
8
8
8
*
*
**
*
*
*
*
8
8
*
8
8
Country
Login
Mailbox
Key
**
Alternate
QZ
Mapping
Default
Language
Enable
Touch
Tone Gate
Local
Number
Length
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
NO
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
NO
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
NO
Spanish
Australian
English
German
Arabic
North
American
English
Spanish
North
American
English
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
United
Kingdom
English
Italian
United
Kingdom
English
Spanish
Australian
English
North
American
English
Spanish
Spanish
Czech
Danish
Finnish NO
Euro French NO
German
North
American
English
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
Dutch
North
American
English
United
Kingdom
English
United
Kingdom
English
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
7
7
9
7
7
8
7
7
7
6
8
7
7
7
8
8
7
8
8
7
11
7
7
7
7
8
7
7
9
16
16
8
16
7
7
16
16
16
16
8
Maximum
CLID
Display
National
Number
Length
16
8
12
9
16
16
16
7
16
16
16
16
11
14
11
11
11
12
11
11
11
6
10
8
10
11
10
14
10
10
11
10
10
8
10
BCM50 Installation and Maintenance Guide
286 Appendix N Market profile attributes
Table 78 Voicemail parameters, by country (Sheet 2 of 2)
Market
Norway
Pakistan
Panama
Peru
Philippines *
Portugal 8
8
8
Poland
POC
Qatar
Romania
*
8
*
**
Russia
Saudi
Arabia
Singapore *
*
*
8
*
Country
Login
Mailbox
Key
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
NO
YES
YES
YES
YES
Alternate
QZ
Mapping
Default
Language
Enable
Touch
Tone Gate
Local
Number
Length
YES
YES
Norwegian NO
United
Kingdom
English
NO
Spanish
Spanish
NO
NO
Spanish NO
Portuguese NO
Polish
Mandarin
NO
NO
Arabic
German
Russian
Arabic
NO
NO
NO
NO
7
7
7
7
6
7
7
11
7
7
7
7
16
9
16
16
16
16
16
16
16
16
Maximum
CLID
Display
National
Number
Length
16
16
11
12
South Africa *
South Korea *
Spain 8
Sweden 8
Switzerland 8
Taiwan
Thailand
UK 8
**
*
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
NO
YES
YES
YES
United
Kingdom
English
United
Kingdom
English
Korean
Euro
Spanish
Swedish
German
Mandarin
Thai
United
Kingdom
English
Arabic
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
YES
NO
8
7
7
7
7
7
8
7
11
6
16
16
16
7
8
7
7
16
9
16
11
11
12
10
11
6
8
11
10
7
9
11
9
12
8
8
12
10
11
8 United Arab
Emirate
*
Uruguay 8
Venezuela 8
YES
YES
Spanish
Spanish
NO
NO
6
7
16
16
10
9
NN40170-305
Appendix N Market profile attributes 287
ISDN line services
The table
ISDN supplementary services and the features available for each.
Table 79 ISDN line services
MCDN over PRI (SL-1)
• Basic Call
• DDI
• Name display
• Number display
• Centralized voice mail
• Camp-on
• ISDN Call Connection Limit
• Network Call Transfer
• Break-in
• Trunk Route Optimization
(TRO)
• Trunk Anti-Tromboning
DPNSS DASS2
• Basic Call
• DDI
• Diversion
• Redirection
• Centralized voice mail
• Call Offer
• Loop avoidance
• Executive Intrusion
• Three Party
• Route Optimization
• Basic Call
• DDI
• Originating line identity (OLI)
• Terminating Line Identity (TLI)
• Call Charge Indication (CCI)
• Call Charge Rate Indication
(CCRD)
ETSI QSIG
• Basic Call
• DDI
• Name display
• Number display
Table 80 ISDN services by Protocol
•
•
•
Protocol
NI
ETSI Euro
HKTA2015
• Caribbean
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Australia
CALA
Denmark
Germany
Global
Holland
Market profile
Hong Kong
• North America
• Italy
• Norway
• PRC
• Spain
• Sweden
• Switzerland
• United Kingdom
• Taiwan
•
Available ISDN services
Basic Call
• DID
• Name display
•
•
Basic Call
DDI
• sub addressing (on
S-loop)
• ETSI Call Diversion
(partial rerouting)
• Basic Call
• DDI
• CLIP
•
•
• AOC-E (specific changes for Holland and Italy)
• MCID
• CLIP
• COLP
• CLIR
•
•
Number display
ONN blocking
COLP
CLIR
Analog and digital trunk types
The table
Analog and digital trunk types and descriptions on page 288 describes the types of
analog and digital trunks.
BCM50 Installation and Maintenance Guide
288 Appendix N Market profile attributes
Some of these trunk types are available only when you select specific market profiles.
Table 81 Analog and digital trunk types and descriptions (Sheet 1 of 2)
Trunk Types Description
Digital Carrier
Types:
T1/E1 Digital line that carries data on 24 channels at 1.544 Mbps (North American); 30 channels at 2048 Mbps (Europe)
Loop, E&M, DID and ground start lines are also versions of T1 lines.
You can program autoanswer T1 loop start, T1 E&M trunks, T1 DID, T1 ground start trunks, PRI and IP trunks to map to target lines to provide for attendant bypass (calling directly to a department or individual) and line concentration (one trunk can map onto several target lines).
T1 Digital
Trunk Types:
DID
Loop
Ground
E&M
PRI
This is a type of T1 trunk line used by an outside caller to dial directly into a line on the BCM50.
This is a type of T1 line. Use this type of line on systems where the service provider supports disconnect supervision for the digital loop start trunks.
These trunks provide remote access to the Business Communications Manager from the public network. This trunk must have disconnect supervision so you can set the trunk to autoanswer, which provides the remote access portal.
T1-groundstart trunk
These lines offer the same features as loop start trunks, but use these lines when the local service provider does not support disconnect supervision for digital loop start trunks. Ground start trunks work with T1 only. By configuring lines as ground start, the system recognizes when a call is released at the far end.
T1 and E&M. Use this type of trunk line to create simple network connections to other phone systems.
This trunk always operates in a disconnected supervised mode.
ISDN interface with 23 B channels and 1 D channel at 1.544 Mbps.
These lines give you incoming and outgoing access to an ISDN network and are autoanswer trunks.
E1 Digital
Trunk Types:
DASS2
DPNSS
R2MFC
PRI
(British) Trunk provides multiline IDA interconnection to the British Telecom network.
You can use a digital private network signaling system to tie together phone systems from various manufacturers over E1 lines, offering significant enhancements to BCM50 networking capabilities.
DPNSS makes it easy to support centralized network functionality within private networks for operators and attendants dealing with large numbers of calls. The routing capabilities provide more larger-network capabilities without the expense of installing a new system, reconfiguring all the nodes or incurring extensive downtime. Most functionality over DPNSS lines is transparent after you program the DPNSS into the system.
DPNSS uses a local node, acting as a terminating node, to communicate with other PBXs over the network using
E1 lines. For example, you can link corporate offices separated geographically over DPNSS lines to other BCM50 systems, bypassing the restrictions of the PSTNs to which they are connected. BCM50 systems can function like a private network using DPNSS.
Provides MFC-R2 (Multi-Frequency Compelled R2) signaling over an E1 trunk.
ISDN interface with 30 B channels and 1 D channel at 1.544 Mbps.
These lines give you incoming and outgoing access to an ISDN network and are autoanswer trunks.
Other Trunk
Types:
BRI The BRI loop supports both trunk (T-loop) and terminal equipment (S-loop) configurations. BRI provides two bearer B-channels operating at 64 kbits/s and a data D-channel that operates at 16 kbits/s. BRI uses the
D-channel to carry call information.
When configured as a trunk (T-loop), the BRI loop supports the following protocol variants:
NI-2: Connects to the network’s S-reference point and uses regular line pools. These trunks can be manual answer or auto-answer.
ETSI Euro: There are two types of connections:
The S-T type connects to the network’s S reference point and uses regular line pools. These trunks can be manual answer or auto-answer.
The T-T type connects to the network’s T reference point and uses the Bloc pool type. These trunks are auto-answer.
ETSI QSIG: Connects to the network’s T reference point and uses the Bloc pool type. These trunks are auto-answer.
NN40170-305
Appendix N Market profile attributes 289
Table 81 Analog and digital trunk types and descriptions (Sheet 2 of 2)
Trunk Types Description
IP
Analog Trunk
Types:
Loop start
ADID
Provides H.323 and SIP trunking between BCM and PBX nodes.
Standard PSTN telephone line.
An analog trunk that allows an outside caller to dial directly into a line on the BCM system. This type of trunk provides one way (incoming only) call service.
BCM50 Installation and Maintenance Guide
290 Appendix N Market profile attributes
NN40170-305
291
Index
Numerics
4x16
default DNs 232 default line numbers 232
A
accessories
ADID
ADID4
default line numbers 225 wiring chart 225
ADID8
American Society of Composers, Authors and
Publishers, Music on Hold licence 24
analog station media bay module, ASM 8 49
analog telephone
analog terminal adapter 2, see ATA2
ASM
ATA2
data communication 124 data transmission requirements 124
insertion loss measurement 126
auxiliary ringer
B
BCM50
ASM (analog station module) 49
DSM 16 and DSM 32 (digital station module) 48
BRI
BRI (onboard)
BRIM
C
caller ID
CAP
D
data devices, using ATA 2 124 data transmission requirements, ATA2 124
default gateway
DHCP
DHCP server
BCM50 Installation and Maintenance Guide
292 Index
digital lines, 4x16 47, 48 digital station media bay module 47
digital telephone
digital trunk module
digitizing analog equipment, ATA2 121
DNs
default on DSM16 239 default on DSM32 239
default on main unit 209 default on telephony connector 209
DSM
4x16 combination module 48, 49 hardware overview 48
DSM16
default DNs 239 wiring chart 239
DSM32
default DNs 239 wiring chart 239
DTM
E
Element Manager
emergency telephone
environment
standards and specifications 26
expansion port
NN40170-305
external equipment, safety warning 42, 58
external line isolation units (LIU), MSC jacks 42, 58
external paging
F
FCC
G
G4x16
G8x16
GASM
GATM
GATM4
default line numbers 227 wiring chart 227
GATM8
H
handset
standards and specifications 26
hard disk
hardware
I
Industry Canada
insertion loss measurement 126
install
installing
telephones and peripherals 121
ISDN
J
jack
external paging 58 page relay 58
L
LAN
LAN port
lease time
LED
BRI onboard, BCM50b, BCM50ba, BCM50be 67
Line numbers
line numbers
default on main unit 209 default on telephony connector 209
line services
lines
Index 293
M
default DNs 209 default line numbers 209
default line numbers 221, 224, 228, 232, 235
wiring chart 221, 223, 227, 231, 235, 239, 243
media bay modules
music on hold
music source
wiring on telephony connector 210
N
network
networking
O
P
page output
BCM50 Installation and Maintenance Guide
294 Index page relay
peripherals
power supply
PRI
R
radio-frequency interference 25
regions
ISDN line services support 287
relay jack
repair
replacing
reset
factory settings 171 level 1 and 2 171
router
router card
S
safety extra low voltage (SELV)
scope status
NN40170-305
specifications
startup profile 151 basic parameters 151
station auxiliary power supply, see SAPS
station media bay module
4x16 combination module 48, 49
support 35 express routing code 35
system defaults, by region 255
T
T1
telephones
telephony connector
default DNs 209 default line numbers 209
Telset Admin
testing
trunk modules
W
WAN
WAN port
WINS server
wire color 209, 227, 228, 232, 235, 237, 239, 243
wiring chart
expansion port 219 expansion unit 219
Index 295
BCM50 Installation and Maintenance Guide
advertisement
* Your assessment is very important for improving the workof artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project
Key Features
- Up to 500 users
- Up to 120 analog lines
- Up to 60 digital lines
- Up to 30 IP trunks
- Integrated voicemail
- Automated attendant
- Call center functionality
- Mobile integration
- Remote access
- Security features
Related manuals
Frequently Answers and Questions
How many users can the BCM50 support?
How many analog lines can the BCM50 support?
How many digital lines can the BCM50 support?
How many IP trunks can the BCM50 support?
Does the BCM50 have integrated voicemail?
Does the BCM50 have an automated attendant?
Does the BCM50 have call center functionality?
advertisement